Home

SEARCH:SEARCH

1. ALIas DEFINE SETUp1 231AUTOSet EXECute SELect REF1 ON Block Header Specifies Data Length Specifies Number of Length Digits that Follow First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 9 Command Syntax First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 10 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups The DP04000 Series GPIB and RS 232 interfaces conform to Tektronix standard codes and formats except where noted The GPIB interface also conforms to IEEE Std 488 2 1987 except where noted Acquisition Command Group Use the commands in the Acquisition Command Group to set up the modes and functions that control how the instrument acquires the signals you input to the channels and processes them into waveforms Using these commands for acquiring waveforms you can do the following Start and stop acquisitions Control whether each waveform is simply acquired averaged or enveloped over successive acquisitions of that waveform Set the controls or conditions that start and stop acquisitions E Determine the action the system takes upon completing an acquisition such as saving all waveforms and taking a measurement when the acquisition is stopped Control acquisition of acquired channel waveforms Set acquisition parameters Table 2 13 Acquisition Commands Command Description ACQuire Sets or returns acquisition mode ACQuire MAXSam
2. Bit 5 If set the color index in the four LSB s bits 0 through 3 is applied to the foreground or background color depending on the fg bg bit bit 4 Bit 4 If set color change is applied to the background otherwise applies to the foreground Bit 0 3 Specifies the color index 0 through 15 to change color to as follows Index 0 Black background Index 1 Yellow Chl Index 2 Cyan Ch2 Index 3 Magenta Ch3 Index 4 Green Ch4 Index 5 Red math Index 6 White reference Index 7 Orange Index 8 Gray graticule Index 9 White text Index 10 Tek Blue Index 11 Bright Blue Index 12 undefined Index 13 Blue Index 14 undefined Index 15 Dark Blue The ESC escape character followed by the character turns inverse video on or off and can be embedded in the message string Example abcESC defESC ghi specifies the string abcdefghi where the def portion is displayed in inverse video Example abcESC defESC ESC ghi specifies the string abcdefghi where the def portion appears in the channel 3 color magenta and the ghi portion appears in the normal text color except it s in inverse video First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 202 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order An alternate way to enter characters is octal escape sequences This consists of a backslash followed by numerals in the standard C language p
3. MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt Sets or returns the slope of the edge used for immediate delay from and to waveform measurements MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE Sets or returns the from source for all single channel immediate measurements MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 Sets or returns the source to measure to for phase or delay immediate measurements MEASUrement IMMed TYPe Sets or returns the type of the immediate measurement MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Returns the units of the immediate measurement MEASUrement IMMed VALue Returns the value of the immediate measurement MEASUrement INDICators Returns all measurement indicator parameters MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt Returns the position of the specified horizontal measurement indicator MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ Returns the number of horizontal measurement indicators currently being displayed MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT Returns the number of vertical measurement indicators currently being displayed First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 23 Measurement Commands cont Command Description MEASUrement INDICators STATE Set or returns the state of visible measurement indicators MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt Returns the value of the specified vertical measurement indicator MEASUre
4. lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum width in seconds SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the clock slope setting for a setup hold search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHOId CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk EDGE FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Group Syntax This command sets or returns the clock source setting for an setup hold search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt xX gt TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 241 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where lt x gt 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the clock threshold setting for an setup hold search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk THReshold lt NR3 gt ECL TTL SEARCH
5. Measurement MEASUrement INDICators STATE OFF MEAS lt x gt MEASUrement INDICators STATE OFF turns off visible measurement indicators MEAS lt x gt turns on the display of visible measurement indicators for measurement lt x gt where lt x gt can be 1 2 3 or 4 There must be an active measurement before you can activate an indicator for a specified measurement MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE MEAS2 turns on the display of visible measurement indicators for measurement 2 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 177 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE OFF indicating that no measurement indicators are active MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the value of the specified vertical measurement indicator lt x gt from the trigger point where lt x gt can be 1 2 3 or 4 A negative value means that the indicator is positioned earlier in the waveform record than the trigger point Measurement MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt MEASUREMENT INDICATORS VERT2 might returnMEASUREMENT INDICATORS VERT2 3 724507E 6 indicating that the second measurement indicator is positioned 3 72 ms before the trigger point MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt Query Only 2 178 Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns all measu
6. Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC Wait for read from Output Queue Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This is the simplest approach It requires no status handling or loops However you must set the controller time out for longer than the acquisition operation Messages Overview The information contained in the topic tabs above covers all the programming interface messages the instrument generates in response to commands and queries For most messages a secondary message from the instrument gives more detail about the cause of the error or the meaning of the message This message is part of the message string and is separated from the main message by a semicolon Each message is the result of an event Each type of event sets a specific bit in the SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER Thus each message is associated with a specific SESR bit In the message tables the associated SESR bit is specified in the table title with exceptions noted with the error message text No Event The following table shows the messages when the system has
7. TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the polarity of the A video trigger This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity NEGative POSitive TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity POSitive argument sets the instrument to trigger on a positive video sync pulse NEGative argument sets the instrument to trigger on a negative video sync pulse TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the instrument to trigger on a negative video pulse TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY might return TRIGger A VIDeo POLARITY POSITIVE indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on a positive video sync pulse TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce Conditions 2 310 This command sets or returns the source for the A video trigger This command is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the Trig menu and selecting a channel from the Source drop down menu This command requires a DPO4VID application module First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce CH lt x gt TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce CH lt x gt argument specifies one of the input channels of the instrument as the A video trigger The value of x ranges from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instruments TRIGG
8. No more than 65 feet 20 meters of cable should be used to connect devices to a bus At least two thirds of the devices on the network should be powered on while using the network Connect the devices on the network in a star or linear configuration Do not use loop or parallel configurations Your instrument has a 24 pin GPIB connector on its rear side panel This connector has a D type shell and conforms to IEEE Std 488 1341987 Attach an IEEE Std 488 1341987 GPIB cable to this connector and to your controller as shown in the following figure If necessary the GPIB connectors can be stacked as shown in the figure below To function correctly your instrument must have a unique device address The default settings for the GPIB configuration are m GPIB Address 1 GPIB ModeGPIB Talk Listen To change either of the GPIB settings do the following 1 Select GPIB Configuration 4 from the Utilities menu 2 Click the Configuration Talk Listen button 3 Change the GPIB Address to a unique address 4 Click the Close button The instrument is now set up for bidirectional communication with your controller First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Documentation Getting Started DP0O4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes User Manual The user manual has information about installing and operating the instrument It also provides concepts and theories about using the instrum
9. REF3 LABEL XPOS 1 0000 REF3 LABEL YPOS 1 8000 REF4 LABEL NAME REF4 LABEL XPOS 1 0000 REF4 LABEL YPOS 2 2000 SELECT CH1 SELECT CH2 SELECT CH3 SELECT CH4 ojojoj SELECT CONTROL CH1 SELECT MATH lt 1 4 gt SELECT REF lt 1 4 gt Waveform Default Values The following table lists the Waveform factory default setup values Command Default Values DATA DESTINATION REF 1 DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DATA FRAMESTART 1 DATA FRAMESTOP 5000 DATA SOURCE CH1 DATA START 1 DATA STOP 5000 Zoom Default Values The following table lists the Zoom factory default setup values Command Default Values ZOOM GRATICULE SIZE 80 ZOOM GRATICULE SPLIT EIGHTYTWENTY ZOOM MODE 0 ZOOM SCROLL DIRECTION STOP ZOOM SCROLL LOCK 0 ZOOM SCROLL SPEED 1 ZOOM ZOOM1 CH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POSITIO50 0000 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values ZOOM ZOOM1 CH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL SCALE 5 ZOOM ZOOM1 CH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 ZOOM ZOOM1 CH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM1 MATH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POS IB 6000 ZOOM ZOOM1 MATH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL SCALE ZOOM ZOOM1 MATHs1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0000 ZOOM ZOOM1 MATH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM1 REF lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POSITIG0N0000 ZOOM ZOOM1 REF lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL
10. SAVe WAVEform Saves a waveform to one of four reference memory locations or a mass storage file SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat Sets or returns the format for saved Search Command Group waveforms The Search commands provide Search Commands Command Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy Copies the search criteria to the trigger or the trigger criteria to the search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE Sets the search state to on or off SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TOTAL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Returns the total amount of matches for this search Sets or queries the serial search type SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Sets or queries the search condition for CAN search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Sets or queries the CAN search condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier Sets or queries the CAN data qualifier SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SiZe Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Sets or queries the binary data string to be used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Sets or queries the CAN Frame Type to be used SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS
11. Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOSTI OUT VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOSI OUT VALue lt bin gt is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SPI search if search condition is MISO MOSI or MISOMOSI This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the data string length in bytes First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 227 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the bus for a serial search This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 B2 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 specifies the bus 1 source B2 specifies the bus 2 source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the slope for an edge search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARC
12. TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt ECL specifies a 1 3 V trigger level TTL specifies a 1 4 V trigger level SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Group This command sets or returns the polarity for a pulse search to determine where to place a mark Search First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 237 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity NEGative POSitive SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity POSITIVe specifies that the instrument will only place a mark when the polarity of the pulse is positive NEGative specifies that the instrument will only place a mark when the polarity of the pulse is negative SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the source waveform for a pulse search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where lt x gt 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Group Syntax Arguments 2 238 This command sets or returns the condition for generating a pulse widt
13. 2 180 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay 2 179 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum 2 181 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN 2 181 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum 2 181 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 2 182 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 2 182 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE 2 183 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev 2 184 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe 2 184 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts 2 189 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue 2 189 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt 2 178 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH 2 191 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW 2 192 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 2 192 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 2 193 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod 2 194 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH 2 195 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW 2 195 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 2 196 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 2 197 MEASUrement REFLevel 2 191 MEASUrement SNAPShot 2 198 MEASUrement STATIstics MODE 2 198 MEASUrement STATIstics WElghting 2 199 MEASUrement 2 165 MEASUrement GATing 2 166 MEASUrement IMMed 2 167 MEASUrement METHod 2 190 MESSage BOX 2 199 MESSage CLEAR 2 200 MESSage SHOW 2 200 MESSage STATE 2 204 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Miscellaneous commands AUTOSet 2 60 AUXout 2 60 AUXout EDGE 2 61 AUXout SOUrce 2 61 BELI 2 62 CLEARMenu 2 91 DATE 2 106 DDT 2 107 FPANEL PRESS 2 136 FPANEL TURN 2 137 G
14. Examples This command sets or queries the I2C address mode to 7 or 10 bit This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 ADDR10 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 specifies the 7 bit I2C address mode ADDR10 specifies the 10 bit I2C address mode TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C ADDRESS MODE ADDR1O sets the I2C address mode to 10 bit TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe Conditions Group 2 260 This command sets or returns the I2C address type to I2C special addresses general call HS mode etc or to a user specified address This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess TYPe GENeralcall STARtbyte HSmode EEPROM USER TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess TYPe GENeralcal1 specifies a general call address STARtbyte specifies a start byte address HSmode specifies a high speed mode address EEPROM specifies an EEPROM address USER specifies a user address TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or queries the binary address string used for the I2C trigger if the trigger condition is ADDR or ADDRANDDATA This command requires a DPO4EMBD application mo
15. HORIZONTAL ROLL might return HORIZONTAL ROLL OFF indicating that the Roll Mode is disabled This query only command returns identifying information about the instrument and related firmware Miscellaneous ID IDN ID might return TEK TDS5404 CF 91 1CT FV 01 00 912 This indicates the instrument model number configured format and firmware version number This query only command returns the instrument identification code Miscellaneous IDN ID IDN might return TEKTRONIX TDS5054B 10000001 CF 91 1CT FV 01 00 912 indicating the instrument model number serial number configured number and firmware version number First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 151 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LANGuage Group Syntax Examples Sets or returns the user interface display language This command only affects the oscilloscope displayed language Remote commands and their responses are always in English Miscellaneous LANGuage ENGLish FRENch GERMan ITALian SPANish PORTUguese JAPAnese KOREan RUSS LANGuage LANGUAGE might return LANGUAGE ENGLISH LANGuage INCRement No Query Form Group Syntax LOCk Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 152 Changes the oscilloscope display language to the next language in the sequence Miscellaneous LANGuage INCRement This command enables or disables all front panel but
16. MODe STATE ON OFF lt NR1 gt Zoom MODe STATE ON turns on Zoom mode OFF turns off Zoom mode lt NR1 gt 0 turns off Zoom mode any other value turns on Zoom mode ZOOM MODE OFF turns off Zoom mode ZOOM MODE might return ZOOM MODE 1 indicating that Zoom mode is currently turned on ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Examples This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces of the specified zoom where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window The ZOOm query returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display Zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt ZOOM ZOOM1 might return ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE 1 SCROLLLOCK 1 CH1 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 0000 SCALE 5 ZOOM ZOOM1 CH1 VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZO0OM1 CH2 HORIZONTAL POSTION 50 0000 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 345 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SCALE 5 ZOOM ZOOM1 CH2 VERTICAL POSITION 0 000 SCALE 1 0000 ZO0M ZO00M1 CH3 HORIZONTAL POSITION5O 000 SCALE 5 ZOOM ZO0M1 CH3 VERTICAL indicating the Zoom transforms for all traces ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor Query Only This query only command returns the zoom factor of a particular zoom box Group Zoom Syntax Z0Om ZOOM lt x gt FACtor Returns lt NR1 gt is the zoom factor of a zoom box ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal PO
17. Returns Examples Returns the time that the oscilloscope was last powered on Miscellaneous STArtuptime The STB Read Status Byte query returns the contents of the Status Byte Register SBR using the Master Summary Status MSS bit For more information refer to Registers Status and Error STB CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg FACtory SRE lt NRI gt STB might return 96 showing that the SBR contains the binary value 01100000 TEKSecure No Query Form Group Syntax 2 252 This command initializes both waveform and setup memories overwriting any previously stored data TEKSecure deletes all four waveform reference memory slots on the hard drive if they exist and puts all setups in the factory initialized state External setups that are stored on the hard drive are not affected Miscellaneous TEKSecure First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples TIME Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TEKSECURE initializes both waveform and setup memories This command sets or returns the time that the instrument displays This command is equivalent to selecting Set Time amp Date from the Utilities menu and then setting the fields in the Time group box Miscellaneous TIME lt QString gt TIME DATE lt QString gt is a time in the form hh mm ss where hh refers to a
18. TRIGger A PULse 2 282 TRIGger A RUNT 2 294 TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 295 TRIGger A SETHold 2 296 TRIGger A TY Pe 2 304 TRIGger A VIDeo 2 305 TRIGger B 2 312 TRIGger B BY 2 313 TRIGger B EDGE 2 314 TRIGger B EVENTS 2 316 TRIGger B LEVel 2 317 TRIGger B STATE 2 319 TRIGger B TIMe 2 319 TRIGger B TYPe 2 320 TRIGger STATE 2 321 TRIGger 2 254 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition 2 256 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 257 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier 2 257 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe 2 258 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue 2 258 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype 2 258 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe 2 259 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue 2 259 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe 2 260 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TY Pe 2 260 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue 2 261 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition 2 261 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection 2 262 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe 2 263 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue 2 263 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition 2 263 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe 2 265 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue 2 264 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue 2 264
19. TST Query Only Group Syntax Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger STATE TRIGger A MODe ARMED indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger information AUTO indicates that the instrument is in the automatic mode and acquires data even in the absence of a trigger DPO indicates that the instrument is in DPO mode PARTIAL indicates that the A trigger has occurred and the instrument is waiting for the B trigger to occur READY indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and that the instrument is ready to accept a trigger SAVE indicates that the instrument is in save mode and is not acquiring data TRIGGER indicates that the instrument triggered and is acquiring the post trigger information TRIGGER STATE might return TRIGGER STATE ARMED indicating that the pretrigger data is being acquired This query only command tests self test the GPIB interface and returns a 0 Miscellaneous TST TST always returns 0 UNLock No Query Form This command no query form unlocks the front panel The command is equivalent to LOCk NONe First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 321 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples VERBose 2 322 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments NOTE If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State RW
20. 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 15 Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values ZOOM ZOOM3 SCROLLLOCK 1 ZOOM ZOOM3 STATE 0 ZOOM ZOOM4 CH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POSITIO90 0000 ZOOM ZOOM4 CH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL SCALE 5 ZOOM ZOOM4 CH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 ZOOM ZOOM4 CH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM4 MATH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POSI B B000 ZOOM ZOOM4 MATH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL SCALE ZOOM ZOOM4 MATHs1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0000 ZOOM ZOOM4 MATHs1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM4 REF lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POSITIO0N0000 ZOOM ZOOM4 REF lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL SCALES ZOOM ZOOM4 REF lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 ZOOM ZOOM4 REF lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM4 SCROLLLOCK 1 ZOOM ZOOM4 STATE 0 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer C 16 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix D GPIB Interface Specifications GPIB Interface Overview Specifications This topic describes details of the GPIB remote interface of the instrument Normally you will not need this information to use the instrument but this information may be useful if you are connecting to controllers with unusual configurations GPIB Functions The following table lists the GPIB interface functions and electrical function subsets supported by this instrument and a brief description of each function Interface Messages The following table shows the
21. A COMMUNICATION CLOCK POLARITY First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 255 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS Conditions Group Syntax Arguments RISE TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION CMI PULSEFORM PLUSONE TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION SOURCE CH1 SOURCE TYPE DATA This command sets or queries the serial trigger type I2C CAN or SPI This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS 12C SPI CAN TRIGger A BUS I2C specifies the Inter IC bus SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 256 This command sets or returns the CAN condition This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition SOF FRAME type IDenti fier DATA IDANDDATA EOF ACKMISS TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDi tion SOF enables triggering on the start of frame FRAME enables triggering on the type of frame IDENTIFIER enables triggering on a matching identifier DATA enables triggering on matching data IDENTANDDATA enables triggering on a matching identifier and matching data EOF enables triggering on the end of frame First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetica
22. BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 62 This command sets or returns the bit rate for the CAN bus This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate RATELOK RATE20K RATE3 3K RATE5OK RATE62K RATE83K RATELOOK RATE125K RATE250K RATE500K RATE800K RATELM BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate RATE10K sets the bit rate to 10 kbps RATE2OK sets the bit rate to 20 kbps RATE 33K sets the bit rate to 33 kbps First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RATESOK sets the bit rate to 50 kbps RATE62K sets the bit rate to 62 kbps RATE83kK sets the bit rate to 83 kbps RATELOOK sets the bit rate to 100 kbps RATE125K sets the bit rate to 125 kbps RATE250K sets the bit rate to 250 kbps RATE5OOK sets the bit rate to 500 kbps RATE8OOK sets the bit rate to 800 kbps RATE1M sets the bit rate to 1 Mbps BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the probing method used to probe the CAN bus This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe CANH CANL RX TX DIFFerential BUS B lt X gt CAN PRObe CANH specifies a single ended bus signal active high CANL specifies a single ended bus signal active high RX specifies the receive signal TX specifies th
23. CURVe DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE PT_FMT might return WFMOutpre PT_Fmt ENV indicating that the waveform data is a series of min max pairs First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 337 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre PT_Off Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands This query only command always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATa SOUtce is on or displayed If the waveform is not displayed the query form generates an error and returns event code 2244 This command is listed for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre PT_OfFf DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre PT_ORder Query Only 2 338 Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command specifies whether the source waveform is Fast Acquisition A Fast Acquisition waveform is stored as a 200 vertical by 500 horizontal point bitmap Each point represents display intensity for that screen location Only CURVe query functions are allowed on Fast Acquisition waveforms When the WFMOutpre PT_ OR query returns Column this indicates that the source is a Fast Acquisition waveform and that each of 500 possible horizontal columns being transmitted contains 200 vertical points When the WFMOutpre PT_OR query returns Linear this indicates that the source is not a Fast Acquisition waveform and that each horizontal column being sent contains only o
24. Code Message 300 Device specific error 310 System error 311 Memory error 312 PUD memory lost 313 Calibration memory lost 314 Save recall memory los 315 Configuration memory lost 350 Queue overflow does not set DDE bit System Event The following table lists the system event messages These messages are generated whenever certain system conditions occur First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Execution Warning Internal Warning Table 3 7 System Event Messages Code Message 400 Query event 401 Power on PON bit 7 set 402 Operation complete OPC bit 0 set 403 User request URQ bit 6 set 404 Power fail DDE bit 3 set 405 Request control 410 Query INTERRUPTED QYE bit 2 set 420 Query UNTERMINATED QYE bit 2 set 430 Query DEADLOCKED QYE bit 2 set 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response QYE bit 2 set The following table lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of command execution These notify you that you may get unexpected results Table 3 8 Execution Warning Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 540 Measurement warning 541 Measurement warning Low signal amplitude 542 Measurement warning Unstable histogram 543 Measurement warning Low resolution 544 Measurement warning Uncertain edge
25. DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was not there so the commands ACQUire MODe ENVelope OPC NUMAVg 10 will set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions for averaging to 10 4 When you concatenate queries the responses to all the queries are concatenated into a single response message For example if the display imageview color is temperature and the display recordview color is spectral the concatenated query DISplay COLOr PALETTE IMAGEVIEW RECORDVIEW will return the following If the header is on DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE IMAGEVIEW TEMPERATURE DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE RECORDVIEW SPECTRAL If the header is off TEMPERATURE SPECTRAL 5 Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message For example ACQuire MODe SAMple NUMAVg STATE is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample The message then queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition state Concatenated commands and queries are executed in the order received Here are some invalid concatenations DISPlay STYle NORMal ACQuire NUMAVg 10 no colon before ACQuire DISPlay COLor CURSorl1 1 CURSor2 5 extra colon before CURSor2 use DISPlay COLor CURSorl1 1 CURSor2 5 instead DISPlay STY1e NORMal OPC colon before a star command DISPlay COLor CURSor1 1 COLor CURSor2 5 levels of the mnemon
26. ESE commands You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request Enable Register SRER using the SRE command When the operation is complete a Service Request will be generated The same command sequence using the OPC command for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Enable the status registers DESE 1 ESE 1 SRE 32 Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices The SRQ when it comes interrupts those tasks and returns control to this task Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events This technique is more efficient but requires more sophisticated programming Using the OPC Query The OPC query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation that generates an OPC message is complete A time out could occur if you try to read the output queue before there is any data in it The same command sequence using the OPC query for synchronization looks like this
27. First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values TRIGGER B BY EVENTS TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING DC TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE RISE TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 2 TRIGGER B LEVEL 0 0000 TRIGGER B STATE 0 TRIGGER B TIME 16 0000E 9 TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE Vertical Default Values The following table lists the Vertical factory default setup values Command Default Values CH lt 1 4 gt BANDWIDTH 500 0000E 6 CH lt 1 4 gt COUPLING DC CH lt 1 4 gt DESKEW 0 0000 CH lt 1 4 gt INVERT 0 CH lt 1 4 gt LABEL NAME i CH lt 1 4 gt LABEL XPOS 1 0000 CH lt 1 4 gt LABEL YPOS lt 1 gt 2 2000 lt 2 gt 1 8000 lt 3 gt 1 4000 lt 4 gt 1 000 CH lt 1 4 gt OFFSET 0 0000 CH lt 1 4 gt POSITION 0 0000 CH lt 1 4 gt PROBEFUNC EXTATTEN 1 0000 CH lt 1 4 gt PROBEFUNC EXTUNITS y CH lt 1 4 gt SCALE 100 0000E 3 CH lt 1 4 gt TERMINATION 1 0000E 6 DATA DESTINATION REF1 DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DATA FRAMESTART 1 DATA FRAMESTOP 5000 DATA SOURCE CH1 DATA START 1 DATA STOP 5000 REF1 LABEL NAME S REF1 LABEL XPOS 1 0000 REF1 LABEL YPOS 1 0000 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values REF2 LABEL NAME REF2 LABEL XPOS 1 0000 REF2 LABEL YPOS 1 4000 REF3 LABEL NAME
28. GPIBUsb STATUS 2 138 H Hard Copy commands HARDCopy 2 139 HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter 2 139 HARDCopy PRINTer ADD 2 141 HARDCopy PRINTer DELete 2 141 HARDCopy PRINTer LIST 2 141 HARDCopy PRINTer REName 2 142 HARDCopy INKSaver 2 140 HARDCopy LAYout 2 140 HARDCopy PREVIEW 2 140 HARD Copy 2 139 HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter 2 139 HARDCopy PRINTer ADD 2 141 HARDCopy PRINTer DELete 2 141 HARDCopy PRINTer LIST 2 141 Index 4 HARDCopy PRINTer REName 2 142 HARDCopy INKSaver 2 139 HARDCopy LAYout 2 140 HARDCopy PREVIEW 2 140 HDR 2 142 HEADer 2 143 Horizontal commands HORizontal MAIn DELay STATe 2 145 HORizontal ACQLENGTH 2 144 HORizontal MAIn SAMPLERate 2 147 HORizontal MAIn SECdiv 2 148 HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing 2 149 HORizontal MAIn UNIts 2 148 HORizontal PREViewstate 2 149 HORizontal RECOrdlength 2 149 HORizontal RESOlution 2 150 HORizontal 2 144 HORizontal MAIn DELay MODe 2 145 HORizontal MAIn DELay TIMe 2 146 HORizontal MAIn POSition 2 147 HORizontal MAIn SCAle 2 147 HORizontal MAIn 2 145 HORizontal ROLL 2 150 HORizontal MAIn DELay STATe 2 145 HORizontal ACQLENGTH 2 144 HORizontal MAIn SAMPLERate 2 147 HORizontal MAIn SECdiv 2 148 HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing 2 149 HORizontal MAIn UNIts 2 148 HORizontal PREViewstate 2 149 HORizontal RECOrdlength 2 149 HORizontal RESOlution 2 150 HORizontal 2 144 HORizontal MAIn DELay MODe 2 145 HORizontal MAIn DELay
29. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALUe First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 189 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Examples MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts ESR ALLEv MEASUREMENT MEAS1 VALUE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 VALue 2 8740E 06 If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it then an item is added to the error queue The error can be checked for with the ESR and ALLEv commands MEASUrement METHod 2 190 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the method used to calculate the 0 and 100 reference level This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired Determine Base Top From setting Measurement MEASUrement METHod Auto HIStogram MINMax MEASUrement METHOd MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 HIStogram sets the high and low reference levels to the most common values either above or below the mid point depending on whether the high reference point or the low reference point is being defined Because the statistical approach ignores short term aberrations such as overshoot or ringing the histogram method is the best setting for examining pulses MINMax uses the highest and l
30. POSITION 50 0000 SCALE 5 Z0OM ZOOM1 CH4 VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 SCALE 1 0000 Z00M ZOOM1 MATH1 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 0000 SCALE 5 ZO0OM ZOOM1 MATH1 VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 SCALE 1 0000 Z00M ZOOM1 MATH2 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 0000 SCALE 5 ZOOM ZOOM1 MATH2 VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 ZOOm GRAticule SIZE Query Only Group Syntax Examples This queries returns the size in percent of the Zoom lower graticule The query always returns 80 Zoom ZOOm GRAticule SIZE ZOOM GRATICULE SIZE always returns ZOOM GRATICULE SIZE 80 indicating that the zoom graticule size is set to 80 ZOOm GRAticule SPLit Query Only 2 344 Group Syntax Related Commands This returns the sizes of the acquisition and zoom windows when Zoom is selected The query always returns EIGHTYTWENTY Zoom ZOOm GRAticule SPLit ZOOm MODe STATE First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples ZOOm MODe STATE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ZOOM GRATICULE SPLIT always returns ZOOM GRATICULE SPLIT EIGHTYTWENTY indicating that the display area is divided 80 20 between the zoomed graticule and the acquisition graticule This command turns Zoom mode on or off The Zoom query returns the current state of Zoom mode This command is equivalent to pressing the ZOOM button located on the front panel Zoom Zoom
31. PROBE RESISTANCE might return CH2 PROBE RESISTANCE 10 0000E 06 indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to Channel 2 is 10 MQ Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal BYPass PASS CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts Query Only Group 2 88 This query only command returns a string describing the units of measure for the probe attached to the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments Vertical First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts Examples CH4 PROBE UNITS might return CH4 PROBE UNITS V indicating that the units of measure for the probe attached to channel 4 are volts CH lt x gt SCAle This command sets or returns the vertical scale of the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instruments Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Vertical Setup from the Vertical menu and then viewing or setting the Scale Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter For a signal with constant amplitude increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger Scale affects
32. SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk THReshold ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 242 Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the data source setting for an setup hold search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A SETHO1d DATa SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A SETHOld DATa SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where lt x gt 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the data threshold setting for an setup hold search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHO1d DATa THReshold lt NR3 gt ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHO1d DATa THReshold ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the hold ti
33. SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDi tion SOF FRAMEtype IDenti fier DATA IDANDDATA EOF ACKMISS SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDi tion Arguments SOF specifies a search based on start of frame FRAMEtype specifies a search based on frame type IDenti fier specifies a search based on frame identifier DATA specifies a search based on frame data IDANDDATA specifies a search based on frame identifier and data EOF specifies end of frame ACKMISS specifies a search based on the missing the ACK field First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 219 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the CAN search condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either This only applies if the search condition is IDentifier This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt xX gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection READ specifies a read condition WRITE specifies a write condition NOCARE specifies either a read or write condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIifier Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 220 Th
34. Sets or returns the time base trigger delay mode First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Mark Command Group Table 2 21 Horizontal Commands cont Command Command Groups Description HORizontal MAIn DELay TIMe Sets or returns the main time base trigger delay time HORizontal MAIn POSition Sets or returns the waveform horizontal position on the display HORizontal MAIn SAMPLERate Sets the horizontal sample rate to the desired number of samples per second Or returns the current horizontal sample rate HORizontal MAIn SCAle Sets time per division for the main time base Or returns the main time base horizontal scale HORizontal MAIn SECdiv Sets time per division for the main time base Or returns the main time base horizontal scale HORizontal MAIn UNIts Returns the units for the horizontal main time base HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing Sets or returns the units string for the horizontal main time base HORizontal PREViewstate Returns whether or not the acquisition system is in the preview state HORizontal RECOrdlength Sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame Or returns the current horizontal record length HORizontal RESOlution Sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame and simultaneously adjusts the sample rate to maintain a con
35. Syntax BUS B lt x gt TYPE 12C SPI CAN BUS B lt X gt TYPE Arguments I2C specifies the Inter IC bus SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus BUS THReshold CH lt x gt This command sets or returns the threshold for a channel This setting applies to all trigger types that use the channel Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger Syntax BUS THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL BUS THReshold CH lt x gt Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold level in volts ECL specifies a 1 3 V threshold level TTL specifies a 1 4 V threshold level BUSY Query Only This query only command returns the status of the instrument This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application program First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 70 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples CAL Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Status and Error BUSY OPC WAI lt NR1 gt 0 means that the instrument is not busy processing a command whose execution time is extensive lt NR1 gt means that the instrument is busy processing one of the commands listed in the table below Commands that affect BUSY response Operation Command Single sequence ACQuire STATE
36. TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe TRIGger A EDGE COUPling CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the A edge trigger source EXT specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector located on the rear panel of the instrument LINE specifies AC line voltage First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 267 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the A edge trigger source TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel is the A edge trigger source TRIGger A HOLDoff Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the A trigger holdoff parameters These parameters specify the time period during which the trigger circuitry is not looking to generate a trigger event This command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings Trigger TRIGger A HOLDoff TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe TRIGGER A HOLDOFF might return TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 900 0000E 09 BY DEFAULT indicating that the A edge trigger holdoff time by default is 900 ns TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 268 This command sets or returns the A trigger holdoff time This command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Tri
37. display function This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Trigger BUS B lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt BUS B lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt specifies the position BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity FALL RISe BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity FALL specifies the falling edge RISe specifies the rising edge BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 2 66 This command sets or returns the SPI SCLK source First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce CH lt x gt is the channel to use as the SPI SCLK source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity LOW HIGH BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity LOW specifies an active low polarity HIGH specifies an active
38. finds the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement METHod command the PK2Pk measurement measures the histogram peak to peak difference PKPKJitter measures the variance minimum and maximum values in the time locations of the cross point First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 187 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 188 PKPKNoi se measures the peak to peak noise on a waveform at the mid reference level POVershoot The positive overshoot amplitude measurement finds the positive overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region Positive Overshoot Maximum High Amplitude x 100 PTOT measures the top value used in extinction ratio measurements PwIdth positive width is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region QFACtor measures the quality factor The Q factor is a figure of merit for an eye diagram which indicates the vertical eye opening relative to the noise at the low and high logic levels It is the ratio of the eye size to noise RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform The rise time is the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a low reference value default
39. the value then BN Fmt and BYT Or are ignored m FAStest specifies that the data be sent in the fastest possible manner consistent with maintaining accuracy and is interpreted with respect to the first waveform specified in the DATA SOUrce list ENCdg will always be BIN BYT_Or will always be LSB but BN_Fmt and BYT_Nr will depend on the first DATa SOUrce waveform BN_ Fmt will be RI unless the waveform is internally stored as a floating point number in which case the FP format will be used E RIBinary specifies signed integer data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first When BYT_Nr is 1 the range is from 128 through 127 When BYT_Nr is 2 the range is from 32 768 through 32 767 When BYT_Nr is 8 then the waveform being queried has been set to Fast Acquisition mode Center screen is 0 zero The upper limit is one division above the top of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the bottom of the screen This is the default argument m RPBinary specifies the positive integer data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first When BYT_Nr is 1 the range from 0 through 255 When BYT_Nr is 2 the range is from 0 to 65 535 When BYT_Nr is 8 then the waveform being queried has been set to Fast Acquisition mode The center of the screen is 127 The upper limit is one division above the top of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the bottom
40. 0000 MASK MARGIN STATE 0 MASK MASKPRE AMPLITUDE 100 0000E 3 MASK MASKPRE HSCALE 200 0000E 9 MASK MASKPRE HTRIGPOS 500 0000E 3 MASK MASKPRE PATTERNBITS 1 MASK MASKPRE PRESAMPBITS 0 MASK MASKPRE RECORDLENGTH 5000 MASK MASKPRE TRIGTOSAMP 0 0000 MASK MASKPRE VOFFSET 0 0000 MASK MASKPRE VPOS 0 0000 MASK MASKPRE VSCALE 1 0000E 3 MASK MASKPRE WIDTH 0 0000 MASK POLARITY POSITIVE MASK SOURCE CH1 MASK STANDARD NONE MASK STOPONVIOLATION 0 MASK TEST BEEP COMPLETION 0 MASK TEST BEEP FAILURE 0 MASK TEST DELAY 0 0000 MASK TEST HARDCOPY 0 MASK TEST LOG FAILURE 0 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 7 Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values MASK TEST REPEAT 0 MASK TEST SAMPLE THRESHOLD 1 MASK TEST SAVEWFM 0 MASK TEST SAVEWFM FILENAME C TekScope Waveforms MASK TEST SRQ COMPLETION 0 MASK TEST SRQ FAILURE 0 MASK TEST STATE 0 MASK TEST STOP FAILURE 0 MASK TEST THRESHOLD 1 MASK TEST WAVEFORM 20 MASK USER AMPLITUDE 100 0000E 3 MASK USER BITRATE 1544000 MASK USER HSCALE 200 0000E 9 MASK USER HTRIGPOS 500 0000E 3 MASK USER LABEL User Mask MASK USER PATTERNBITS 1 MASK USER PRESAMPBITS 0 MASK USER RECORDLENGTH 5000 MASK USER TRIGTOSAMP 0 0000 MASK USER VOFFSET 0 0000 MASK USER VPOS 0 0000 MASK USER VSCALE 1 0000E 3 MASK USER WIDTH 0 0000 Math Default Values The following table lists the Math fact
41. 1 for OFF and ON respectively Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the search state to off ON or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the search state to on SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TOTAL Query Only Group Syntax Returns 2 218 This query only returns the total amount of matches for this search which may be more than the number of marks placed if the mark limit has been exceeded Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TOTAL lt NR1 gt is the total number of matches First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS This command sets or queries the serial search type There are two serial buses B1 and B2 Each can be independently set to one of three serial search types I2C CAN or SPI Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Group Search Syntax SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS I2C SPI CAN SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Arguments I2C specifies the Inter IC bus SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition This command sets or queries the search condition for CAN search Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Group Search Syntax SEARCH
42. 10 Numeric Arguments Symbol Meaning lt NR1 gt Signed integer value lt NR2 gt Floating point value without an exponent lt NR3 gt Floating point value with an exponent lt bin gt Digital data in binary format lt hex gt Digital data in hexadecimal format Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting either by rounding or truncating when an invalid number is input unless otherwise noted in the command description Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string which is simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote or double quote The following is an example of a quoted string This is a quoted string This documentation represents these arguments as follows Table 2 11 Quoted String Argument Symbol Meaning lt QString gt Quoted string of ASCII text First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 7 Command Syntax 2 8 Block A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7 bit ASCII character set Follow these rules when you use quoted strings 1 Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string For example this is a valid string 2 You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the previous rule For example this is an acceptable string 3 You can include a quote character within a string by repeating the quote For e
43. 131 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples None FILESYSTEM might return FILESYSTEM DIR 2 myFile txt mywaveform wfm FILESystem COPy No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples FILESystem CWD 2 132 This command no query form copies a named file to a new file The new file may be in a totally separate directory than the old file You can only copy one file at a time using this command Wild card characters are not allowed File System FILESystem coPy lt source file path gt lt destination file path gt FILESystem CWD FILESystem DELEte lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name FILESYSTEM COPY C MYDIR TEKOO001 SET C ANOTHERDIR COPYOFTEKOO1 SET copies the file named TEK00001 SET located in the MYDIR directory on the C drive to a file named COPYOFTEKO001 SET in the ANOTHERDIR directory on the C drive This command sets or returns the current working directory for FILESystem GPIB commands The default working directory is C TekScope Anytime that you use this command to change the directory the directory that you specify is retained as the current working directory until you either change the directory or you delete the directory If you delete the current working directory the instrument resets current working direct
44. 26 Status and Error Commands Command Groups Command Description ALLEv Returns all events and their messages BUSY Returns instrument status CLS Clears status DESE Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register ESE Sets or returns the bits in the Event Status Enable Register ESR Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register EVENT Returns event code from the event queue EVMsg Returns event code message from the event queue EVQty Return number of events in the event queue OPC Generates the operation complete message in the standard event status register when all pending operations are finished Or returns 1 when all current operations are finished OPT Returns a list of options installed in the instrument PSC Sets or returns the power on status flag PUD Sets or returns a string of protected user data RST Resets the instrument to factory default settings SRE Sets or returns the bits in the Service Request Enable Register STB Returns the contents of the Status Byte Register WAI Prevents the instrument from executing further commands until all pending operations finish Trigger Command Group Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all aspects of triggering for the instrument There are two triggers A and B Where appropriate the command set has parallel constructions for each trigger Fir
45. 50 0000 HORIZONTAL MAIN SAMPLERATE 1 2500E 9 HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 400 0000E 9 HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 5000 HORIZONTAL RESOLUTION 5000 HORIZONTAL ROLL AUTO Limit Test Default Values The following table lists the Limit Test factory default setup values Command Default Values LIMIT BEEP 0 LIMIT COMPARE lt CH1 4 gt NONE LIMIT COMPARE MATH lt 1 4 gt NONE LIMIT COMPARE REF lt 1 4 gt NONE LIMIT EMAIL 0 LIMIT HARDCOPY 0 LIMIT HIGHLIGHTHITS 1 LIMIT LOCK 1 LIMIT LOG 0 LIMIT SAVEWFM 0 LIMIT SRQ 0 LIMIT STATE 0 LIMIT STOPONVIOLATION 0 LIMIT TEMPLATE TOLERANCE HORIZONTAL 40 0000E 3 LIMIT TEMPLATE TOLERANCE VERTICAL 40 0000E 3 Mask Default Values The following table lists the Mask factory default setup values Command Default Values MASK AUTOADJUST 10 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values MASK AUTOADJUST HDELTA 10 MASK AUTOADJUST VDELTA 10 MASK AUTOSET AUTOADJUST 1 MASK AUTOSET HPOS 1 MASK AUTOSET HSCALE 1 MASK AUTOSET MODE MANUAL MASK AUTOSET OFFSETADJ 1 MASK AUTOSET STANDARD NONE MASK AUTOSET TRIGGER 1 MASK AUTOSET VPOS 1 MASK AUTOSET VSCALE 1 MASK COUNT STATE 0 MASK DISPLAY 1 MASK FILTER 0 MASK HIGHLIGHTHITS 1 MASK INVERT 0 MASK LOCK 1 MASK MARGIN PERCENT 5
46. 545 Measurement warning Invalid min max 546 Measurement warning Need 3 edges 547 Measurement warning Clipping positive negative 548 Measurement warning Clipping positive 549 Measurement warning Clipping negative 551 FASTAcq mode is active deactivate to use math The following table shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the instrument Table 3 9 Internal Warning Messages Code Message 600 Internal warning 630 Internal warning 500 overload First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Programming Examples Programming Examples Overview Three example programs which demonstrate methods that you can use to control the instrument through the General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB are included on your DPO4000 Series Product Software CD These example programs are installed as part of the GPIB Programmer installation which includes the DPO4000 Series Oscilloscope Programmer Online Guide To install the GPIB Programmer perform the following procedure 1 Insert the DPO4000 Series Product Software CD in your CD drive 2 Open the folder named GPIB Programmer 3 Double click Setup exe 4 Follow the Install Wizard directions An Examples directory will be created with the following path name C Program Files TekScope Programmer Examples Within the Examples directory are two subdirectories Source and Programs Source contains the source files written
47. Arguments Examples ECL specifies the preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies the preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the setup and hold data level in V TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset ECL high level of 1 4 V as the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 1 2000E 00 indicating that 1 2 V is the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold HOLDTime Group Syntax This command sets or returns the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime command Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC SETHOId HOLDTime TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold SETTime Group Syntax This command sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A SETHold SETTime command Trigger TRIGger A LOGICc SETHOId SETTime TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold Query Only Group 2 280 This query only command returns the threshold voltage for all channels in an A logic trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A LEVel command Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kir
48. B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Sets or queries the CAN addressing mode to standard or extended format SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue sets or queries the binary address string to be used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe Sets or queries the 12C address mode to 7 or 10 Bit SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TY Pe Sets or queries the 12C address type to 12C special addresses SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Sets or queries the binary address string to be used for I2C search First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 29 Command Groups Search Commands cont 2 30 Command Description SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition Sets or queries the search condition for 12C search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection Sets or queries the I2C search condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt l2C DATa SiZe Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for I2C search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa VALue Sets or queries the binary data string to be used for I2C search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CON
49. DATa MOSI OUT VALue 2 227 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce 2 228 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 2 228 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce 2 228 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel 2 229 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt 2 229 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH 2 229 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt 2 230 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion 2 230 Index 8 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt 2 231 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE 2 231 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce 2 231 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH 2 232 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF lt x gt 2 232 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt 2 233 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH 2 233 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF lt x gt 2 233 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 234 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit 2 235 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit 2 235 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt 2 235 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold MATH 2 236 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt 2 236 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthr
50. DELAY POSITION 50 0000 HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME 0 00000000000 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME COUNT 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME LENGTH 5000 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME MULTIPLEFRAMES 1 FRAMESTART CH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME MULTIPLEFRAMES 1 FRAMESTART MATH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME MULTIPLEFRAMES 1 FRAMESTART REF lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME MULTIPLEFRAMES OFF MODE HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME MULTIPLEFRAMES 2 NUMFRAMES CH1 4 gt HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME MULTIPLEFRAMES 2 NUMFRAMES MATH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME MULTIPLEFRAMES 2 NUMFRAMES REF lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME READOUTS 0 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME REF FRAME 1 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME REF SOURCE CH1 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED CH1 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED CH2 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED CH3 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED CH4 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED MATH1 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED MATH2 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED MATH3 2 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 5 Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values C 6 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED MATH4 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED REF1 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED REF2 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED REF3 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SELECTED REF4 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME STATE 0 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME SUMFRAME NONE HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME TRACK LIVE HORIZONTAL MAIN POSITION
51. EDGE 2 297 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 298 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold 2 298 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk 2 297 TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 299 TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 2 300 TRIGger A SETHold DATa 2 299 TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime 2 300 TRIGger A SETHold SETTime 2 301 TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 305 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN 2 307 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom 2 306 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE 2 306 TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat 2 307 TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD 2 308 TRIGger A VIDeo LINE 2 309 TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity 2 310 TRIGger A VIDeo SOUtce 2 311 TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard 2 311 TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD 2 312 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime 2 302 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity 2 302 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFal SOUrce 2 303 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn 2 303 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall 2 301 TRIGger B EDGE COUPling 2 314 TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe 2 315 TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce 2 315 TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt 2 316 TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt 2 318 TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 318 TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 320 TRIGger A 2 254 TRIGger A BUS 2 256 TRIGger A EDGE 2 265 TRIGger A HOLDoff 2 268 TRIGger A LEVel 2 269 TRIGger A LOGIc 2 270 TRIGger A MODe 2 282
52. ESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits ESE might return 186 showing that the ESER contains the binary value 10111010 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 123 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ESR Query Only This query only command returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register SESR ESR also clears the SESR since reading the SESR clears it For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers see Registers Group Status and Error Syntax ESR Related Commands ALLEv CLS DESE ESE EVENT EVMsg SRE STB Examples ESR might return 213 showing that the SESR contains the binary value 11010101 ETHERnet DHCPbootp Sets or returns the network initialization search for a DHCP BOOTP server Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet DHCPbootp ON OFF lt NR1 gt ETHERnet DHCPbootp Arguments ON or lt NR1 gt gt 1 enables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP or BOOTP server in order to automatically assign a dynamic IP address to the oscilloscope NOTE Do not use DHCP BOOTP searching if your oscilloscope has been assigned a static address on a network If you set this command to ON the DHCP BOOTP search will delete or change your static IP address information OFF or lt NR1 gt lt 0 disables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP or BOOTP server Examples ETHERNET DHCPB
53. Events Table 3 4 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 cont Code Message 158 String data not allowed 160 Block data error 161 Invalid block data 168 Block data not allowed 170 Command expression error 171 Invalid expression 178 Expression data not allowed Execution Error The following table lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of a command Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 200 Execution error 201 Invalid while in local 202 Settings lost due to RTL 210 Trigger error 211 Trigger ignored 212 Arm ignored 219 Trigger delay not available 220 Parameter error 221 Settings conflict 222 Data out of range 223 Too much data 224 Illegal parameter value 225 Out of memory 230 Data corrupt or stale 240 Hardware error 241 Hardware missing 244 Invalid parameter selected 250 Mass storage error 251 Missing mass storage 252 Missing media 253 Corrupt media 254 Media full 259 Directory full First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 cont Code Message 256 File name not found 257 File name error 258 Media protected 260 Executio
54. Examples This command sets or returns the minimum width for a runt trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe RUNT WIDth lt NR3 gt TRIGger A PULSe RUNT WIDth TRIGger A PULse RUNT WHEn lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum width in seconds TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WIDTH 15E 6 sets the minimum width of the pulse runt trigger to 15 us TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WIDTH might return TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WIDTH 2 0000E 09 indicating that the minimum width of a pulse runt trigger is 2 ns TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate DELTatime Group Syntax Related Commands 2 286 This command sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transition value for the transition trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate DELTatime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate DELTatime TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate POLarity TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate HIGHLimit This command sets or returns the upper most positive transition trigger threshold This command is provided for com
55. First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 301 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transition value for the transition trigger This is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and setting the Time Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFall DELTatime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 DELTatime lt NR3 gt specifies the delta time in seconds TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 15E 6 sets the delta time of the transition trigger to 15 us TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the delta time of the transition trigger is set to 2 ns TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 302 This command sets or returns the polarity for the transition trigger Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 POLarity POSitive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower most negative to higher most positive level for transition triggering to occur NEGative indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper most positive to lower most negative level for transition triggering to occur EITher indicates
56. Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command no query form returns stored or factory settings to the instrument from a copy of the settings stored in memory If factory is referenced by specifying 0 the factory default values will be restored This command is equivalent to RCL and performs the same function as selecting Recall from the File menu and then choosing the Setup button Save and Recall RECA11 SETUp FACtory lt NR1 gt lt file path gt FACtory RCL RST SAV SAVe SETUp FACtory restores the factory setup lt NR1 gt is a value in the range from 0 to 10 A value of 1 to 10 specifies a saved setup storage location Specifying a value of 0 causes the instrument factory defaults to be restored Using an out of range value causes an error 222 Data out of range lt file path gt specifies a location for an instrument setup file lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form lt drive gt lt dir gt lt filename gt lt drive gt and one or more lt dir gt s are optional If you do not specify them the instrument will read the file from the default directory C TekScope setups lt filename gt stands for a filename of up to 128 characters use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but highly recommended RECALL SETUP FACTORY recalls and makes current the in
57. MORELimit Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the channel threshold level for an edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold MATH SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt Sets or returns the math waveform threshold level for edge search Sets or returns the reference waveform threshold level for edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the channel waveform lower threshold level for a transition search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt Sets or returns the math waveform lower threshold level for a transition search Sets or returns the reference waveform lower threshold level for a transition search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the polarity for a pulse search PULSEWidth POLarity SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the source waveform for a PULSEWidth SOUrce pulse search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the condition for generating PULSEWidth WHEn a pulse width search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the pulse width setting for a PULSEWidth WIDth pulse width search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Sets or returns the
58. NR3 gt WFMInpre YOFf WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMInpre YMUIt WFMOutpre YOFf lt NR3 gt is the vertical offset in digitizing levels WFMINPRE YOFF50 specifies that the zero reference point for the incoming waveform is 50 digitizing levels 2 divisions above the center of the data range WFMINPRE YOFF might return WFMINPRE YOFF 25 indicating the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels This command sets or returns the vertical units of the incoming waveform Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YUNit lt QString gt WFMInpre YUNit WFMOutpre YUNit lt QString gt contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the vertical unit of measure for the incoming waveform WFMINPRE YUNIT might return WFMINPRE YUNIT s indicating the vertical units for the incoming waveform are seconds WFMINPRE YUNIT PA specifies that the vertical units for the incoming waveform are Pascal First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual WFMinpre YZEro Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command sets or returns the offset of the incoming waveform in units specified by WFMInpre YUNit Variations in this number are analogous to changing the vertical offset of the waveform Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YZEro lt NR3 gt WFMInpre YZEro WFMInpre YUNit WFMOutpre YZEro lt NR3 gt is the offset in Y
59. ON indicating that the video picture autocontrast mode is enabled DiSplay PiCture BRightness Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the video picture mode brightness setting Requires DPO40VID application module Display DISplay PICture BRIghtness lt NR1 gt DISplay PICture BRIghtness DISplay PICture AUTOContrast DISplay PICture CONTRAst DISplay PICture STATE lt NR1 gt sets the picture brightness value from 0 to 100 DISplay PICture AUTOContrast must be OFF in order to set the brightness value DISPLAY PICTURE BRIGHTNESS might return DISPLAY PICTURE BRIGHTNESS 34 indicating that the video picture brightness setting is 34 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 117 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DiSplay PICture CONTRAst Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the video picture mode contrast setting Requires DPO40VID application module Display DISplay PICture CONTRASt lt NR1 gt DISplay PICture CONTRASt DISplay PICture AUTOContrast DISplay PICture BRIghtness DISplay PICture STATE lt NR1 gt sets the picture contrast value from 0 to 100 DISplay PICture AUTOContrast must be OFF in order to set the contrast value DISPLAY PICTURE CONTRAST might return DISPLAY PICTURE CONTRAST 45 indicating that the video picture contrast s
60. PT_ Off Arguments are ignored WFMInpre WFld No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre XINcr Group Syntax This command no query form accepts but ignores the argument This command is provided only to allow a waveform extracted from the instrument to be easily imported Waveform Transfer WFMInpre WFid lt QString gt DATa DESTination WFMInpre BN_ Fmt WFMInpre ENCdg WFMOutpre WFId lt Qstring gt must be a valid IEEE 488 2 string but the contents are ignored WFMINPRE WFID CH1 DC COUPLING 2 000V DIV 400 0NS DIV 500 POINTS SAMPLE MODE is a syntactically correct command This command sets or returns the horizontal interval between incoming waveform points in units specified by WFMInpre XUNit Waveform Transfer WFMInpre XINcr lt NR3 gt WFMInpre XINcr First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 329 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMInpre XUNit Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre XZEro Group 2 330 WFMInpre XUNit WFMOutpre XINcr lt NR3 gt is the horizontal interval representation WFMINPRE XINCR 3E 3 sets the interval between Incoming waveform points to 3 ms WFMINPRE XINCR might return WFMINPRE XINCR 1 0000E 3 indicating that if WFMInpre XUNit is set to s there is a 1 ms interval between incoming wavefo
61. Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B BY Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger B SETLevel TRIGger B TRIGger A SETLeve sets the B trigger level to 50 of MIN and MAX TRIGGER B SETLEVEL sets the B trigger level to 50 of MIN and MAX TRIGGER B might return the following B trigger parameters TRIGGER B STATE O TYPE EDGE LEVEL 220 0000E 3 BY TIME EDGE SOURCE CH1 SLOPE RISE COUPLING DC TRIGGER B TIME 16 0000E 9 EVENTS COUNT 2 This command selects or returns whether the B trigger occurs after a specified number of events or a specified period of time after the A trigger This is equivalent to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu selecting the A B Seq tab and then choosing Trig After Time or Trig on nth event NOTE The traditional Runs After functionality is now served by the Horizontal Delay function For details see the HORizontal MAIn DELay MODe and HORizontal MAIn DELay TIMe commands Trigger TRIGger B BY EVENTS TIMe TRIGger B BY TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TRIGger B TIMe HORizontal MAIn DELay MODe HORizontal MAIn DELay TIMe EVENTS sets the B trigger to take place following a set number of trigger events after the A trigger occurs The number of events is specified by TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TIMe sets the B trigger to occur a set time after the A trigger event The
62. Programmer Manual 2 113 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples DiSplay GRAticule Group Syntax Arguments Examples DiSplay INTENSITy Group Syntax Arguments 2 114 DISPLAY FORMAT returns DISPLAY FORMAT YT is for the display format indicating that the display is in the YT mode This command selects or queries the type of graticule that is displayed This command is equivalent to selecting Graticule Style from the Display menu Display DISplay GRAticule CROSSHair FRAme FUL GRId DISplay GRAticule CROSSHair specifies a frame and cross hairs FRAme specifies a frame only FUL specifies a frame a grid and cross hairs GRId specifies a frame and grid only DISPLAY GRATICULE FRAme sets the graticule type to display the frame only DISPLAY GRATICULE might return DISPLAY GRATICULE FULL indicating that all graticule elements are selected Query Only This query only command returns the waveform saturation level autobright state and screen saver settings This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and choosing the Appearance tab Display DISplay INTENSITy None First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples DISPLAY INTENSITY might return DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM IMAGEVIEW 75 0000 RECORDVIEW 10 0000 DISPLAY INTENSITY AUTOBRIGHT 1 SCREENSAVER 1 SCR
63. Returns the video parameters for the A trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom Returns the custom video parameters for the A trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 39 Command Groups 2 40 Table 2 27 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A VIDeo CUS Tom FORMat TYPE Sets or queries the video trigger format TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN Sets or returns the video scan rate TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Sets or queries the analog HDTV video signal format TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD Sets or returns the trigger holdoff in video field units TRIGger A VIDeo LINE Sets or returns the trigger delay as a number of video lines TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity Sets or returns the polarity of the video trigger TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce Sets or returns the polarity of the video trigger TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard Sets or returns the video standard TRIGger A VIDeof SYNC FIELD Sets or returns the video field trigger TRIGger B Sets the B trigger level to 50 or returns the B trigger parameters TRIGger B BY Sets or returns B trigger time or event qualifiers TRIGger B EDGE Returns B trigger edge type parameters TRIGger B EDGE COUPling Sets or returns the type of B trigger coupling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the B edge trigger slope TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the B edge trigger source TR
64. SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold SETTime 2 243 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe 2 245 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 246 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH 2 246 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt 2 247 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime 2 244 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity 2 244 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce 2 244 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn 2 245 SELect BUS lt x gt 2 247 SELect CH lt x gt 2 248 SELect REF lt x gt 2 250 SELect 2 247 SELect CONTROI 2 248 SELect MATH 1 2 249 SET 2 250 SRE 2 251 STArtuptime 2 252 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Error commands ALLEv 2 59 BUSY 2 71 CLS 2 91 DESE 2 107 ESE 2 123 ESR 2 124 EVENT 2 128 EVMsg 2 128 EVQty 2 129 OPC 2 205 OPT 2 206 PSC 2 206 PUD 2 207 RST 2 213 SRE 2 251 STB 2 252 WAL 2 323 STB 2 252 T TEKSecure 2 252 TIME 2 253 TOTaluptime 2 253 TRG 2 253 Trigger commands BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate 2 62 BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe 2 63 BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint 2 64 BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce 2 64 BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY FORMAt 2 64 BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY TYPe 2 65 BUS B lt
65. SOUrce AUXOUT might return AUXOUT SOURCE ATRIGGER EDGE RISING indicating that the source at the BNC connector is set to the A trigger and the polarity is set to the rising edge of the trigger output signal Sets or returns the polarity of the auxiliary output Miscellaneous AUXout EDGE RISing FAL1 ing AUXout EDGE This command sets or returns the trigger source at the BNC connection This command is equivalent to selecting AUX OUT Configuration from the Utilities menu and then selecting the desired Configuration setting Miscellaneous AUXout SOUrce ATRIGger BTRIGger MAIn DELayed AUXout SOUrce AUXout ATRIGger or MAIn sets the source at the BNC connector to the main trigger BTRIGger or DELayed sets the source at the BNC connector to the delayed trigger AUXOUT SOURCE might return AUXOUT SOURCE ATRIGGER indicating that the source at the BNC connector is set to the A trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 61 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BELI No Query Form Group Syntax Examples BUS Query Only Conditions Group Syntax This command was previously used to beep an audio indicator and is provided for backward compatibility Miscellaneous BEL BELL is accepted but does nothing This command returns the parameters for each bus This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Trigger BUS
66. STATE 2 320 TST 2 321 U Unicode 2 203 UNLock 2 321 V VERBose 2 322 Vertical commands CH lt x gt BANdwidth 2 80 CH lt x gt COUPIling 2 81 CH lt x gt DESKew 2 82 CH lt x gt INVert 2 82 CH lt x gt OFFSet 2 84 CH lt x gt POSition 2 84 CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero 2 85 CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss 2 85 CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE 2 86 CH lt x gt PRObe FORCERange 2 86 CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN 2 86 CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber 2 87 CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE 2 88 CH lt x gt PRObe ID 2 87 CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance 2 88 CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal 2 88 CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts 2 88 CH lt x gt PRObe 2 85 CH lt x gt SCAle 2 89 CH lt x gt TERmination 2 90 CH lt x gt YUNits 2 90 CH lt x gt 2 80 REF lt x gt DATE 2 209 REF lt x gt HORizontal POSition 2 209 REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle 2 210 REF lt x gt TIMe 2 210 REF lt x gt VERTical POSition 2 211 REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle 2 212 SELect BUS lt x gt 2 247 SELect CH lt x gt 2 248 SELect REF lt x gt 2 250 SELect 2 247 SELect CONTROI 2 249 SELect MATH 1 2 249 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index WAI 2 323 Waveform Transfer commands CURVe 2 99 DATa 2 101 DATa DESTination 2 101 DATa ENCdg 2 102 DATa SOUrce 2 104 DATa STARt 2 105 DATa STOP 2 106 WAVFrim 2 323 WFMInpre 2 324 WFMInpre BIT_Nr 2 324 WFMInpre BN_ Fmt 2 325 WFMInpre BYT_N
67. TIMe 2 146 HORizontal MAIn POSition 2 146 HORizontal MAIn SCAle 2 147 HORizontal MAIn 2 144 HORizontal ROLL 2 150 ID 2 151 IDN 2 151 J JIS 2 203 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual L LANGuage 2 152 LANGuage INCRement 2 152 LOCk 2 152 LRN 2 153 Mark commands MARK 2 154 MARK SELected FOCUS 2 155 MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn 2 155 MARK SELected 0 WNer 2 156 MARK SELected SOURCE 2 156 MARK SELected STARt 2 156 MARK SELected STATe 2 156 MARK SELected ZOOm POSition 2 157 MARK CREATE 2 154 MARK DELEte 2 154 MARK FREE 2 155 MARK SELected END 2 155 MARK TOTal 2 157 MARK 2 154 MARK SELected FOCUS 2 155 MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn 2 155 MARK SELected 0 WNer 2 156 MARK SELected SOURCE 2 156 MARK SELected STARt 2 156 MARK SELected STATe 2 156 MARK SELected ZOOm POSition 2 157 MARK CREATE 2 154 MARK DELEte 2 154 MARK FREE 2 155 MARK SELected END 2 155 MARK TOTal 2 157 Math commands MATH 1 HORizontal POSition 2 158 MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle 2 159 MATH 1 HORizontal UNITs 2 159 MATH 1 SPECTral MAG 2 160 MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow 2 161 MATH 1 VERTical POSition 2 162 MATH 1 VERTical SCAle 2 163 MATH 1 VERTical UNITs 2 164 MATH 1 DEFIne 2 157 MATH 1 TYPe 2 161 MATHVAR VAR lt x gt 2 165 MATHVAR 2 164 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Prog
68. TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION SOURCE TYPE DATA TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION STANDARD CUSTOM TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING DC TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A HOLDOFF BY DEFAULT TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 1 5000E 6 TRIGGER A LEVEL 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS PATTERN TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION AND TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 HIGH TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH2 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH3 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIB 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMB 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCECH2 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHO2D00 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD DATA THRESHOULL2000 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD HOLDTIME 2 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD SETTIME 3 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC STATE INPUT CH4 RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC STATE WHEN TRUE TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD lt CH1 4 gt 1 2000 TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS GLITCH First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 11 Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values TRIGGER A PULSE GLITCH POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A PULSE GLITCH TRIGIF ACCEPT TRIGGER A PULSE GLITCH WIDTH 2 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT LOGIC INPUT CH lt 1 4GH
69. WFMINPRE BYT_NR 1 sets the number of bytes per incoming waveform data point to 1 which is the default setting WFMINPRE BYT_NR might return WFMINPRE BYT_NR 2 indicating that there are 2 bytes per incoming waveform data point This command sets or returns which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first for incoming waveform data when data points require more than one byte This specification only has meaning when WFMInpre ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre BYT_Nr is greater than 1 Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BYT_Or LSB MSB WFMInpre BYT_Or WFMInpre ENCdg WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMOutpre BYT_Or LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first WFMINPRE BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant incoming byte of incoming waveform data to be transmitted first WFMINPRE BYT_OR might return WFMINPRE BYT_OR LSB indicating that the least significant incoming CURVe data byte will be transmitted first This command sets or returns the type of encoding for incoming waveform data Waveform Transfer First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMiInpre NR_Pt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMInpre ENCdg ASC BIN WFMInpre ENCdg WFMOutpre ENCdg ASC specifies that the in
70. address assigned to the oscilloscope ETHERnet NAME Sets or returns the network name assigned to the oscilloscope ETHERnet PASSWord This command sets or returns the Ethernet access password ETHERnet SUBNETMask Sets or returns the remote interface subnet mask value File System Command Group 2 18 Use the commands in the File System Command Group to help you use the built in hard disk drive and floppy disk drive You can use the commands to do the following List the contents of the default directory Create and delete directories m Create copy read rename or delete a file First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups When using these commands keep the following points in mind E File arguments are always enclosed within double quotes C MYDIR TEKO00001 SET m File names follow the MSDOS format DRIVE PATH filename m Path separators may be either forward slashes or back slashes NOTE Using back slash as a path separator may produce some unexpected results depending on how your GPIB controller application treats escaped characters Many applications recognize the sequence of back slash followed by an alphabetic character as an escaped character and as such interpret that alphabetic character as a control character For example the sequence n may be interpreted as a newline character t may be interpreted as a tab
71. affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe lt NR3 gt is the low reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 0 0 sets the low reference level to 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 0 0000E 00 indicating that the absolute low reference level is set to 0 0 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 2 192 This command sets or returns the mid reference level and is the 50 reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of period frequency delay and all cyclic measurements and First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then entering the Absolute Mid Ref value NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement M
72. and Error EVENT ALLEv CLS DESE ESE ESR EVMsg SRE STB EVENT might return EVENT 110 showing that there was an error in a command header This query only command removes a single event code from the Event Queue that is associated with the results of the last ESR read and returns the event code along with an explanatory message For more information see Event Handling Status and Error EVMsg First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Returns Examples EVQty Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ALLEv CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT SRE STB The event code and message in the following format lt Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt QString gt lt Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt QString gt lt QString gt lt Message gt lt Command gt where lt Command gt is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a command error is detected by the instrument As much of the command will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the lt Message gt and lt Command gt string combined The command string is right justified EVMSG might return EVMSG 110 Command header error This query only command returns the number of event codes that are in the Event Queue This is useful when using the ALLEv query since it lets you know exactly
73. capitals For example you can enter the command ACQuire NUMAvg simply as ACQ NUMA or acq numa Abbreviation rules may change over time as new instrument models are introduced Thus for the most robust code use the full spelling If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part of query responses you can further control whether the returned headers are abbreviated or are full length with the VERBose command You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a semicolon The instrument executes concatenated commands in the order received When concatenating commands and queries you must follow these rules 1 Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning colon on all commands except the first one For example the commands TRIGger MODe NORMal and ACQuire NUMAVg 10 can be concatenated into the following single command TRIGger MODe NORMal ACQuire NUMAVg 10 2 Ifconcatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemonic you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning colon For example you can concatenate the commands ACQuire MODe ENVelope and ACQuire NUMAVg 10 into a single command ACQuire MODe ENVelope NUMAVg 10 The longer version works equally well ACQuire MODe ENVelope ACQuire NUMAVg 10 3 Never precede a star command with a colon ACQuire MODe ENVelope OPC First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer
74. choosing the desired mode from the Acquisition Mode group box Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals Each acquisition interval represents a time duration set by the horizontal scale time per division The instrument sampling system always samples at the maximum rate and so an acquisition interval may include more than one sample The acquisition mode which you set using this ACQuire MODe command determines how the final value of the acquisition interval is generated from the many data samples Acquisition ACQuire MODe SAMple PEAKdetect HIRes AVErage ENVelope ACQui re MODe ACQuire NUMAVg ACQuire NUMEnv CURVe SAMp le specifies that the displayed data point value is the first sampled value that is taken during the acquisition interval In sample mode all waveform data has 8 bits of precision You can request 16 bit data with a CURVe query but the lower order 8 bits of data will be zero SAMp1e is the default mode PEAKdetect specifies the display of high low range of the samples taken from a single waveform acquisition The high low range is displayed as a vertical column that extends from the highest to the lowest value sampled during the acquisition interval PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing or narrow spikes HIRes specifies Hi Res mode where the displayed data point value is the average of all the samples taken during the acquisition interval This is a form of a
75. control the setups for cursor and cursor 2 such as waveform source cursor position and cursor color First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups You can also use the commands to select one of the following cursor functions Off Shuts off the display of all cursors Vertical Bars Displays vertical bar cursors which provide traditional horizontal unit readouts for Cursor 1 bar1 Cursor 2 bar2 the delta between them and 1 delta results in frequency when the horizontal unit is time Horizontal Bars Displays horizontal bar cursors which provide traditional vertical unit readouts for Cursor 1 bar1 Cursor 2 bar2 and the delta between them Waveform Cursors Consists of two cursors you can independently assign to a waveform These cursors provide the same readouts that the vertical and horizontal bar cursors provide Waveform cursors enable you to conveniently measure waveform amplitude and time In XY or XYZ format waveform cursors indicate the amplitude position of an XY pair Chl vs Ch2 voltage where Ch1 is the X axis and Ch is the Y axis relative to the trigger Screen Cursors Consists of two pairs of independent horizontal and vertical cursors You can use these cursors to indicate an arbitrary position within the waveform display area Screen cursors depending on the style selected consist of the intersection of a vertical and horizontal line an X or a v
76. directory path gt First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 135 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples FILESystem CWD lt directory path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name FILESYSTEM RMDIR C OldDirectory removes the directory named OldDirectory from the root of the C drive FPANEL PRESS No Query Form 2 136 Group Syntax Arguments Duplicates the action of pressing a specified front panel button Miscellaneous FPANEL PRESS lt button gt lt button gt is a name of a front panel button Most of the argument names associate directly with their front panel button For example AUTOSet is for the AUTOSET button The few commands that do not have obvious associations are listed below Table 2 34 FPAnel PRESS arguments Argument Description ACQuire Acquire MENU button BMENU lt x gt Screen bottom menu buttons where lt x gt 1 for the left most bottom menu button and lt x gt 7 for the right most bottom menu button BUS lt x gt Bus select buttons where lt x gt 1 or 2 CH lt x gt Channel select button where lt x gt 1 for channel 1 lt x gt 2 for channel 2 and so on CLEARMenu MENU OFF button MAGnify MAGNIFY button MEASUrement MEASURE button OFF Vertical menu wa
77. embedded comment lines Miscellaneous REM lt QString gt NEWpass PUD lt QString gt is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples REM This is a comment is a comment string that the instrument will ignore RST No Query Form This command no query form resets the instrument to the factory default settings The RST command does not alter the following The state of the IEEE Std 488 1 1987 interface The selected IEEE Std 488 1 1987 address of the instrument Calibration data that affect device specifications The Output Queue The Service Request Enable Register setting The Power on status clear flag setting Alias definitions Stored settings The PUD Response Any of the values associated with the DATA command This command is equivalent to pressing the DEFAULT SETUP button on the front panel Group Status and Error Syntax RST Related Commands FACtory RECAII SETUp SAVe SETUp Arguments None Examples RST resets the instrument settings to factory defaults SAV No Query Form This command no query form stores the state of the instrument to a specified memory location You can later use the RCL command to restore the instrument to this saved state First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 213 Commands
78. exist but do not need to be displayed to be used in and to update math waveforms Table 2 22 Math Commands Command Description MATH 1 DEFIne Sets or returns the math lt x gt waveform definition for the specified waveform MATH 1 HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the math horizontal display position math waveforms MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the math horizontal display scale for math waveforms MATH 1 HORizontal UNITs Sets or returns the math waveform horizontal measurement unit value MATH 1 SPECTral MAG Sets or returns the units of the SpectralMag function in the specified math string MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow Sets or returns the window function used to multiply the input data to the spectral analyzer MATH 1 TYPe Sets or returns the math waveform mode type MATH 1 VERTical POSition Sets or returns the math waveform vertical position MATH 1 VERTical SCAle Sets or returns the math waveform vertical scale per div MATH 1 VERTical UNITs Sets or returns the units used for the math waveform command overrides the default unit string MATHVAR Returns all numerical values used within math expressions MATHVAR VAR lt x gt Sets or returns numerical values you can use within math expressions Measurement Command Group Use the commands in the Measurement Command Group to control the automated measurement system Up to eight automated measurements can be displayed on the screen I
79. high polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the SPI MISO source This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 OFF BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce CH lt x gt is the channel to use as the SPI MISO source OFF specifies no source First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 67 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity LOW HIGH BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity LOW specifies an active low polarity HIGH specifies an active high polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the SPI MOSI source This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 OFF BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOST SOUrce CH lt x gt is the channel to use as the SPI MOSI source OFF specifies no source BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity Conditions Group 2 68 This command sets or
80. in Alphabetical Order CURSor HBArs Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the current settings for the horizontal bar cursors Cursor CURSor HBArs CURSOR HBARS might return the horizontal bar setting as CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 320 0000E 03 POSITION2 320 0000E 03 UNITS BASE CURSor HBArs DELTa Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples This query only command returns the vertical difference between the two horizontal bar cursors Cursor CURSor HBArs DELTa CURSor HBArs UNIts A floating point value with an exponent CURSOR HBARS DELTA might return CURSOR HBARS DELTA 5 0800E 00 indicating that the voltage difference between the two cursors is 5 08 V CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt Group This command sets or returns the horizontal bar cursor position relative to ground which is expressed in vertical units usually volts The cursor is specified by x which can be 1 or 2 This command is the equivalent to selecting Cursor Position from the Cursors menu selecting the H Bars Cursor Type and then viewing or editing the desired cursor position Cursor First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 93 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples CURSor HBArs UNIts Group Syntax Arguments Examples CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CU
81. in Microsoft Visual C Version 6 0 which is required to build executable files for each of the following example programs Meas c This example program demonstrates how to perform a periodic amplitude measurement on CH 1 of your instrument m GetWfm c This example program demonstrates how to acquire and output the CH 1 waveform in a 500 point RIBANARY format The program then queries the instrument to get the waveform preamble information formats the binary waveform data as ASCII values and finally writes out a report of the waveform preamble and ASCII data points to a file named WFM_DATA PRN Tl c This example program demonstrates how to use a general talker listener program to allow the user to send commands and queries to the instrument and display the responses A README file in the Source directory has the latest documentation Programs contains compiled executable files for each of the example programs in the Source directory see above The programs run on a PC compatible system equipped with a National Instruments GPIB board and associated drivers First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 4 1 Programming Examples Compiling GPIB Programs Visual C 4 2 The example GPIB programs make the following assumptions The GPIB controller board is GPIBO board 0 If you have more than one GPIB controller in your workstation and you want to user a GPIB contr
82. index of the printer to be deleted lt name gt is the name of the printer to be deleted lt new_name gt is the new name for this printer lt new_server gt is the new print server for this printer lt new_address gt is the new IP address for the server This command is identical to the HEADer query and is included for backward compatibility purposes Miscellaneous HDR OFF ON lt NR1 gt HDR HEADer VERBose OFF sets the Response Header Enable State to false This causes the instrument to omit headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ON sets the Response Header Enable State to true This causes the instrument to include headers on applicable query responses You can then use the query response as a command lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false any other value sets this state to true which causes the instrument to omit headers on query responses Examples HDR OFF specifies that the instrument omits headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned HDR might return HEADER 1 indicating that the instrument is including headers on applicable query responses HEADer This command sets or returns the Response Header Enable State that causes the instrument to either include or omit headers on query responses NOTE This comm
83. is 10 to a high reference value default is 90 RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire waveform or gated region RMSJitter measures the variance in the time locations of the cross point The RMS jitter is defined as one standard deviation at the cross point RMSNo se measures the Root Mean Square noise amplitude on a waveform at the mid reference level SIGMA1 histogram measurement measures the percentage of points in the histogram that are within one standard deviation of the histogram mean SIGMA2 histogram measurement measures the percentage of points in the histogram that are within two standard deviations of the histogram mean SIGMA3 histogram measurement measures the percentage of points in the histogram that are within three standard deviations of the histogram mean SIxXSigmajit histogram measurement is six x RMSJitter SNRatio measures the signal to noise ratio The signal to noise ratio is the amplitude of a noise rejection band centered on the mid level STDdev measures the standard deviation Root Mean Square RMS deviation of all acquired points within or on the histogram box UNDEFINED is the default measurement type which indicates that no measurement type is specified Once a measurement type is chosen it can be cleared using this argument First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical O
84. might return TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS WIDTH indicating that a pulse was found that is of the specified polarity and width TRIGger A PULse RUNT HIGHLimit This command sets or returns the upper limit for the runt trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt command First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 283 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Trigger TRIGger A PULSe RUNT HIGHLimit TRIGger A PULse RUNT LOWLimit Group Syntax This command sets or returns the lower limit for the runt trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe RUNT LOWLimit TRIGger A PULse RUNT POLarity Group Syntax This command sets or returns the polarity for the runt trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A RUNT POLarity command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe RUNT POLarity TRIGger A PULse RUNT SOUrce Group Syntax 2 284 This command sets or returns the source for the A runt trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe RUNT SOUrce First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Pr
85. minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal The query returns current A trigger parameters The trigger level is the voltage threshold through which the trigger source signal must pass to generate a trigger event This command is equivalent to pushing the LEVEL knob on the front panel Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A SETLevel Related Commands 2 254 TRIGger A TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGger A PULse First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments SETLevel sets the A trigger level to 50 of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal Examples TRIGGER A SETLEVEL sets the A trigger level to 50 of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal TRIGGER A might return the following A trigger parameters TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE LEVEL 0 0000 HOLDOFF BY DEFAULT TIME 1 5000E 6 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS PATTERN FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 1 2000 CH2 1 2000 CH3 1 2000 CH4 1 2000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 HIGH CH2 X CH3 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 5 Q0000E 9 MORELIMIT 5 O000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 1 2000 SOURCE CH2 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 1 2000 SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD HOLDTIM
86. no events or status to report These have no associated SESR bit First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 11 Status and Events Command Error Table 3 3 No Event Messages Code Message 0 No events to report queue empty 1 No events to report new events pending ESR The following table shows the command error messages generated by improper syntax Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules in the section on command Syntax Table 3 4 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 Code Message 100 Command error 101 Invalid character 102 Syntax error 103 Invalid separator 104 Data type error 105 GET not allowed 108 Parameter not allowed 109 Missing parameter 110 Command header error 111 Header separator error 112 Program mnemonic too long 113 Undefined header 114 Header suffix out of range 120 Numeric data error 121 Invalid character in number 123 Exponent too large 124 Too many digits 128 Numeric data not allowed 130 Suffix error 131 Invalid suffix 134 Suffix too long 138 Suffix not allowed 140 Character data error 141 Invalid character data 144 Character data too long 148 Character data not allowed 150 String data error 151 Invalid string data First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and
87. of the eye pattern at the mid reference level It is the peak to peak time variation of the first eye crossing measured at the mid reference as a percent of the eye period EXTINCTDB measures the extinction ratio of an optical waveform eye diagram Extinction Ratio dB measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic High to the logic Low of an optical waveform and expresses the result in dB This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode Extinction dB 10 x log 10 High Low EXTINCTPCT measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform Extinction Ratio measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic Low off to the logic High on of an optical waveform and expresses the result in percent This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode Extinction 100 0 x Low High First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 185 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 186 EXTINCTRATIO measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform Extinction Ratio measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic High to the logic Low of an optical waveform and expresses the result without units This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode Extincti
88. of waveform points WFMOutpre ENCdg Sets or returns the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms WFMOutpre NR_Pt Returns the number of points for the waveform transmitted in response to a CURVe query WFMOutpre PT_Fmt Returns the point format for the waveform WFMOutpre PT_Off Returns the trigger point relative to DATA START for the waveform First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 47 Command Groups Table 2 29 Waveform Transfer Commands cont Command Description WFMOutpre PT_ORder Returns whether the source waveform is DPO WFMOutpre WF ld Returns a string describing the acquisition parameters for the waveform WFMOutpre XINcr Returns the horizontal sampling interval WFMOutpre XUNit Returns the horizontal units for the waveform WFMOutpre XZEro Returns the sub sample time between the trigger sample and the occurrence of the actual waveform trigger WFMOutpre YMUIt Returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level for the waveform WFMOutpre Y OFf Returns the vertical offset in digitizing levels for the waveform WFMOutpre YUNit Returns the vertical units for the waveform WFMOutpre YZEro Returns the vertical offset for the waveform Zoom Command Group 2 48 Zoom commands let you expand and position the waveform display horizontally and vertically without changing the time base or vertical se
89. region When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement METHod command the mean measurement measures the average of all acquired points within or on the histogram MEDian histogram measurement measures the middle point of the histogram box Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box are less than this value and half are greater than this value MINImum finds the minimum amplitude This value is typically the most negative peak voltage It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement METHod command the minimum measurement measures the lowest nonzero bin in vertical histograms or the time of the left most nonzero bin in the horizontal histograms First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NCROss timing measurement measures the time from the trigger point to the first falling edge of the waveform or gated region The distance time is measured at the middle reference amplitude point of the signal NDUty negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Negative Duty Cycle Negative Width Period x 100 NOVershoot negative overshoot finds the negative overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region Negative Overshoot Low Mini
90. respect to trigger position or the zero reference point for the designated waveform if horizontal units are not set to time Use the CURSor VBArs UNIts command to specify units The position can appear in units of base or 1 base This command is the equivalent of selecting Cursor Setup from the Cursors menu selecting V Bars Cursor Type and then viewing or editing the desired cursor position Cursor CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt CURSor VBArs UNIts lt NR3 gt specifies the cursor position A floating point value with an exponent CURSOr VBArs POSITION2 9 00E 6 positions the cursor2 vertical bar cursor at 9 ms CURSor VBArs POSITION1 this command might return CURSOR VBARS POSITION1 1 0000E 06 indicating that the cursorl vertical bar is positioned at 1 ms This command sets or returns the units for the vertical bar cursors Cursor First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 97 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Returns Examples CURSor VBArs UNIts SECOnds HERtz DEGrees PERcent CURSor VBArs UNIts SECOnds sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the time domain seconds HERtz sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the frequency domain Hertz DEGrees sets the units to degrees for use with an XY display PERcent sets the units to percent for use with ratio cursors A str
91. returns the SPI SS polarity This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity LOW HIGH BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity LOW specifies an active low polarity HIGH specifies an active high polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments BUS B lt x gt STATE Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the SPI SS source This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SoUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SoOUrce CH lt x gt is the channel to use as the SPI SS source OFF specifies no source This command turns the bus on and off This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Trigger BUS B lt x gt STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON BUS B lt X gt STATE ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns on the bus state OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the bus state First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 69 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt TYPE This command sets or returns the bus type I2C SPI or CAN Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger
92. slew rate Trigger TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 50E 3 sets the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV for channel 2 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 might return TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 1 2000E 01 indicating that the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger is set to 120 mV TRIGger A VIDeo Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the A trigger video parameters This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo TRIGGER A VIDEO might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT INTERLACED SCAN RATE1 TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD ALLFIELDS First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 305 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HOLDOFF FIELD 1 0000 TIME 20 0000E 3 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 1 SCAN RATE1 SOURCE CH1 STANDARD NTSC TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the A trigger custom video parameters This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM might return the parameters TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT INTERLAC
93. standard interface messages that the instrument supports First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual D 1 Appendix D GPIB Interface Specifications First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer D 2 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Glossary ASCII Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange Controllers transmit commands to the instrument using ASCII character encoding Address First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Glossary 1 Glossary First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer Glossary 2 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index A ACQuire MAXSamplerate 2 51 ACQuire 2 51 ACQuire MODe 2 52 ACQuire NUMACq 2 53 ACQuire NUMAV g 2 53 ACQuire NUMEny 2 54 ACQuire STATE 2 54 ACQuire STOPA fter 2 55 Acquisition commands ACQuire MAXSamplerate 2 51 ACQuire 2 51 ACQuire MODe 2 52 ACQuire NUMACq 2 53 ACQuire NUMAVg 2 54 ACQuire NUMEnv 2 54 ACQuire STATE 2 55 ACQuire STOPA fter 2 55 FASTAcq 2 130 FASTAcq STATE 2 131 Alias commands ALlIas 2 56 ALTas STATE 2 59 ALlIas CATalog 2 57 ALIas DEFine 2 57 ALIas DELEte 2 58 ALlIas DELEte NAMe 2 58 ALIas DELEte ALL 2 58 ALIas 2 56 ALIas STATE 2 59 ALIas CATalog 2 56 ALIas DEFine 2 57 ALIas DELEte 2 58 ALlIas DELEte NAMe 2 58 ALIas DELEte ALL 2 58 ALLEv 2 59 AUTOSet 2 60 AUXout 2 60 AUXout EDGE 2 61 AUXout SOUtr
94. state is off then only the A trigger causes the trigger event First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B TIMe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger B STATE ON OFF lt NR1 gt TRIGger B STATE TRIGger A MODe ON argument indicates that the B trigger is active and in causes trigger events conjunction with the A trigger OFF argument indicates that only the A trigger causes trigger events lt NR1 gt A 0 turns off the B trigger any other value activates the B trigger TRIGGER B STATE ON sets the B trigger to active making it capable of causing trigger events TRIGGER B STATE might return TRIGGER B STATE 0 indicating that the B trigger is inactive and that only the A trigger causes trigger events This command sets or returns B trigger delay time The B Trigger time applies only if TRIGger B BY is set to TIMe This command is equivalent to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu choosing the A B Seq tab and setting Trig Delay Trigger TRIGger B TIMe lt NR3 gt TRIGger B TIMe TRIGger B BY TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt lt NR3 gt is the B trigger delay time in seconds TRIGGER B TIME 4E 6 sets the B trigger delay time to 4 us TRIGGER B TIME might return TRIGGER B TIME 16 0000E 9 indicating th
95. string erases any previously displayed text within the message box You can send a tab by transmitting a tab character t or x09 followed by two characters representing the most significant eight bits followed by the least significant eight bits of a 16 bit number The number specifies the pixel column First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order relative to the left margin of the message area For example to tab to pixel 13 send TAB t or x09 NUL decimal 0 and CR decimal 13 For example using hexadecimal escape sequences MESSAGE SHOW x09 x01 x17Hello when sent as a command would cause the Hello to be displayed starting at pixel position 279 relative to the left margin set by the MESSAGE BOX command If you want to display characters starting at position 279 then 279 0x0117 split the hexadecimal number into two characters 0x01 and 0x17 and send x09 x01 x17 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 201 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Special characters which control decoration are two character sequences where the first character is an escape 0x1b and the second character is as follows Bit7 0 Bit 6 Ifset inverse video is toggled from current state and the following text is displayed in the new inverse state until the state is toggled again Remaining bits are ignored
96. tells you what types of events have occurred The Standard Event Status Register SESR The SESR records eight types of events that can occur within the instrument Use the ESR query to read the SESR register Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the register can accumulate information about new events NOTE TekVISA applications use SESR bit 6 to respond to any of several events including some front panel actions 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Figure 3 1 The Standard Event Status Register SESR First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 1 Status and Events 3 2 Table 3 1 SESR Bit Functions Bit Function 7 MSB PON Power On Shows that the oscilloscope was powered on On completion the diagnostic tests also set this bit 6 URQ User Request Indicates that an application event has occurred See note 5 CME Command Error Shows that an error occurred while the oscilloscope was parsing a command or query 4 EXE Execution Error Shows that an error executing a command or query 3 DDE Device Error Shows that a device error occurred 2 QYE Query Error Either an attempt was made to read the Output Queue when no data was present or pending or that data in the Output Queue was lost 1 RQC Request Control This is not used 0 LSB OPC Operation Complete Shows tha
97. the B trigger level is currently set at 173 mV First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 317 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the B trigger level for the specified channel Each Channel can have an independent Level Trigger TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt ECL specifies the ECL high level TTL specifies the TTL high level lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TRIGGER B LEVEL CH2 might return TRIGGER B LEVEL CH2 1 3000E 00 indicating that the B edge trigger is set to 1 3 V for channel 2 TRIGGER B LEVEL CH3 TTL sets the B edge trigger to TTL high level for channel 3 TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments TRIGger B STATE 2 318 This command sets or returns the B trigger lower threshold for the channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Trigger TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts This command sets or returns the state of B trigger activity If the B trigger state is on the B trigger is part of the triggering sequence If the B trigger
98. the clock source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the current clock source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld DATa THReshold lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A SETHOld DATa THReshold ECL specifies the preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies the preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the setup and hold data level in V TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset ECL high level of 1 4 V as the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 1 2000E 00 indicating that 1 2 V is the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Group Syntax Arguments 2 300 This command sets or returns the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld HOLDT ime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A SETHOld HOLDTime lt NR3 gt specifies the hold time setting in seconds Positive values for hold time occur after the clock edge Negative values occur before the clock edge First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examp
99. the data string in bytes to be used for I2C trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue Sets or queries the binary data string used for 12C triggering TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Sets or queries the trigger condition for SPI triggering TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for SPI trigger Sets or queries the binary data string used for the SPI trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa S Ze Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SPI trigger TRIGger A BUS SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE Sets or queries the bus for a serial search Returns the source coupling and source for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE COUPling Sets or returns the type of coupling for the A edge trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 35 Command Groups 2 36 Table 2 27 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the slope for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the A edge trigger TRIGger A HOLDoff Returns the A trigger holdoff parameters TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe Sets or returns the A trigger holdoff time TRIGger A LEVel Sets or returns the level for the A trigger TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt Specifies or
100. the horizontal scale factor is 1 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSition This command sets the horizontal position of a particular zoom box in terms of 0 to 100 0 of upper window Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt ZOOM ZOOM lt x gt POS1 tion Arguments lt NR3 gt is the horizontal position as a percent of the upper window ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle This command sets or returns the horizontal scale of the particular zoom box Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCA1e Arguments lt NR3 gt is the horizontal scale of the zoom box First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 347 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt STATE 2 348 Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the specified zoom on or off where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window Default is Zoom on Zoom2 4 off Zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt STATE ON OFF lt NR1 gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt STATE ON turns Zoom 1 4 on OFF turns Zoom 1 4 off lt NR1 gt 0 disables the specified zoom any other value enables the specified zoom ZOOM ZOOM lt x gt STATE ON turns Zoom on ZOOM ZOOM lt x gt STATE might return ZOOM ZOOM2 STATE 1 indicating that Zoom is on First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events The instrumen
101. the transition time setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Sets or returns the polarity setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Sets or returns the source setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Sets or returns the condition setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A TYPe Sets or returns the trigger type setting for a search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the channel waveform upper threshold level for a transition search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH Sets or returns the math waveform upper threshold level for a transition search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt Sets or returns the reference waveform upper threshold level for a transition search Status and Error Command Group Use the commands in the Status and Error command Group to determine the status of the instrument and control events Several commands and queries used with the instrument are common to all devices on the GPIB bus The IEEE Std 488 2 1987 defines these commands and queries The common commands begin with an asterisk character First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2
102. trigger when the pattern is true for a time period greater than or less than but not equal the time period specified in TRIGger A PULse RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN MORETHAN sets the runt trigger to occur when the instrument detects a runt in a pulse wider than the specified width TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN might return TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WHEN OCCURS indicating that a runt trigger will occur if the instrument detects a runt of any detectable width TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the minimum width for a runt trigger Trigger TRIGger A RUNT WIDth lt NR3 gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum width in seconds TRIGGER A RUNT WIDTH 15E 6 sets the minimum width of the pulse runt trigger to 15 us TRIGGER A RUNT WIDTH might return TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WIDTH 2 0000E 09 indicating that the minimum width of a pulse runt trigger is 2 ns TRIGger A SETHold Query Only 2 296 Group This query only command returns the clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input data voltage threshold and source and both setup and hold times for setup and hold violation triggering Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A SETHOId TRIGGER A SETHOLD might return the settings TRIGGE
103. two digit hour number mm refers to a two digit minute number from 01 to 60 and ss refers to a two digit second number from 01 to 60 TIME 14 00 00 sets the time to exactly 2 00 p m TIME might return TIME 14 05 17 indicating the current time is set to 2 05 p m and 17 seconds TOTaluptime Query Only Group Syntax TRG No Query Form This command returns the total number of hours that the oscilloscope has been turned on since the nonvolatile memory was last programmed usually since the initial manufacturing process Miscellaneous TOTaluptime This command no query form performs the group execute trigger on commands defined by DDT First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 253 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Miscellaneous TRG DDT Examples TRG immediately executes all commands that have been defined by DDT TRIGger No Query Form This command forces a trigger event to occur Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger FORCe Arguments FORCE creates a trigger event If TRIGger STATE is set to READy the acquisition will complete Otherwise this command will be ignored This is equivalent to selecting A Event Main Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then clicking Force Trigger Examples TRIGGER FORCE forces a trigger event to occur TRIGger A This command sets the A trigger level automatically to 50 of the range of the
104. x gt TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion AND specifies to place a mark if all conditions are true NANd specifies to place a mark if any of the conditions are false NOR specifies to place a mark if all conditions are false OR specifies to place a mark if any of the conditions are true First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt This command sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to determine where to place a mark Group Search Syntax SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt HIGH LOW x SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Arguments HIGH specifies the logic high LOW specifies the logic low X specifies a don t care state SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE This command sets or queries whether the clock edge is rise or fall for a logic search to determine where to place a mark Group Search Syntax SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe SEARCH SEARCH lt xX gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCK EDGE Arguments RISe specifies a rising edge FALL specifies a falling edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce This command sets or queries the clock source definition for logic search If a clock source is defined then the logic sea
105. 0 APPLICATION GPKNOB2 ACTIVE 0 APPLICATION WINDOW HEIGHT 236 WIDTH 640 APPLICATION SCOPEAPP STATE RUNNING WINDOW FULLSCREEN APPLICATION EXTAPP STATE NOTRUNNING VARIABLE EVENT REPORT BOTH AUXOUT SOURCE ATRIGGER EDGE FALLING CMDBATCH 1 HEADER 1 LOCK NONE ROSC SOURCE INTERNAL VERBOSE 1 ALTAS STATE 0 DISPLAY CLOCK 1 COLOR PALETTE IMAGEVIEW TEMPERATURE RECORDVIEW NORMAL USER GRATICULE 165 50 15 CH1 180 50 100 CH2 300 50 100 CH3 60 50 100 CH4 240 50 100 REFL 0 90 0 REF2 0 90 100 REF3 60 90 100 REF4 240 90 100 MATH1 160 50 100 MATH2 40 60 100 MATH3 120 60 100 MATH4 195 50 100 HISTOGRAM 320 50 100 CARET 150 50 100 MASK 0 25 75 MASKHIGHLIGHT 140 50 100 DISPLAY COLOR MATHCOLOR DEFAULT First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 153 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARK No Query Form Group Syntax Move to the next or previous mark on the waveform Mark MARK NEXT PREVious MARK CREATE No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Creates a mark on a particular waveform or all waveforms in a column Mark MARK CREATE CH lt x gt REF lt x gt MATH COLUMN CH lt x gt creates the mark on a channel waveform where lt x gt is the channel number REF lt x gt creates the mark on a reference waveform where lt x gt is the reference waveform number MATH creates the mark on the math waveform COLUMN creates marks on all
106. 000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat PNG BMP TIFF SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat Arguments PNG saves the file in the Portable Network Graphics format BMP saves the file in the Windows bitmap format TIFF saves the file in the Tag Image File Format SAVe SETUp No Query Form This command no query form stores the state of the instrument to a specified memory location You can later use the RCL command to restore the instrument to this saved state This is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu and then pressing the Setup button Group Save and Recall Syntax SAve SETUp lt file path gt lt NR1 gt Related Commands RCL RECAII SETUp SAV Arguments lt file path gt is the target location for storing the setup file lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form lt drive gt lt dir gt lt filename gt lt drive gt and one or more lt dir gt s are optional If you do not specify them the instrument will store the file in the default directory C TekScope setups lt filename gt stands for a filename of up to 128 characters Use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but are highly recommended For setups use the extension SET lt NR1 gt specifies a location for saving the current front panel setup The front panel setup value ranges
107. 033 n nYou can display messages on your 033 204 033 oscilloscope nusing any character or 033 color 033 used by the noscilloscope 033 A 033 few 033 examples 033 fol low 033 n n 021 027 214 232 340 341 342 343 344 u042a u042e u042 F u3080 u3084 u8017 n n 033 205 n 033 206 displays the message as shown below Color and A few examples follow are displayed in green yellow cyan red and magenta respectively Tek and Tektronix are also in Tektronix colors Controls the display of the message window Display MESSage STATE ON OFF lt NR1 gt MESSage STATE MESSage BOX MESSage SHOW Arguments OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 removes the message window from the display ON or lt NR1 gt 0 displays the message window and its contents on the display NEWpass No Query Form This command no query form changes the password that enables access to password protected data The PASSWord command must be successfully executed before using this command or an execution error will be generated Group Miscellaneous Syntax NEWpass lt QString gt 2 204 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual OPC Related Commands Arguments Examples Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PUD lt QString gt is the new password which can contain up to 16 characters NEWPASS mypassword creates a new password mypassword for access
108. 0E 03 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the delay measurement parameters for the measurement specified by lt x gt which ranges from 1 through 8 Measurement parameters are presented in the following order Edgel Edge2 and Direction This query command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Measure menu choosing Delay and viewing the Delay Edge and Search Direction settings Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay MEASUREMENT MEAS3 might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY EDGEL RISE EDGE2 RISE DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIREction Group This command sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines the delay to edge when taking a delay measurement Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 command to specify the waveform This command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Measure menu choosing Delay from the drop down list and then clicking the desired Search Direction setting Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 8 Measurement First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 179 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIREction BACKWards FORWards MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIREction MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 BACKwards
109. 181 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the source for all single channel measurements and specifies the source to measure from when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 8 This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired measurement source Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt REF lt x gt HIStogram MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models MATH lt y gt is a math waveform The y variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models REF lt x gt is a reference waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models HIStogram is a histogram MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE1 MATH1 specifies Math 1 as the measurement 2 source MEASUREMENT MEASL SOURCE1 might return MEASUREMENT MEASL SOURCE 1 MATHL indicating that Math is the measurement 2 source MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 2 182 This command sets or returns the source f
110. 2 263 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue 2 263 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition 2 263 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe 2 265 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue 2 264 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOS VALue 2 264 TRIGger A BUS SOUrce 2 265 TRIGger A EDGE COUPling 2 266 TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 2 267 TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce 2 267 TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe 2 268 TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt 2 269 TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss 2 270 TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion 2 271 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt 2 273 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE 2 273 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce 2 274 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut 2 272 Index 11 Index TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH2 2 275 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH4 2 275 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 276 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern W HEn LESSLimit 2 277 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit 2 278 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern 2 274 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk EDGE 2 278 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 279 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk THReshold 2 279 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 279 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold DATa THReshold 2 279 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold HOLDTime 2 280 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold SETTime 2 280 TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt 2 281 TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold 2 280 TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 281 TRIGger A PULse CLAss 2 283 TRIGger A PULse RUN TRI
111. 2 57 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ALIAS DEFINE ST1 returns ALIAS DEFINE ST1 246 RECALL SETUP 5 AUTOSET EXECUTE SELECT CH1 ON ALlas DELEte No Query Form This command removes a specified alias and is identical to ALIas DELEte NAMe An error message is generated if the named alias does not exist Group Alias Syntax ALTas DELEte lt QString gt Related Commands ESR ALIas DELEte ALL Arguments lt QString gt is the name of the alias to be removed Using ALIas DELEte without specifying an alias causes an execution error lt QString gt must be a previously defined value Examples ALIAS DELETE SETUP1 deletes the alias named SETUP ALlas DELEte ALL No Query Form This command deletes all existing aliases Group Alias Syntax ALTas DELEte ALL Related Commands ALlIas DELEte ALIas DELEte NAMe Examples ALIAS DELETE ALL deletes all existing aliases ALlas DELEte NAMe No Query Form Removes a specified alias This command is identical to ALIas DELEte Group Alias First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 58 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples ALlas STATE Group Syntax Arguments Examples ALLEv Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ALIas DELEte NAMe lt QString gt lt QString gt is the name of the alias to remove Using ALIas DELEte NAMe without specifying an alias causes an execut
112. 25 Lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel interlaced 60 fps 1080160 1125 lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel interlaced 50 fps 1080P24 1125 lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel progressive 24 fps 1080P25 1125 lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel progressive 25 fps 1080SF24 1125 Lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel progressive sF 24 fps 720P60 750 lines 720 active 1280 x 720 pixel progressive 60 fps 480P60 525 lines 480 active 640 or 704 x 480 pixel progressive 60 fps TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD 2 308 Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the video trigger holdoff in terms of video fields This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD lt NR3 gt TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD lt NR3 gt argument is a real number from 0 0 to 8 5 in increments of 0 5 The argument sets the number of fields that the instrument waits before rearming the video trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples TRIGger A VIDeo LINE Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A VIDEO HOLDOFF FIELD might return TRIGger A VIDeo HOLdoff FIELD 5 indicating that the instrument is set to wait 5 video fields before rearming the trigger TRIGGER A VIDEO HOLDOFF FIELD 4 5 sets the instrument to wait 4 5 vide
113. 4 3 2 h Jo PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Event Event Event 7 6 5 4 3 h2 h Jo PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Bye ESB MAV ESB MV Figure 3 6 Status and Event Handling Process 3 6 Event Queue Output Queue When an event occurs a signal is sent to the DESER 1 If that type of event is enabled in the DESER that is if the bit for that event type is set to 1 the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one and the event is recorded in the Event Queue 2 If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled 3 then the ESB bit in the SBR is set to one 4 When output is sent to the Output Queue the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one 5 When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER is enabled 6 the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is generated 7 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Synchronization Methods Overview Although most GPIB commands are completed almost immediately after being received by the instrument some commands start a process that requires more time For example once a single sequence acquisition command is executed depending upon the applied signals and trigger settings it may be a few seconds before the a
114. A RUNT POLarity Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the polarity setting for a runt search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity POSi tive indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling edge re crosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high threshold NEGative indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising edge re crosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low threshold First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 239 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EITher finds on a runt of either polarity SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the source setting for a runt search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where lt x gt 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 240 Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the condition setting for a runt search to determine where t
115. AMPLERate Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the current horizontal sample rate Horizontal HORi zontal MAIn SAMPLERate HORizontal RESOlution HORIZONTAL MAIN SAMPLERATE might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SAMPLERATE 2 5000E 09 indicating that the sample rate is currently set to 2 5 GS s HORizontal MAIn SCAle Group Syntax Arguments This command sets the time per division for the time base or returns its horizontal scale on the display and is identical to the HORizontal SCAle command The specified scale value is rounded to a valid scale setting This command is equivalent to selecting Position Scale from the Horiz Acq menu and then choosing a Scale value Horizontal HOR1 zontal MAIn SCAle HOR1 zontal MAIn SCAle lt NR3 gt is the time per division The range is from 200 ps through 40 s First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 147 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2E 6 sets the main scale to 2s per division HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2 0000E 06 indicating that the main scale is currently set to 2 us per division HORizontal MAIn SECdiv This command sets the time per division for the time base or returns its horizontal scale on the display and is identical to the HORizontal MAIn SCAlecommand The specified scale
116. ARD might return TRIGger A VIDeo STANDARD HDTV indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on an HDTV format TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD TRIGger B 2 312 Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Group This command sets or returns the video field or line that the trigger detects This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD ODD EVEN ALLFields ALLLines NUMERic TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD ODD argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced video odd fields EVEN argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced video even fields ALLFields argument sets the instrument to trigger on all fields ALLLines argument sets the instrument to trigger on all video lines NUMERic argument sets the instrument to trigger on the video signal line specified by the TRIGger A VIDeo LINE command TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD EVEN sets the A video trigger so that it will trigger on even fields TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD might return TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD ALLFIELDS indicating that the A video will trigger on all video fields This command sets the B trigger level to 50 of minimum and maximum The query form of this command returns the B trigger parameters This command is similar to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current setups Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series
117. CONTROI lt wfm gt 2 248 This command sets or returns the waveform that is selected as the implied recipient of channel related commands that support legacy style programs The command form also performs the equivalent of a SELect CH lt x gt ON command This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and either viewing or setting the Source waveform First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples SELect MATH 1 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Vertical SELect CONTRO1 CH lt X gt MATH SELect CONTROI CH lt x gt selects the specified channel waveform as the waveform that is affected by the front panel controls The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models MATH selects the math waveform as the waveform that is affected by the front panel controls SELECT CONTROL CH2 resets acquisition displays on channel 2 and causes the selected waveform to be the implied object of waveform commands SELECT CONTROL might return SELECT CONTROL MATH indicating that math is the implied object of waveform commands This command turns on the display of the math waveform and also resets the acquisition The query returns whether the math waveform is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selecte
118. CURSOR WAVEFORM POSITION2 1 6000E 6 CURSOR WAVEFORM SOURCE2 CH1 CURSOR WAVEFORM STYLE LINE_X CURSOR WAVEFORM UNITS BASE CURSOR XY READOUT RECTANGULAR CURSOR XY RECTX1 0 0000 CURSOR XY RECTX2 0 0000 CURSOR XY RECTY 1 0 0000 CURSOR XY RECTY2 0 0000 Diagnostics Default Values The following table lists the Diagnostics factory default setup values Command Default Values DIAG LEVEL SUBSYS Dispaly Default Values The following table lists the Display factory default setup values Command Default Values DISPLAY CLOCK 1 DISPLAY COLOR MATHCOLOR DEFAULT DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE IMAGEVIEW TEMPERATURE DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE RECORDVIEW NORMAL DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER CARET 150 50 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER CH1 180 50 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER CH2 300 50 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER CH3 60 50 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER CH4 240 50 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER GRATICULE 165 50 15 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER HISTOGRAM 320 50 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER MASK 0 25 75 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER MASKHIGHLI t0750 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER MATH1 160 50 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER MATH2 40 60 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER MATH3 120 60 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER MATH4 195 50 100 DISPLAY COLO
119. Dition Sets or queries the search condition for SPI search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue Sets or queries the binary data string to be used for SPI search if SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOS OUT VALue Sets or queries the binary data string to be used for SPI search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa S Ze Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SPI search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Sets or queries the bus for a serial search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the slope for an edge search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the source waveform for an edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LEVel Sets or queries the level for an edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LE Vel CH lt x gt Sets or queries the level for edge search for the selected channel SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH Sets or queries the math waveform level for edge search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt Sets or queries the reference waveform level for edge search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Sets or queries the logic operator for the logic search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Sets or queries the Boolean logic cr
120. Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 273 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 NONE TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies the input channel which ranges from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments NONE specifies a Pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern trigger with respect to the defined input pattern and identifies the maximum and minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger This command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from the Trig menu and then viewing the current setups Trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH4 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 5 QQ00E 9 MORELIMIT 5 0000E 9 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH2 2 274 This command sets or returns the A logic trigger input for channel 2 in two channel instruments only The command specifies the logic value used when the pattern
121. E 2 Q000E 9 SETTIME 3 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC STATE INPUT CH4 RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC STATE WHEN TRUE TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS GLITCH SOURCE CH1 GLITCH WIDTH 2 0000E 9 TRIGIF ACCEPT POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A PULSE WINDOW TYPE INSIDE WHEN OCCURS WIDTH 2 0000E 9 LOGIC INPUT CH1 HIGH CH2 HIGH CH3 HIGH CH4 HIGH TRIGGER A PULSE WINDOW LOGIC THRESHOLD CH1 1 2000 CH2 1 2000 CH3 1 2000 CH4 1 2000 TRIGGER A PULSE WINDOW THRESHOLD HIGH 1 2000 LOW 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT LOGIC INPUT CH1 HIGH CH2 HIGH CH3 HIGH CH4 HIGH TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT LOGIC THRESHOLD CH1 1 2000 CH2 1 2000 CH3 1 2000 CH4 1 2000 TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE THRESHOLD HIGH 1 2000 LOW 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WHEN OCCURS WIDTH 2 Q000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION DELTATIME 2 0000E 9 POLARITY POSITIVE THRESHOLD HIGH 1 2000 LOW 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION WHEN FASTERTHAN TRIGGER A PULSE WIDTH LOWLIMIT 2 Q000E 9 HIGHLIMIT 2 Q0000E 9 WHEN WITHIN POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A PULSE TIMEOUT POLARITY STAYSHIGH TIME 2 Q0000E 9 TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT INTERLACED SCAN RATEL TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD ALLFIELDS HOLDOFF FIELD 0 0000 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 1 POLARITY NORMAL SCAN RATE1 SOURCE CH1 STANDARD NTSC TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION STANDARD CUSTOM CODE NRZ BITRATE 1544000 AMI PULSEFORM PLUSONE THRESHOLD HIGH 0 0000 LOw 0 0000 TRIGGER
122. EAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 Related Commands MEASUrement REFLevel METHod Arguments lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V Examples MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID1 71 sets the mid reference level to 71 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID 0 7100E 00 indicating that the absolute mid1 reference level is set to 71 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 This command sets or returns the mid reference level for the to waveform when taking a delay measurement and is the 50 reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of delay measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then entering the Absolute Mid2 Ref value NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Group Measurement First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 193 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABS
123. EAS lt x gt UNIts 2 189 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue 2 189 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt 2 178 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH 2 191 Index 5 Index MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW 2 192 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 2 193 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 2 193 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod 2 194 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH 2 195 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW 2 196 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 2 196 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 2 197 MEASUrement REFLevel 2 191 MEASUrement SNA PShot 2 198 MEASUrement STATIstics MODE 2 198 MEASUrement STATIstics WElIghting 2 199 MEASUrement 2 165 MEASUrement GATing 2 166 MEASUrement IMMed 2 167 MEASUrement METHod 2 190 MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot 2 166 MEASUrement MMed DELay DIREction 2 167 MEASUrement MMed DELay EDGE lt x gt 2 168 MEASUrement IMMed DELay 2 167 MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE 2 169 MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 2 169 MEASUrement IMMed TYPe 2 170 MEASUrement IMMed UNIts 2 175 MEASUrement IMMed VALue 2 175 MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt 2 176 MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ 2 176 MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT 2 177 MEASUrement INDICators STATE 2 177 MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt 2 178 MEASUrement INDICators 2 176 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt 2 179 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIREction 2 179 Index 6 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt
124. ECT REF3 might return SELECT REF3 1 indicating that reference waveform 3 is being displayed This query only command returns the commands that list the instrument settings except for configuration information for the calibration values You can use these commands to return the instrument to the state it was in when you made the SET query The SET query always returns command headers regardless of the setting of the HEADer command This is because the returned commands are intended to be sent back to the instrument as a command string The VERBose command can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated or full length This command is identical to the LRN command Miscellaneous SET HEADer LRN VERBose First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples SRE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SET might return the following response ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP STATE 1 MODE SAMPLE NUMENV 10 NUMAVG 16 REPET 1 FASTACQ STATE 0 APPLICATION GPKNOB1 ACTIVE 0 APPLICATION GPKNOB2 ACTIVE 0 APPLICATION WINDOW HEIGHT 236 WIDTH 640 APPLICATION SCOPEAPP STATE RUNNING WINDOW FULLSCREEN APPLICATION EXTAPP STATE NOTRUNNING AUXOUT SOURCE ATRIGGER EDGE FALLING CMDBATCH 1 HEADER 1 LOCK NONE ROSC SOURCE INTERNAL VERBOSE 1 ALIAS STATE 0 DISPLAY CLOCK 1 C
125. ED SCAN RATEL TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 306 This command sets or returns the video trigger format Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE INTERLAced PROGressive TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE INTERLACed argument sets the format for interlaced video lines PROGressive argument sets the format for progressive video lines TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE sets the custom format for the A video trigger to progressive lines TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT INTERLACED indicating that interlaced is selected as the custom format for the A video trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the horizontal line scan rate of the A video trigger Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the Trig menu setting Custom for Format and selecting the Scan Rate from the drop down menu This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN RATE15K RATE20K
126. EE EEES 3 5 Synchronization Methods rria aE EE ROEE EOE EE EEEE 3 7 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual i Table of Contents Programming Examples passon enese e nE barsaioudpsaudden eh ee uundulS Semandsep eye ARAARA 4 1 Appendix A Character Set ccc cece cece nnn EEE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EEE EEE EE Ea A 1 Appendix B Reserved Words 0 e cece cee nL E EEE EEE EEE EE EEE Ea B 1 Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values cc ccc cece cence ene e ene ene e ede ene ne de teen netted C 1 Appendix D GPIB Interface Specifications 0 c cece cece ence cence ence ene ene e deen tenet eed D 1 Glossary Index First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Preface This programmer manual covers my scope First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual iii Preface First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer iv DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Getting Started This programmer guide provides you with the information required to use GPIB commands for remotely controlling your instrument With this information you can write computer programs that will perform functions such as setting the front panel controls taking measurements performing statistical calculations and exporting data for use in other programs such as spreadsheets Besides the traditional GPIB electronic interface r
127. EENSAVERDELAY 28800 DiSplay INTENSITy BACKLight Sets or returns the backlight intensity for the display This is equivalent to setting Backlight Intensity in the DISPLAY menu Group Display Syntax DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight LOW MEDium HIGH DISplay INTENSITy BACKLi ght Examples DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT might return DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT HIGH DiSplay INTENSITy GRAticule Sets or returns the graticule intensity for the display Group Display Syntax DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule lt NR1 gt DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule Arguments lt NR1 gt is the graticule intensity and ranges from 1 to 100 percent Examples DISPLAY INTENSITY GRATICULE might return DISPLAY INTENSITY GRATICULE 30 DiSplay INTENSITy WAVEform Sets or returns the intensity of the waveforms This command is equivalent to adjusting the WAVEFORM INTENSITY knob Group Display First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 115 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples DiSplay PERSistence Group Syntax Arguments Examples DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform lt NR1 gt DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform lt NR1 gt is the waveform intensity and ranges from 1 to 100 percent DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM might return DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM 60 as the intensity of the waveforms This command sets or returns the persistence aspect of the display This affects the dis
128. EF1L HORIZONTAL POSITION might return REF1 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 indicating that the Reference 1 waveform is centered on the horizontal graticule REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle This command sets or returns the horizontal scale for a reference waveform Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle REF lt x gt TIMe Query Only This query only command returns the time that a reference waveform was stored Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt TIMe REF lt x gt VERTical POSition This command sets or returns the vertical position of a reference waveform The reference waveform is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instruments This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu choosing Reference Setup from the drop down list selecting a reference waveform and then entering the Position value using the multipurpose knob First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 210 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down Position adjusts only the display position of a waveform The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which signal values are displayed For example if the po
129. EL PERCENT HIGH 95 sets the high reference level to 95 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 90 of HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW This command sets or returns the percent where 100 is equal to HIGH that is used to calculate the low reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 195 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then entering the Percentage Low Ref value NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe lt NR3 gt is the low reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default low reference level is 10 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW 15 sets the high reference level to 15 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFL
130. ELAY EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000 LOW 0 0000 MID1 0 0000 MID2 0 0000 MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 0000 LOW 10 0000 MID1 50 0000 MID2 50 0000 MEASUREMENT IMMED METHOD HISTOGRAM NOISE HIGH MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE 0 TYPE UNDEFINED UNITS V SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH1 SOURCE1 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE2 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVEL METHOD First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 165 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PERCENT ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000 LOW 0 0000 MID1 0 0000 MID2 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 0000 LOW 10 0000 MID1 50 0000 MID2 50 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 METHOD HISTOGRAM NOISE HIGH MEASUREMENT MEAS2 STATE O TYPE UNDEFINED UNITS V SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH1 SOURCE1 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE DIRECTION MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot No Query Form MEASUrement GATing 2 166 Group Syntax Examples Group Syntax Arguments Examples Removes the measurement snapshot display Measurement MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot This command specifies or returns the measurement gating setting This command is equivalent to selecting Gating from the
131. ENT IMMED METHOD HISTOGRAM MEASUREMENT IMMED NOISE HIGH MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL ABSOLUTRHI A MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL ABSOLUTMLONO MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL ABSOLUTEMMO MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL ABSOLUTEMMM MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL PERCENT H000 MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL PERCENT 10 0000 MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL PERCENT S02D000 MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL PERCENT 000000 MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE1 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 CH1 MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE UNDEFINED MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt DELAY DIRECTIORORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt DELAY EDGE1 RISE First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 9 Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt METHOD HISTOGRAM MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt NOISE HIGH MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt REFLEVEL ABSOl0LOQDIGIGH MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt REFLEVEL ABSO0DOW MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt REFLEVEL ABSOILOMDMID1 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt REFLEVEL ABSOILOMDIMID2 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt REFLEVEL METH BRCENT MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt REFLEVEL PERCBNDBNGH9 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt REFLEVEL PERCBNDOOW1 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt REFLEVEL PERCBNDO0D15 MEAS
132. ER A PULSE RUNT LOGIC THRESHOLD CH11 2000 CH2 1 2000 CH3 1 2000 CH4 1 2000 TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE THRESHOLD HIGH 1 2000 LOW 800 OOO00E 3 TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WHEN OCCURS WIDTH 2 0000E 9 TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 2 294 Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the polarity for the runt trigger This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing the Polarity setting Trigger TRIGger A RUNT POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive TRIGger A RUNT POLarity POSi tive indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling edge re crosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high threshold NEGative indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising edge re crosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low threshold First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EITher triggers on a runt of either polarity TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY NEGATIVE specifies that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is negative TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY might return TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE indicating that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is positive TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the source for the A runt trigger Trig
133. ER A VIDEO SOURCE CH1 sets the source for A video trigger to Channel 1 TRIGGER A VIDEO SOURCE might return TRIGger A VIDeo SOURCE CH2 indicating that the source for the A video trigger is set to Channel 2 TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the video standard This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard CUSTom NTSc PAL SECAM HDtv EIA343 TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard CUSTom argument sets the instrument to use custom video horizontal scan rate parameters that you set with the TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN command NTSc argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC 525 60 2 1 standard a line rate of 525 lines per frame and a field rate of 60 Hz PAL argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC 625 50 2 1 standard a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a field rate of 50 Hz SECAM argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals that meet the SECAM standard HDtv argument sets the instrument to trigger on an HDTV format EIA343 argument sets the instrument to trigger on EIA343 format First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 311 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A VIDEO STANDARD NTSC sets the instrument to trigger on NTSC standard video signals TRIGGER A VIDEO STAND
134. ESUIt FLAg 2 110 DIAg RESUIt LOG 2 110 DIAg SELect ALL 2 111 DIAg STATE 2 111 Display commands DISplay INTENSITy BACK Light 2 115 DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule 2 115 DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform 2 115 DISplay PICture AUTOContrast 2 117 DISplay PICture BRI ghtness 2 117 DISplay PICture CONTRAst 2 118 DISplay PICture STATE 2 118 DISplay STYle DOTsonly 2 119 DISplay VECtorscope STATE 2 119 DISplay VECtorscope STsetting 2 120 DISplay VECtorscope TY Pe 2 120 DISplay VECtorscope TY setting 2 120 DISplay 2 112 DISplay CLOCKk 2 113 DISplay FORMat 2 113 DISplay GRAticule 2 114 DISplay INTENSITy 2 114 DISplay PERSistence 2 116 DISplay XY MODe 2 121 DISplay XY Y CHannel 2 122 DISplay XY YREF 2 122 MESSage BOX 2 199 MESSage CLEAR 2 200 MESSage SHOW 2 200 MESSage STATE 2 204 DISplay INTENSITy BACK Light 2 115 DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule 2 115 DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform 2 115 DISplay PICture AUTOContrast 2 116 DISplay PICture BRIghtness 2 117 DISplay PICture CONTRAst 2 118 DISplay PICture STATE 2 118 DISplay STY le DOTsonly 2 119 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index DISplay VECtorscope STATE 2 119 DISplay VECtorscope STsetting 2 119 DISplay VECtorscope TY Pe 2 120 DISplay VECtorscope TY setting 2 120 DISplay 2 112 DISplay CLOCKk 2 113 DISplay FORMat 2 113 DISplay GRAticule 2 114 DISplay INTENSITy 2 114 DISplay PERSi
135. EVEL PERCENT LOW might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW 10 indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 10 of HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 2 196 Group This command sets or returns the percent where 100 is equal to HIGH that is used to calculate the mid reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of period frequency delay and all cyclic measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then entering the Percentage Mid Ref value NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Measurement First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default mid reference level is 50 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID1 60 sets the mid reference level to 60 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID 65 indicating that the percentage mid refe
136. FFT math is performed Otherwise if the contents of the string can be parsed by the advanced math parser without errors advanced math is performed The Dual Wfm Math FFT and Advanced Math menus on the front panel contain controls that allow building equivalent math expressions to those described above Group Math Syntax MATH 1 DEFIne lt QString gt MATH 1 DEFIne Related Commands MATHVAR VAR lt x gt Arguments lt QString gt quoted string argument is the mathematical expression that defines the waveform First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 157 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2 35 Advanced Math expression elements Expression Description CH1 CH4 REF1 REF4 Specifies a waveform data source FFT INTG DIFF Executes a Fast Fourier Transform integration or differentiation operation on the expression that follows The FFT operator must be the first left most operator in an expression All these operations must end with a right parenthesis AMPlitude AREa BURst CARea CMEan CRMs DELay FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MEAN MINImum NDUty NOVershoot NWldth PDUTy PERIod PHAse PK2pk POVershoot PWldth RISe Executes the selected measurement operation on the waveform active or reference that follows All these operations must end with a right parenthesis Adds the use
137. FORM TEKOO000 WFM REF1 recalls the waveform stored in the file named TEK00000 WFM from the default directory for waveforms C TekScope Waveforms to the reference location 1 REF lt x gt DATE Query Only Group Syntax This query only command returns the date that a reference waveform was stored Vertical REF lt x gt DATE REF lt x gt HORizontal POSition Group This command sets or returns the horizontal display position of the reference waveform The reference waveform is specified by x The value of x can range from through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu choosing Reference Setup 4 from the drop down list selecting a reference waveform and then entering the horizontal position value using the multipurpose knob Vertical First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 209 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax REF lt x gt HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt REF lt x gt HORizontal POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt argument specifies the horizontal position of the specified reference waveform in percentage of the waveform that is displayed to the right of the center vertical graticule The range of this argument is from 0 through 100 Examples REF2 HORIZONTAL POSITION 0 0 positions the start of the Reference 2 waveform at the center graticule R
138. GH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt This command sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to determine where to place a mark Group Search Syntax SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIcC PATtern INPut CH lt x gt HIGH LOW x SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut CH lt x gt Arguments HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH This command sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to determine where to place a mark Group Search Syntax SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut MATH Arguments HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF lt x gt This command sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to determine where to place a mark Group Search First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Progr
139. Gger A PULse RUN TRIGger A PULse RUN TRIGger A PULse RUN TRIGger A PULse RUN HIGH 2 285 TRIGger A PULse RUN LOW 2 285 TRIGger A PULse RUN TRIGger A PULse RUN TRIGger A PULse RUN T HIGH Limit 2 284 T LOWLimit 2 284 T POLarity 2 284 T SOUrce 2 284 T THReshold T THReshold T THReshold 2 285 T WHEnD 2 285 T WIDth 2 286 TRIGger A PULse WIDth HIGHLimit 2 289 TRIGger A PULse WIDth LEVel 2 289 TRIGger A PULse WIDth LOWLimit 2 290 TRIGger A PULse WIDth POLarity 2 290 TRIGger A PULse WIDth SOUrce 2 290 TRIGger A PULse WIDth WHEn 2 291 TRIGger A PULse WIDth WIDth 2 291 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate DELTatime 2 286 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate HIGHLimit 2 287 Index 12 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate LOWLimit 2 287 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate POLarity 2 287 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate SOUrce 2 287 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold HIGH 2 288 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold LOW 2 288 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold 2 288 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate WHEn 2 289 TRIGger A PULSE Width POLarity 2 291 TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce 2 292 TRIGger A PULSE Width WHEn 2 293 TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth 2 293 TRIGger A PULSEWIDth 2 291 TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 2 294 TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce 2 295 TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 296 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk
140. H SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe RISe specifies a rising edge FALL specifies a falling edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax 2 228 This command sets or returns the source waveform for an edge search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where lt x gt 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the level for an edge search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel lt NR3 gt ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts ECL specifies a 1 3 V trigger level TTL specifies a 1 4 V trigger level SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the level for edge search for the selected channel to determine where to place a mark Each channel can have an independent level Search SEARCH SEARC
141. H lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts ECL specifies a 1 3 V trigger level TTL specifies a 1 4 V trigger level SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH Group This command sets or queries the math waveform level for edge search to determine where to place a mark Search First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 229 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments SEARCH SEARCH lt xX gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH ECL specifies a 1 3 V trigger level TTL specifies a 1 4 V trigger level SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the reference waveform level for edge search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt ECL specifies a 1 3 V trigger level TTL specifies a 1 4 V trigger level SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Group Syntax Arguments 2 230 This command sets or queries the logic operator for the logic search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion AND NANd NOR OR SEARCH SEARCH lt
142. IGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN 2 307 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom 2 306 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMalt TYPE 2 306 TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat 2 307 TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD 2 308 TRIGger A VIDeo LINE 2 309 TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity 2 310 TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce 2 310 TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard 2 311 TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD 2 312 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime 2 302 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity 2 302 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce 2 303 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn 2 303 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall 2 301 TRIGger B EDGE COUPling 2 314 TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe 2 315 TRIGger B EDGE SOUtce 2 315 TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt 2 316 TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt 2 318 TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 318 TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 320 TRIGger A 2 254 TRIGger A BUS 2 256 TRIGger A EDGE 2 265 TRIGger A HOLDoff 2 268 TRIGger A LEVel 2 269 TRIGger A LOGIc 2 270 TRIGger A MODe 2 282 TRIGger A PULse 2 282 TRIGger A RUNT 2 294 TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 295 TRIGger A SETHold 2 296 TRIGger A TY Pe 2 304 TRIGger A VIDeo 2 305 TRIGger B 2 312 TRIGger B BY 2 313 TRIGger B EDGE 2 314 TRIGger B EVENTS 2 316 TRIGger B LEVel 2 317 TRIGger B STATE 2 318 TRIGger B TIMe 2 319 TRIGger B TYPe 2 320 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual TRIGger
143. IGger B EVENTS Returns the current B trigger events parameter TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt Sets or returns the number of events that must occur before the B trigger occurs TRIGger B LEVel Sets or returns the level for the B trigger TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt Sets or returns the level for the B trigger for a specific channel TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the B trigger lower threshold for the channel selected TRIGger B STATE Returns the current state of the B trigger TRIGger B TIMe Sets or returns the B trigger delay time TRIGger B TYPe Sets or returns the type of B trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 27 Trigger Commands cont Command Command Groups Description TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the B trigger upper threshold for the channel selected TRIGger STATE Returns the current state of the triggering system Vertical Command Group Use the commands in the Vertical Command Group to control the vertical setup of all live channel waveforms for acquisition and to control the display of channel reference and math waveforms You may replace VOLts with SCAle in the vertical commands This provides program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix instruments Table 2 28 Vertical Commands Command Description CH lt x gt Returns vertical parameters for the spe
144. INPRE XZEro 7 5000E 6 indicating that the trigger occurs 7 5 us before the sample designated by WFMInpre PT Off This command sets or returns the vertical scale factor in units digitizing level for the reference waveform specified by DATa DESTination upon a CURVe command Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YMUIt lt NR3 gt WFMInpre YMU1t DATa DESTination WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMInpre YUNit lt NR3 gt is the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the incoming waveform points WFMINPRE YMULT might return WFMINPRE YMULT 40 0000E 3 indicating that the vertical scale is 40 mV digitizing level 1 V div WFMINPRE YMULT 20E 3 specifies that if WFMInpre YUNit is V and WFMInpre BYT_Nr is 1 the vertical scale is 20 mV digitizing level 500 mV div This command sets or returns the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels Variations in this number are analogous to changing the vertical position of the waveform For those formats in which WFMInpre BYT_Nr is First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 331 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YUNit Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 332 important all non floating point formats this command must take the location of the binary point implied by BYT_NR into consideration Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YOFf lt
145. INer 2 340 WFMOutpre XUNit 2 341 WFMOutpre XZEro 2 341 Index 16 WFMOoutpre Y MUIt 2 342 WFMOutpre Y OFf 2 342 WFMOutpre Y UNit 2 343 WFMOtutpre Y ZEro 2 343 Z Zoom commands ZOOm GRAticule SIZE 2 344 ZOOm GRAticule SPLit 2 344 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor 2 346 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal POSition 2 346 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle 2 347 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSition 2 347 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt SCAle 2 347 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt STATE 2 348 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt 2 345 ZOOm 2 343 ZOOm MODe STATE 2 345 ZOOm GRAticule SIZE 2 344 ZOOm GRAticule SPLit 2 344 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor 2 346 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal POSition 2 346 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle 2 346 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt POSition 2 347 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle 2 347 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt STATE 2 348 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt 2 345 ZOOm 2 343 ZOOm MODe STATE 2 345 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
146. IRECTION FORWARDS starts searching from the beginning of the waveform record and looks for the first rising or falling edge MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating that searching begins at the end of the waveform record and looks for the last rising or falling edge MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 168 Sets or returns the slope of the edge that is used for the delay from or to waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement The waveform is specified by MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE lt x gt Measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt FALL RISe MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt lt x gt specifies which waveform to use where lt x gt 1 is the from waveform and lt x gt 2 is the to waveform FALL specifies the falling edge RISe specifies the rising edge MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 RISE specifies that the from waveform rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 returns either RISE or FALL First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE 1 This command sets or returns the source for all single channel immediate measurements and specifies the source to measure from when taking an immediate delay measurement or ph
147. LABEL8 NAME DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL8 XPOS 100 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL8 YPOS 110 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT STATE 0 DISPLAY STYLE VECTORS DISPLAY TRIGBAR SHORT DISPLAY TRIGT 1 DISPLAY VARPERSIST 500 0000E 3 Email Default Values The following table lists the Email setup values Command Default Values EMAIL ATTEMPTS 1 EMAIL AUTHLOGIN EMAIL FROM TDS5054B_ lt Instrument Serial Number gt EMAIL HOSTWANTED g EMAIL IMAGE 0 EMAIL LIMIT 0 EMAIL MASK 0 EMAIL MAXSIZE 1 EMAIL MEASUREMENT 0 EMAIL NUMEMAILS 1 EMAIL SMTPPORT 25 EMAIL SMTPSERVER A EMAIL TIMEOUT 30 EMAIL TO E EMAIL TRIGGER 0 EMAIL WAVEFORM 0 Hard Copy Default Values The following table lists the Hard Copy factory default setup values Command Default Values HARDCopy FILEName pe HARDCopy PORT FILE Histogram Default Values The following table lists the Histogram factory default setup values First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values Command Default Values HISTOGRAM BOXPCNT 30 0000 25 1000 70 0000 75 2000 HISTOGRAM DISPLAY LINEAR HISTOGRAM FUNCTION HORIZONTAL HISTOGRAM SIZE 2 0000 HISTOGRAM SOURCE CH1 HISTOGRAM STATE 0 Horizontal Default Values The following table lists the Horizontal factory default setup values Command Default Values HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE 0 HORIZONTAL
148. LAI 73 LA27 1011 VT ESC B 11 1B 27 2B 43 3B 59 14 34 54 LA12 74 LA28 1100 FF FS s lt c 12 1C 28 2c 44 3C 60 15 35 55 LA13 75 LA29 1101 CR GS D 13 1D 29 2D 45 3D 61 16 36 56 LA14 76 LA30 111i 0 so RS gt E 14 1E 30 2 46 3E 62 17 37 57 LA15 77 UNL 1111 SI US F 15 1F 31 2 47 3F 63 ADDRESSED UNIVERSAL LISTEN COMMANDS COMMANDS ADDRESSES KEY octal 5 ee GPIB code with ATN asserted ENQ lt ASCII character hex 5 5 decimal First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual UPPER CASE LOWER CASE 100 Tao 120 TA16 140 SA0 160 SA16 P p 40 64 50 80 60 96 70 112 101 TAI 121 TAI7 141 SA1 161 SA17 A Q a q 41 65 51 81 61 97 71 113 102 TA2 122 TA18 142 SA2 162 SA18 B R b r 42 66 52 82 62 98 72 114 103 TA3 123 Taig 143 SA3 163 SA19 c c s 43 67 53 83 63 99 73 115 104 TA4 124 TA20 144 SA4 164 SA20 D d t 44 68 54 84 64 100 74 116 105 TAS 125 TA21 145 SA5 165 SA21 E U e u 45 69 55 85 65 101 75 117 106 TAG 126 TA22 146 SA6 166 SA22 F v f v 46 70 56 86 66 102 76 118 107 TA7 127 TA23 147 SA7 167 SA23 G g w 47 7 57 87 67 103 77 119 110 Tas 130 TA24 150 SA8 170 SA24 H X x 48 72 58 88 78 120 111 TA9 131 TA25 171 SA25 l Y y 49 73 59 89 79 124 112 TAO 132 TA26 172 SA26 J Z z 4A 74 5A 90 7A 122 113 Tat 133 TA27 173
149. LAY VECTORSCOPE STATE might return DISPLAY VECTORSCOPE STATE O indicating that the vectorscope display mode is disabled off DiSplay VECtorscope STsetting Conditions This command requires a DPO4VID application module First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 119 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Display DISplay VECtorscope STsetting DISplay VECtorscope STsetting DiSplay VECtorscope TYPe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the video vectorscope display type setting This command requires a DPO4VID application module Display DISplay VECtorscope TYPe ONEHundred SEVENTYF ive lt NR1 gt DISplay VECtorscope TYPe ONEHundred or lt NR1 gt gt sets the vectorscope display mode to 100 colorbars SEVENTYF ive or lt NR1 gt lt 0 sets the vectorscope display mode to 75 colorbars DISPLAY VECTORSCOPE TYPE might return DISPLAY VECTORSCOPE TYPE 1 indicating that the vectorscope display mode is set to 100 DiSplay VECtorscope TYsetting Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 120 Sets or returns the video vectorscope display type setting state Note that this does not actually turn on the vectorscope display type but just sets the type value This command requires a DPO4VID application module Display DISplay VECtorscope TYsetting ONEHundred SEVENTYFive lt NR1 gt DISplay VECtors
150. LS the UNLock command has no effect For more information see the ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation section 2 8 3 on RL State Descriptions Miscellaneous UNLock ALL LOCk ALL specifies that all front panel buttons and knobs are unlocked UNLOCK ALL unlocks all front panel buttons and knobs This command sets or returns the Verbose state that controls the length of keywords on query responses Keywords can be both headers and arguments NOTE This command does not affect IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk However this command does make a corresponding change in the Response Header Enable State of the opposite interface physical or virtual GPIB interface Refer to Introduction for more information Miscellaneous VERBose OFF ON lt NR1 gt HEADer LRN SET OFF sets the Verbose state to true which returns full length keywords for applicable setting queries ON sets the Verbose state to false which returns minimum length keywords for applicable setting queries lt NR1 gt First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples WAI No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order A 0 returns minimum length keywords for applicable setting queries any other value returns full length keywords VERBOSE ON enables the Verbos
151. LSB 1 2 8 SFPbinary BIN FP LSB 4 DATA ENCDG might return DATa ENCDG SRPBINARY for the format of the outgoing waveform data DATA ENCDG RPBinary sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first This command sets or returns the location of waveform data that is transferred from the instrument by the CURVe Query Waveform Transfer DATa SOUrce lt wfm gt lt gt lt wfm gt DATa SOUrce CURVe lt wfim gt is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred from the instrument to the controller DATA SOURCE might return DATA SOURCE REF3 indicating that the source for the waveform data which is transferred using a CURVe query is reference 3 DATA SOURCE CH1 specifies that the CH1 waveforms will be transferred in the next CURVe query First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATa STARt This command sets or returns the starting data point for waveform transfer This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the instrument Group Waveform Transfer Syntax DATa STARt lt NR1 gt DATa STARt Related Commands CURVe DATa DATa STOP SAVe WAVEform SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat WFMInpre NR_Pt WFMOutpre NR_ Pt Arguments lt NR1 gt is the first data point that will be transferred which ranges from 1 to the record length Data will be transferr
152. Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu and then pressing the Setup button Save and Recall SAV lt NR1 gt RCL RECAII SETUp SAVe SETUp lt NR1 gt specifies a location in which to save the state of the instrument Location values range from through 10 Using an out of range location value causes an execution error Any settings that have been stored previously at this location will be overwritten SAV 2 saves the current instrument state in memory location 2 SAVe IMAGe No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Saves a capture of the screen image into the specified file Supported image formats are PNG Windows Bitmap and TIFF If an extension for a supported file type is added to the file name then the corresponding format will be used If no supported extension is added to the file the format to use will be determined by the value obtained from the SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat query Save and Recall SAVe IMAGe lt file path gt lt file path gt is a filename including path where the image will be saved SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat Group 2 214 Sets the file format to use for saving screen images when the file type cannot be determined from the given file name or when screen images are captured by using the front panel Save and Recall First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4
153. MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 might return MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 MATH1 indicating that Math 1 is the measurement 2 source MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE This command sets or returns whether the specified measurement slot is computed and displayed The measurement slot is specified by x which ranges from 1 through 8 This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and then clicking the Display button For a measurement to display you must have selected a source waveform and defined the measurement you want to take and display You select the measurement using the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 command You define the measurement type using the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe command Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE OFF ON lt NR1 gt MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE Related Commands MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 183 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples OFF disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot ON enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot lt NR1 gt 0 disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot any other value enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot MEASUREMENT MEAS2 STATE ON computes and displays the
154. MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt MEASUREMENT INDICATORS HORZ1 might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS HORZ1 2 0E 3indicating that horizontal indicator has a value of 2mV MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ Query Only Group 2 176 Returns the number of horizontal measurement indicators currently being displayed Measurement First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMHORZ might returnMEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMHORZ 2 indicating that there are currently 2 horizontal lines drawn on the graticule showing where the measurement specified by MEASUrement INDICators STATE is being performed MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the number of vertical measurement indicators currently being displayed Measurement MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMVERT might returnMEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMVERT 2 indicating that there are currently 2 vertical lines drawn on the graticule showing where the measurement specified by MEASUrement INDICators STATE is being performed MEASUrement INDICators STATE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Set or returns the state of visible measurement indicators Performs the same operations as the front panel Measurement Indicators menu
155. MODe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the A trigger mode This command is equivalent to selecting Mode from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Trigger Mode Trigger TRIGger A MODe AUTO NORMal TRIGger A MODe TRIGger A LEVel AUTO generates a trigger if one is not detected within a specified time period NORMa waits for a valid trigger event TRIGGER A MODE NORMAL specifies that a valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is generated TRIGGER A MODE might return TRIGGER A MODE NORMAL indicating that a valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is generated TRIGger A PULse Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples 2 282 This query only command returns the A pulse trigger parameters Trigger TRIGger A PULSe TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGGER A PULSE might return TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS GLITCH SOURCE CH1 GLITCH WIDTH 2 0000E 9 TRIGIF ACCEPT POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE THRESHOLD HIGH 1 2000 LOW 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WHEN OCCURS WIDTH 2 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION DELTATIME 2 0000E 9 POLARITY POSITIVE THRESHOLD HIGH 1 2000 LOW 800 0000E 3 gt TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION WHEN SLOWERTHAN TRIGGER A PULSE WIDTH LOWLIMIT 2 0000E 9 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands L
156. MODe POST EXTENDed RTC SERVice DIAg MODe First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 109 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DIAg RESUIt FLAg Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Returns the pass fail status from the last diagnostic test sequence execution The DIAg RESUIt LOG query can be used to determine which test s has failed Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg RESU1t FLAg DIAg RESUIt LOG PASS indicating that all of the selected diagnostic tests have passed FAIL indicating that at least one of the selected diagnostic tests has failed DIAG RESULT FLAG returns either DIAG RESULT FLAG PASS or FALL DIAg RESUIt LOG Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples 2 110 Returns the internal results log from the last diagnostic test sequence execution The list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested along with the pass fail status of each Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg RESU1t LOG DIAg RESUIt FLAg lt QString gt in the following format lt Status gt lt Module name gt lt Status gt lt Module name gt DIAG RESULT LOG might return DIAG RESULT LOG pass CPU pass Display pass Front Panel pass I0 pass Acquisition pass FDD pass Application Key pass ROM First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Comman
157. Measure menu and then clicking the desired Measurement Gating setting Measurement MEASUrement GATing OFF SCREen CURSor MEASUrement GATing OFF turns off measurement gating SCREen turns on gating using the left and right edges of the screen CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors even if they are off screen MEASUREMENT GATING CURSOR turns on measurement gating using the cursors as limits MEASUREMENT GATING might return MEASUREMENT GATING CURSOR indicating that measurements are limited to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement IMMed Query Only This query only command returns all immediate measurement setup parameters Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED might return MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE UNITS V SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CHL SOURCE1 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000 LOW 0 0000 MID1 0 0000 mMID2 0 0000 MEASUREMENT IMMED REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 0000 LOW 10 0000 MID1 50 0000 MID2 50 0000 MEASUREMENT IMMED METHOD HISTOGRAM NOISE HIGH MEASUrement IMMed DELay Query Only This quer
158. NOTE For Level 0 and 1 probes the serial number will be N A Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber Examples CH1 PROBE ID SERNUMBER might return CH1 PROBE ID SERNUMBER B010289 indicating that the serial number of the probe attached to channel 1 is BO10289 CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE Query Only This query only command returns the type of probe that is attached to the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments Level 2 or higher probes supply their exact product nomenclature for Level 0 or 1 probes a generic type string of nnX is returned First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 87 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Examples Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE CH1 PROBE ID TYPE might return CH1 PROBE ID TYPE P6203 indicating that P6203 type probe is attached to channel 1 CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance Query Only Group Syntax Examples CH lt x gt PRObe S Gnal Group Syntax This query only command returns the resistance factor of the probe that is attached to the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance CH2
159. OGIC THReshold REF lt x gt ECL specifies a 1 3 V trigger level TTL specifies a 1 4 V trigger level SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax 2 236 This command sets or returns the channel waveform lower threshold level for a transition search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOwerthreshold CH lt x gt First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ECL specifies a 1 3 V trigger level TTL specifies a 1 4 V trigger level SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the math waveform lower threshold level for a transition search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH ECL specifies a 1 3 V trigger level TTL specifies a 1 4 V trigger level SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the reference waveform lower threshold level for a transition search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt
160. OLOR PALETTE NORMAL MATHCOLOR DEFAULT REFCOLOR DEFAULT DISPLAY FILTER SINX FORMAT YT GRATICULE FULL INTENSITY WAVEFORM 75 0000 AUTOBRIGHT 1 SCREENSAVER 1 SCREENSAVERDELAY 28800 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE OFF STYLE VECTORS TRIGBAR SHORT TRIGT 1 VARPERSIST 500 0000E 3 HARDCOPY FILENAME untitled PORT FILE DIAG LEVEL SUBSYS SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE LEVEL 0 0000 HOLDOFF BY DEFAULT TIME 1 5000E 6 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE The SRE Service Request Enable command sets and queries the bits in the Service Request Enable Register For more information refer to Registers Status and Error SRE lt NR1 gt SRE CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg FACtory STB lt NR1 gt is a value in the range from 0 through 255 The binary bits of the SRER are set according to this value Using an out of range value causes an execution error The power on default for SRER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the SRER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle SRE 48 sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000 SRE might return 32 showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value of 00100000 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 251 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order STArtuptime Query Only Group Syntax STB Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands
161. ON or acquisition ACQuire STATE RUN or ACQuire STATE1 when ACQuire STOPAfter is set to SEQuence Hard copy operation HARDCopy STArt Calibration step Refer to the optional instrument Service Manual BUSY might return BUSY 1 indicating that the instrument is currently busy This query only command returns the status of instrument calibration including internal signal path calibration factory calibration and probe calibration This query also returns the time until notification when the next factory calibration is due Refer to the service manual for factory calibration command descriptions Calibration and Diagnostic CAL CALibrate RESults SPC CAL might return CALIBRATE INTERNAL STATUS PASS CALIBRATE TEMPERATURE 32 FACTORY FANCONTROL 2 STATUS PASS STEPSTATUS FAIL STEPSTIMULUS First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 71 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CAL Query Only Group Syntax Returns Examples 0 0 0 0 0 END NOTIFY HOURS 10500 YEARS 5 5000 DUE DUE CALIBRATE RESULTS SPC PASS FACTORY PASS FACTORY VOLTAGE PASS FREQUENCY PASS TRIGGER PASS CALIBRATE PROBESTATE CH1 1 CH2 1 CH3 1 CH4 1 Runs an internal self calibration and returns the oscilloscope calibration status NOTE Disconnect or otherwise remove all input signals prior to starting self calibration The self calibration can take several minutes to complete No other commands are
162. ONDition Sets or returns the CAN condition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Sets or queries the CAN trigger condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIifier Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for CAN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for CAN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Sets or queries the CAN trigger frame type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN Dentifier ADDRess MODe Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe Sets or queries the binary address string used for the CAN trigger Sets or queries the 12C address mode to 7 or 10 bit TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe Sets or returns the I2C address type to I2C special addresses TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Sets or queries the binary address string used for the I2C trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for 12C trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection Sets or queries the 12C trigger condition valid ona READ WRITE or either TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa SiZe Sets or returns the length of
163. OOTP ON sets the oscilloscope to search for a DHCP or BOOTP server and assign a dynamic IP address to the oscilloscope First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 124 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ETHERnet DNS IPADDress Sets or returns the network Domain Name Server DNS IP address Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet DNS IPADDress lt QString gt ETHERnet DNS IPADDress Arguments lt QString gt is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET DNS IPADDRESS 128 196 13 352 sets the DNS IP address that the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network ETHERnet DOMAINname Sets or returns the network domain name Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet DOMAINname lt Qstri ng gt ETHERnet DOMAINname Arguments lt QString gt is the network domain name enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET DOMAINNAME Alphal Mycorp com sets the domain name that the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network ETHERnet ENET ADDress Query Only Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope This is assigned at the factory and can not be changed Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet ENET ADDress First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 125 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples ETHERNET ENET ADDRESS returns an ethernet address such as 02 00 e3 01 32 03 ETHERnet GATEW
164. PC operations in process are complete If the input buffer becomes full the controller will be unable to write more commands to the buffer This can cause a time out The BUSY query allows you to find out whether the instrument is busy processing a command that has an extended processing time such as single sequence acquisition First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events The same command sequence using the BUSY query for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement while BUSY keep looping Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the WAI command The BUSY query helps you avoid time outs caused by writing too many commands to the input buffer The controller is still tied up though and the repeated BUSY query will result in more bus traffic Using the OPC Command If the corresponding status registers are enabled the OPC command sets the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register SESR when an operation is co
165. PEWA Messtechnik GmbH Weidenweg 21 58239 Schwerte Telefon 02304 96109 0 Fax 02304 96109 88 z E Mail info pewa de Messtechnik m PEWA DPO4000 Series Digital Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual www tektronix com Tektronix S 071 1845 00 Copyright Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Tektronix Inc P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support In North America call 1 800 833 9200 Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find contacts in your area Table of Contents Prelate ootuses esa n EA EE to O E E senasacag cankenenntsmneana des cuiewestaaten es iii Getting Started oc ciccaouteadealenehuncaswnedadiwndaucwista EE E A EN EA a AEE 1 1 Setting Up Remote Communications c ccc ecc cece eee ence ene ene e eee eee eens ene n eee eneaes 1 2 Command S yiitax ser aieus sas ckives soe oekernes T E O cates seabncceehs doesn deus sacedardas OET 2 1 Command and Query Structure 2 0 0 0 cc ccc cece cee nen e ieni EEE nnn nnn EEE 2 1 Clearing the Instrument 0 c
166. PIBUsb ADDress 2 137 GPIBUsb HW Version 2 138 GPIBUsb ID 2 138 GPIBUsb SETADDress 2 138 GPIBUsb SETID 2 138 GPIBUsb STATUS 2 138 HDR 2 142 HEADer 2 143 ID 2 151 IDN 2 151 LANGuage 2 152 LANGuage INCRement 2 152 LOCk 2 152 LRN 2 153 NEWpass 2 204 REM 2 212 SET 2 250 STArtuptime 2 252 TEKSecure 2 252 TIME 2 253 TOTaluptime 2 253 TRG 2 254 TST 2 321 UNLock 2 322 VERBose 2 322 N NEWpass 2 204 O OPC 2 205 OPT 2 206 P PSC 2 206 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index PUD 2 206 R RCL 2 207 RECAI SETUp 2 208 RECAI WAV Eform 2 208 REF lt x gt DATE 2 209 REF lt x gt HORizontal POSition 2 209 REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle 2 210 REF lt x gt TIMe 2 210 REF lt x gt VERTical POSition 2 210 REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle 2 211 REM 2 212 RST 2 213 S SAV 2 213 Save and Recall commands FACtory 2 130 RCL 2 207 RECAII SETUp 2 208 RECAI WAV Eform 2 208 SAV 2 214 SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat 2 214 SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat 2 217 SAVe IMAGe 2 214 SAVe SETUp 2 215 SAVe WAVEform 2 216 SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat 2 214 SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat 2 216 SAVe IMAGe 2 214 SAVe SETUp 2 215 SAVe WAVEform 2 216 Search commands SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy 2 218 SEARCH SEARCHK lt x gt STATE 2 218 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TOTAL 2 218 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS 2 219 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIG
167. PRODDELTA 99 1000E 36 PRODUCT1 99 1000E 36 PRODUCT2 99 1000E 36 READOUT RECTANGULAR RADIUS1 99 1000E 36 RADIUS2 99 1000E 36 RATDELTA 99 1000E 36 RATIO1 99 1000E 36 RATIO2 99 1000E 36 RDELTA 99 1000E 36 RECTX1 0 0000 RECTX2 0 0000 RECTY 1 0 0000 RECT Y2 0 0000 THDELTA 99 1000E 36 THETA1 99 1000E 36 THETA2 99 1000E 36 XDELTA 0 0000 YDELTA 0 0000 This command sets or returns the cursor type Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Cursor Type from the Cursors menu and then choosing from the drop down list Cursor CURSor FUNCtion OFF SCREEN WAVE fo rm CURSor FUNCtion OFF removes the cursors from the display but does not change the cursor type SCREEN specifies both horizontal and vertical bar cursors which measure in horizontal and vertical units specified by the Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 Sources Use these cursors to measure anywhere in the waveform display area WAVE form specifies paired or split cursors in YT display format for measuring waveform amplitude and time In XY and XYZ format these cursors indicate the amplitude positions of an XY pair Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage where Ch1 is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis relative to the trigger CURSOR FUNCTION VBArs selects the vertical bar cursors type CURSOR FUNCTION might return CURSOr FUNCtion SCREEN indicating that the screen cursors are currently selected First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed
168. PY INKSAVER ON will cause subsequent hard copy output and preview commands to display grayscale menus on a white background This command sets or returns the page orientation for hard copy Hard Copy HARDCopy LAYout PORTRait LANdscape HARDCopy LAYout PORTRait orients the screen image vertically on the printed page LANdscape orients the screen image horizontally on the printed page HARDCOPY LAYOUT LANDSCAPE sets the hard copy page orientation to Landscape HARDCOPY LAYOUT might return HARDCOPY LAYOUT PORTRAIT indicating that the hard copy page orientation is set to portrait HARDCopy PREVIEW No Query Form Group Syntax 2 140 Causes a preview of the current screen contents with the InkSaver palette applied to be displayed Hard Copy HARDCopy PREVIEW ON OFF lt NR1 gt First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns preview mode On OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns preview mode Off HARDCopy PRINTer ADD No Query Form Adds a network printer to the list of available printers All three arguments must be present but only one of server name or server IP address must be specified An empty string can be used for blank arguments Group Hard Copy Syntax HARDCopy PRINTer ADD lt name gt lt server gt lt address gt Arguments lt name gt The name of the network printer queue lt ser
169. R A LOGIC SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 1 4000 SOURCE CH2 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 1 4000 SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD HOLDTIME 2 Q0000E 9 SETTIME 3 0000E 9 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input for setup and hold triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCK TRIGger A SETHold DATa TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk THReshold TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk SOUrce TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHO1d CLOCk EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 1 4000 SOURCE CH2 indicating the current clock settings for setup and hold triggering TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOId CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk EDGE FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 297 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE specifies the polarity as the clock rising edge TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE indicating that polarity is specified as the cl
170. R PALETTE USER REF 1 0 90 0 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER REF2 0 90 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER REF3 60 90 100 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE USER REF4 240 90 100 DISPLAY COLOR REFCOLOR DEFAULT DISPLAY CURSORTICK SHORT DISPLAY FILTER SINX DISPLAY FORMAT YT DISPLAY GRATICULE FULL DISPLAY INTENSITY AUTOBRIGHT DISPLAY INTENSITY SCREENSAVER 1 1 DISPLAY INTENSITY SCREENSAVERDELAY 28800 DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM IMAGEVIEW 75 0000 DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM RECORDVIEWWS 0000 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE OFF DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL1 NAME A DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL1 XPOS 100 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL1 YPOS 5 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL2 NAME 3 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL2 XPOS 100 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL2 YPOS 20 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL3 NAME DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL3 XPOS 100 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL3 YPOS 35 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL4 NAME 7 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL4 XPOS 100 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL4 YPOS 5 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL5 NAME A DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL5 XPOS 100 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL5 YPOS 65 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL6 NAME 7 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL6 XPOS 100 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL6 YPOS 80 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL7 NAME First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 3 Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL7 XPOS 100 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL7 YPOS 95 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT
171. RATE25K RATE35K RATE5SOK TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOM SCAN RATE15 argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 15 kHz through 20 kHz This is the standard broadcast rate RATE20 argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 20 kHz through 25 kHz RATE25 argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 25 kHz through 35 kHz RATE35 argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 35 kHz through 50 kHz RATESO argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 50 kHz through 65 kHz TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN RATELS5 sets the scan rate of the A trigger custom video to Rate 1 which is 15 kHz to 20 kHz standard broadcast rate TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN RATE20 indicating that the video line rate for the A trigger custom video is set to Rate20 which is 20 kHz to 25 kHz TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Conditions Group Sets or queries the analog HDTV video signal format on which to trigger This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 307 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat HD1080P24 HD720P60 HD480P60 HD1080150 HD1080P25 HD1080160 HD1LO80PSF24 TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Table 2 37 Available HDTV formats HDTV format Description 1080150 11
172. RCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 234 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit 2 235 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit 2 235 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt 2 235 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold MATH 2 236 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt 2 236 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 236 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH 2 237 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt 2 237 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width POLarity 2 237 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width SOUrce 2 238 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WHEn 2 238 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth 2 239 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 2 239 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUtce 2 240 Index 10 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 240 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 241 SEARCH SEARCHK lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE 2 241 SEARCH SEARCHK lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 241 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold 2 242 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 242 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 2 243 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime 2 243 SEARCH
173. RCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity 2 244 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce 2 244 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn 2 245 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy 2 218 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE 2 218 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TOTAL 2 218 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS 2 219 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition 2 219 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 220 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier 2 220 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe 2 221 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue 2 221 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype 2 221 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe 2 222 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue 2 222 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe 2 223 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TY Pe 2 223 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue 2 224 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition 2 224 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection 2 225 SEARCH
174. RDCopy INKSaver Sets or returns the currently active printer When a hardcopy operation is performed the output will be sent to this printer One of two methods of specifying the printer can be used an index value obtained from looking at the list of attached printers or by specifying the printer name Hard Copy HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter lt NR1 gt lt name gt HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter lt NR1 gt is the index of the desired printer as returned from HARDCopy PRINTer LIST lt name gt is the name of the printer as specified in the printer list This name is case sensitive and must be entered exactly as shown in the list Changes hard copy output to print color traces and graticule on a white background while retaining waveform color information except for channel 1 which prints a dark blue because yellow does not show up well is difficult to see on a white background This option can significantly reduce print time and quantities of ink required compared with WYSIWYG dark background images Returns 1 when inksaver is on and 0 when inksaver is turned off First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 139 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples HARDCopy LAYout Group Syntax Arguments Examples Hard Copy HARDCopy INKSaver ON or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the ink saver mode on OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the ink saver mode off HARDCO
175. REFLevel PERCent commands MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD ABSOLUTE specifies that explicit user defined values are used for the reference levels First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT indicating that the reference level units used are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH This command sets or returns the percent where 100 is equal to HIGH that is used to calculate the high reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then entering the Percentage High Ref value NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH Related Commands MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TY Pe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe Arguments lt NR3 gt is the high reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default high reference level is 90 Examples MEASUREMENT REFLEV
176. RMDir ROLL RUNT SAMPLERate SAMPLEpoint SAVe SCAN SCAle SCLK SDATA SEARCH SECdiv SELect SELected SERnumber SET SETADDress SETHol1d SETID SETTime SETUp SHOW SIGnal SIZE size SLEWRate SLOpe SNAPShot SOURCE SOURCE2 source SPC SPECTral SPI SPLit SS STANdard START STATE STATIStics STATUS STATe STATUS STArtuptime STDdev STEPSTAtUS STEPSTIMu lus STOP SToPAfter STRing STYle STsetting SUBNETMask SYNC TEKSecure TEMPerature TERmination THREsShold THReshold TIME TIMe TOTAL ToTal TOTaluptime TRANSition TRIGger TURN TYPE TYPe TYsetting Trigger UNITS UNIts UNLock UPPerthreshold USE VALue VAR VBArs VDELTa VECtorscope VERBose VERT VERTical VIDeo Voltage wAVEform WAVFrm WEIghting WFId WFMInpre WFMOutpre WHEn wIDth WINdow XINcr XUNit XY XZEro YCHannel YEARS YMU Tt YOFf YREF YUNIt YUNI tS YZEro ZOOM Zoom First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values Writer s note These default setup values need to updated for the DPO4000 The ones now shown are really just for the TDS5000 The following tables list the default setup values by command group The instrument sets these values when you press the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button or sending the FACtory command Only those commands that have values set by the DEFAULT SETUP function are listed in these tables Note T
177. RSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt CURSor FUNCtion lt NR3 gt specifies the cursor position relative to ground CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 25 0E 3 positions Cursor 1 of the horizontal cursors at 25 mV CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 might return CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 64 0000E 03 indicating that Cursor 2 of the horizontal bar cursors is at 64 mV This command sets or returns the units for the horizontal bar cursors Cursor CURSor HBArs UNIts BASE PERcent CURSor HBArs UNIts BASE selects the units current selected by the Vbar cursors PERcent selects ratio cursors CURSOR HBARS UNITS might return CURSOR HBARS UNITS BASE indicating that the units for the horizontal bar cursors are base CURSor HBArs USE No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands 2 94 Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement scale This command is only applicable when ratio cursors are on Cursor CURSor HBArs USE CURrent FIVEdivs CURSor HBArs UNIts First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples CURSor MODe Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURrent sets the H Bar measurement scale so that 0 is the current position of the lowest H Bar cursor and 100 is the current position of the highest H Bar cursor Moving the cursors after executing this command does not change the 0 or 100 scale points FIVEdivs sets H Bar m
178. Returns the total number of hours that the oscilloscope has been turned on since the nonvolatile memory was last programmed TRG Performs the group execute trigger GET TST Tests the GPIB interface and returns status UNLock Unlocks front panel VERBose Sets or returns the verbose state Save and Recall Command Group Use the commands in the Save and Recall Command Group to store and retrieve internal waveforms and settings When you save a setup you save all the settings of the instrument When you recall a setup the instrument restores itself to the state that it was in when you originally saved that setting Table 2 25 Save and Recall Commands Command Description FACtory Resets the instrument to factory default settings RCL Restores the state of the instrument from a copy of the setting stored in memory RECAII SETUp Recalls saved instrument settings RECAII WAVEform Recalls a stored waveform to a reference location SAV Stores the state of the instrument to a specified memory location SAVe IMAGe Saves a capture of the screen image into the specified file SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat Sets or returns the format for images SAVe SETUp Saves the current front panel setup to a specified memory location or file First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 28 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 25 Save and Recall Commands cont Command Description
179. SA27 K 4B 75 5B 91 7B 123 114 TAI2 134 TA28 174 SA28 L i 4C 76 5C 92 7C 124 115 TA13 135 TA29 175 SA29 M 4D 77 5D 93 7D 125 116 TA14 136 TA30 176 SA30 N 4E 78 5E 94 7E 126 117 TA15 137 UNT 177 o RUBOUT 4F 79 SF 95 DEL y TALK SECONDARY ADDRESSES ADDRESSES OR COMMANDS Tektronix REF ANSI STD X3 4 1977 IEEE STD 488 1 1987 ISO STD 646 2973 A 1 Appendix A Character Set First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer A 2 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix B Reserved Words Reserved Words CAL CLS DDT ESE ESR TDN LRN OPC OPT PSC PUD RCL RST SAV SRE STB TRG TST WAT A ABSo lute ACQLENGTH ACQuire ACTIVeprinter ADD ADDRess ADDress ALIas ALIas ALL ALLEV AUTOContrast AUTOSet AUTOZero AUXout B BACKLight BANdwidth BEL BITRate BIT_Nr BN_Fmt BOX BRIghtness First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer This is a list of reserved words for the DPO4000 Series instruments Capital letters identify the required minimum spelling For the most robust code use the full spelling since spelling rules may change over time and among instrument models BUS BUSY BY BYT_Nr BYT_Or CAL CALibrate CAN CATalog CH CH2 CH4 CLASS CLEAR CLEARMenu CLEARSNapshot CLOCK CLOCk CONDi tion CONTRASt CONTRO COPy COUNT COUP ling CREATE CURSor CURVe CUSTom CwD D DATA DATE DATa DEFIne DEFine DEGAUSS DELEt
180. SCALE5 ZOOM ZOOM1 REF lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 ZOOM ZOOM1 REF lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM1 SCROLLLOCK 1 ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE 1 ZOOM ZOOM2 CH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POSITIO80 0000 ZOOM ZOOM2 CH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL SCALE 5 ZOOM ZOOM2 CH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 ZOOM ZOOM2 CH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM2 MATHs1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POS B 6000 ZOOM ZOOM2 MATH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL SCALE ZOOM ZOOM2 MATH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0000 ZOOM ZOOM2 MATH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM2 REF lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POSITIGOW0000 ZOOM ZOOM2 REF lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL SCALE5 ZOOM ZOOM2 REF lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION0 0000 ZOOM ZOOM2 REF lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM2 SCROLLLOCK 1 ZOOM ZOOM2 STATE 0 ZOOM ZOOM3 CH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POSITIORD 0000 ZOOM ZOOM3 CH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL SCALE 5 ZOOM ZOOM3 CH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 ZOOM ZOOM3 CH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM3 MATH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POSITI 6000 ZOOM ZOOM3 MATH lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL SCALE ZOOM ZOOM3 MATHs1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0000 ZOOM ZOOM3 MATH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM3 REF lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL POSITI N0000 ZOOM ZOOM3 REF lt 1 4 gt HORIZONTAL SCALE5 ZOOM ZOOM3 REF lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 ZOOM ZOOM3 REF lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 First Draft October 18
181. SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe 2 225 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VA Lue 2 226 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition 2 226 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe 2 227 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue 2 226 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOS OUT VALue 2 227 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce 2 228 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 2 228 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce 2 228 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel 2 229 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt 2 229 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH 2 229 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt 2 230 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion 2 230 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt 2 231 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE 2 231 Index 9 Index SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce 2 231 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH 2 232 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF lt x gt 2 232 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt 2 233 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH 2 233 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF lt x gt 2 233 SEARCH SEA
182. SER Use the ESE query to read it 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Figure 3 4 The Event Status Enable Register ESER First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 3 Status and Events Queues 3 4 PSC Command Output Queue A The Service Request Enable Register SRER This register controls which bits in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status Summary MSS bit Use the SRE command to set the SRER Use the SRE query to read the register The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ESB MV Figure 3 5 The Service Request Enable Register SRER The PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power on Sending PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows m DESER 255 equivalent to a DESe 255 command m FSER 0 equivalent to an ESE 0 command SRER 0 equivalent to an SRE 0 command Sending PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile memory through a power cycle Note To enable the PON Power On event to generate a Service Request send PSC 0 use the DESe and ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and ESER and use the SRE command to enable bit 5 i
183. Sets or returns the 12C SCLK source BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce Sets or returns the 12C SDATA source BUS B lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the position of the bus waveforms BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity Sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI SCLK source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity Sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI MISO source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity Sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI MOSI source BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity Sets or returns the SPI SS polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI SS source BUS B lt x gt STATE Turns the bus on and off BUS B lt x gt TYPE Sets or returns the bus type BUS THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the threshold for a channel TRIGger Forces a trigger event to occur TRIGger A Sets A trigger level to 50 or returns current A trigger parameters First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 27 Trigger Commands cont Command Command Groups Description TRIGger A BUS Sets or queries the serial trigger type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN C
184. Sition This command sets or returns the horizontal position for the specified zoom where x is an integer from to 4 representing the desired zoom window Group Zoom Syntax ZO0Om ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORi zontal POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt is a value from 0 to 100 00 and is the percent of the waveform that is to the left of screen center when the zoom factor is 1x or greater Examples ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 sets the Zoom reference pointer at 50 of acquired waveform ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL POSITION might return ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 0000 indicating that the Zoom reference pointer is currently set at 50 of acquired waveform ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle This command sets or returns the zoom horizontal scale factor for the specified zoom where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 346 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HOR1 zontal SCAle lt NR3 gt is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction in 1 2 5 increments ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL SCALE 5 sets the horizontal scale factor of Channel 1 to 5 ZOOM ZOOM2 HORIZONTAL SCALE might return ZOOM2 HORIZONTAL SCALE 1 indicating that
185. SuIts query is intended to support GO NoGO testing of the oscilloscope calibration readiness all returned results should indicate PASS status if the instrument is fit for duty It is quite common however to use uncalibrated probes particularly when the instrumentt inputs are connected into a test system with coaxial cables This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Calibration from the Utilities menu and then viewing the contents of the Status field Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate RESults CAL CALIBRATE RESULTS returns the status of all the calibration subsystems The query might return CALIBRATE RESULTS SPC PASS FACTORY PASS FACTORY VOLTAGE PASS FREQUENCY PASS TRIGGER PASS First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 77 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CALibrate RESults FACtory Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the status of internal and factory calibration without performing any calibration operations Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate RESults FACtory CALIBRATE RESULTS FACTORY might return CALIBRATE RESULTS FACTORY FREQUENCY PASS TRIGGER PASS VOLTAGE PASS CALibrate RESults FACtory Frequency Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the status of internal and factory frequency calibration without performing any calibration operations Calibration and Diagn
186. System CWD FILESystem RMDir lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name FILESYSTEM DELETE NOT_MINE SET deletes the file named NOT_MINE SET from the current working directory First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 133 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FILESystem DIR Query Only This query only command returns a list of quoted strings Each string contains the name of a file or directory in the current working directory Group File System Syntax FILESystem DIR Related Commands FILESystem CWD FILESystem MKDir Arguments None Examples FILESYSTEM DIR returns a list of files and directories in the current working directory FILESystem FREESpace Query Only This query only command returns the number of bytes of free space on the current drive Group File System Syntax FILESystem FREESpace FILESystem MKDir No Query Form This command no query form creates a new directory Group File System Syntax FILESystem MKDir lt directory path gt Related Commands FILESystem CWD FILESystem DIR Arguments lt directory path gt is a quoted string that specifies the directory to create First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 134 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FILESYSTEM MKDIR C NewDir
187. TOT measures the top value used in extinction ratio measurements PwIdth positive width is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region QFACtor measures the quality factor The Q factor is a figure of merit for an eye diagram which indicates the vertical eye opening relative to the noise at the low and high logic levels It is the ratio of the eye size to noise RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform The rise time is the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a low reference value default is 10 to a high reference value default is 90 RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire waveform or gated region RMSJitter measures the variance in the time locations of the cross point The RMS jitter is defined as one standard deviation at the cross point RMSNo se measures the Root Mean Square noise amplitude on a waveform at the mid reference level SIGMA1 histogram measurement measures the percentage of points in the histogram that are within one standard deviation of the histogram mean SIGMA2 histogram measurement measures the percentage of points in the histogram that are within two standard deviations of the histogram mean SIGMA3 histogram measurement measures the percentage of points in the his
188. TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT LOGIC THRESHOLD CBe004 gt TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT THRESHOLD HIGH 1 2000 TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT THRESHOLD LOW 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WHEN OCCURS TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WIDTH 2 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A PULSE TIMEOUT POLARITY STAYSHIGH TRIGGER A PULSE TIMEOUT TIME 2 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION DELTATIME 2 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION THRESHOLD HGH TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION THRESHOLD 8 000E 3 TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION WHEN FASTERTHAN TRIGGER A PULSE WIDTH HIGHLIMIT 2 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE WIDTH LOWLIMIT 2 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE WIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A PULSE WIDTH WHEN WITHIN TRIGGER A PULSE WINDOW LOGIC INPUT CHRIGE TRIGGER A PULSE WINDOW LOGIC THRESHOLROQ0H 1 4 gt TRIGGER A PULSE WINDOW THRESHOLD HIGH2000 TRIGGER A PULSE WINDOW THRESHOLD LO 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A PULSE WINDOW TY PE INSIDE TRIGGER A PULSE WINDOW WHEN OCCURS TRIGGER A PULSE WINDOW WIDTH 2 0000E 9 TRIGGER A TYPE EDGE TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT INTERLACED TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN RATE1 TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD ALLFIELDS TRIGGER A VIDEO HOLDOFF FIELD 0 0000 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 1 TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY NORMAL TRIGGER A VIDEO SCAN RATE1 TRIGGER A VIDEO SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A VIDEO STANDARD NTSC
189. TRIGger A BUS SOUrce 2 265 TRIGger A EDGE COUPling 2 266 TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 2 267 TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce 2 267 TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe 2 268 TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt 2 269 TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss 2 270 TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion 2 271 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt 2 272 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE 2 273 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce 2 273 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut 2 272 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH2 2 274 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH4 2 275 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 276 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit 2 277 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit 2 278 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern 2 274 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk EDGE 2 278 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk SOUtce 2 278 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCKk THReshold 2 279 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 279 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold DATa THReshold 2 279 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold HOLDTime 2 280 TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold SETTime 2 280 TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt 2 281 TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold 2 280 TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 281 TRIGger A PULse CLAss 2 283 TRIGger A PULse RUNT HIGHLimit 2 283 TRIGger A PULse RUNT LOWLimit 2 284 TRIGger A PULse RUNT POLarity 2 284 Index 13 Index TRIGger A PULse RUNT SOUrce 2 284 TRIGger A PULse RUNT THReshold HIGH 2 285 TRIGger A PULse RUNT THReshold LOW 2 285 TRIGger A PULse RUNT THReshold 2 285 TRIGger A PULse RUNT WHEn 2 285 TRIGger A PULse RUNT WID
190. Ta Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples This query only command returns the horizontal difference between the two vertical bar cursors The units are specified by the CURSor VBArs UNIts command The position can appear in units of Base or 1 Base Cursor CURSor VBArs DELTa CURSor VBArs UNIts A floating point value with an exponent CURSOR VBARS DELTA might return CURSOR VBARS DELTa 1 0640E 00 indicating that the time between the vertical bar cursors is 1 064 s CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns 2 96 Returns the horizontal value of the specified vertical bar ticks Cursor CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt CURSor VBArs UNIts lt x gt specifies the cursor Valid values are 1 and 2 lt NR3 gt indicates the value of one of the tics The units are specified by the CURSor VBArs UNIts command First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor VBArs HPOS2 might return CURSOR VBARS HPOS2 1 00E 6 indicating the value of one vertical bar tick CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns Examples CURSor VBArs UNIts Group This command sets or returns the horizontal position for vertical bar cursors The cursor is specified by x which can be or 2 Values are with
191. The command specifies the logic value used when the pattern trigger detects the threshold level Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired logical input from the Ch4 drop down list which is located in the Input Threshold group box To set or query the A logic trigger input for a two channel instrument see TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH2 This command applies to four channel instruments Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 275 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH4 HIGH LOW xX TRIGger A LOGICc PATtern INPut CH4 TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt HIGH specifies the logic high LOW specifies the logic low X specifies a don t care state TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH4 HIGH sets the A logic trigger input to logic high for channel 4 when the logic class is set to PATtern When the threshold level is detected HIGH places a 1 on the channel 4 input to the selected function TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH4 might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH4 HIGH indicating that the logic input for channel 4 is logic high TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 276 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments This command sets or
192. This query only command returns the value of the measurement specified by the MEASUrement IMMed TYPe command The measurement is immediately taken on the source s specified by a MEASUrement MMed SOURCE command NOTE A change to HORizontal MAIn SCALe or CH lt x gt SCALe will not necessarily have taken affect if followed by this command Measurement MEASUrement IMMed VALue MEASUrement MMed TYPe MEASUrement MMed SOURCE ESR ALLEv First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 175 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE might return MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE 9 9000E 37 If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it then an item is added to the error queue The error can be checked for with the ESR and ALLEv commands MEASUrement INDICators Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns all measurement indicator parameters Measurement MEASUrement INDICators MEASUREMENT INDICATORS might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE MEAS1 NUMHORZ O NUMVERT 4 HORZ1 7 5E0 HORZ2 3 400000095367E0 HORZ3 0 0E0 HORZ4 0 0E0 VERT1 6 351123E 6 VERT2 3 179753E 6 VERT3 6 40943E 6 VERT4 6 403E 6 MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the position of the specified horizontal measurement indicator lt x gt where lt x gt can be 1 2 3 or 4 Measurement
193. UNits WFMINPRE YZERO 1 5E 0 specifies that the zero reference point for the incoming waveform is 1 5 V below the center of the data range given that WFMInpre YUNit is set to V WFMINPRE YZERO might return WFMINPRE YZEro 7 5000E 6 indicating that the zero reference for the incoming waveform is 7 5 uV below the center of the data range given that WFMInpre YUNit is set to V WFMOutpre Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the waveform formatting data for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The preamble components are considered to be of two types formatting and interpretation The formatting components are ENCdg BN_Fmt BYT_Or BYT_Nr BIT_Nr The interpretation components are derived from the DATa SOUrce specified waveform Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre WFMOUTPRE might return the waveform formatting data as WFMOUTPRE BIT_NR 8 BN_FMT RI BYT_NR 1 BYT_OR MSB ENCDG BIN NR_PT 500 PT_FMT Y PT_ORDER LINEAR PT_OFF 0 XINCR 8 Q0000E 9 XZERO 4 8794E 9 XUNIT s YMULT 2000 0000E 3 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 333 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre BIT_Nr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre BN_Fmt 2 334 Group Syntax Related Commands YOFF 4999 9995E 3 YZERO 0 0000 YUNIT V WFID Chl DC coupling 2 000V div 400 0ns div 500 points Sample mode Thi
194. UREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt REFLEVEL PERCEN 1D00D2 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt SOURCE1 SIGTY FALSE MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt SOURCE2 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt SOURCE2 SIGTYP LSE MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt 1 8 gt TY PE UNDEFINED MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE ALL MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 32 Miscellaneous Default Values The following table lists the Miscellaneous factory default setup values Command Default Values ALIAS STATE 0 OFF AUXOUT EDGE FALLING lt cannot change gt AUXOUT SOURCE ATRIGGER CMDBATCH 1 ON HEADER 1 ON LOCK NONE ROSC SOURCE INTERNAL VERBOSE 1 ON Save and Recall Default Settings The following table lists the Save and Recall factory default setup values Command Default Values SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL Trigger Default Values First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values The following table lists the Trigger factory default setup values Command Default Values TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION AMI PULSEFORRLUSONE TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION AMI THRESHOLD MEH TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION AMI THRESHOLMAWW TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION BITRATE 1544000 TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION CLOCK POLARIRISE TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION CMI PULSEFORRLUSONE TRIGGER A COMMUNICATION CODE NRZ
195. US lt x gt lt NR1 gt OFF ON SELect BUS lt x gt First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 247 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples SELect CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT BUS1 ON turns the Bus waveform display on and selects it SELECT BUS1 might return SELECT BUS1 1 indicating that Bus 1 waveform is being displayed This command turns on the display of a specified waveform and also resets the acquisition The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Vertical SELect CH lt x gt 0ON OFF lt NR1 gt SELect CH lt x gt ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT CH2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on and selects channel 2 SELECT CHL might return SELECT CH1 1 indicating that channel 1 is being displayed SELect
196. VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt MATH 1 VERTical SCAle Related Commands CH lt x gt SCAle REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt is the scale in volts amps or watts per division The range is from 100 0E 36 through 100 0E 36 Examples MATH1 VERTICAL SCALE 100E 03 sets the Math scale to 100 mV per division MATH VERTICAL SCALE might return MATH VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000E 00 indicating that the current scale setting of Math is 1 V per division First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 163 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH 1 VERTical UNITs Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the math waveform vertical measurement unit value Math MATH 1 VERTical UNITsS lt QString gt MATH 1 VERTical UNITS lt Qstring gt is a text label to apply to vertical units when the vertical unit is unknown unit value MATH VERTICAL UNITS might return MATH VERTICAL UNITS joules indicating that the math vertical unit label for unknown values is joules MATHVAR Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples MATHVAR VAR lt x gt 2 164 This command queries all 8 numerical values you can use within math expressions Math MATHVAR MATHVAR VAR lt x gt MATH 1 DEFIne lt NR3 gt are the stored numerical values MATHVAR returns the values of all variables stored in locations through 8 This com
197. XT LABEL3 NAME XPOS 100 YPOS 35 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual DISplay CLOCk Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL4 NAME XPOS 100 YPOS 50 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABELS NAME XPOS 100 YPOS 343 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL6 NAME XPOS 100 YPOS 80 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL7 NAME XPOS 100 YPOS 95 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL8 NAME XPOS 100 YPOS 110 DISPLAY WAVEFORM 1 This command sets or returns the display of the date and time This is equivalent to selecting Display Date amp Time from the Display menu The query form of this command returns an ON 1 or an OFF 0 Display DISplay CLOCk ON OFF lt NR1 gt DISplay CLOCk DATE TIME ON enables display of date and time OFF disables display of date and time lt NR1 gt 0 disables display of date and time any other value enables display of date and time DISPLAY CLOCK ON enables display of date and time DISPLAY CLOCK might return DISPLAY CLOCK 1 indicating that the display of date and time is currently enabled DiSplay FORMat Query Only Group Syntax Arguments This command queries the display format and always returns YT Display DISplay FORMat YT sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the default mode First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series
198. Y is used it is interpreted over a single point Waveform Transfer WFMInpre PT_Fmt ENV Y WFMInpre PT_Fmt WFMOutpre PT_Fmt ENV specifies that the waveform is transmitted in envelope mide as maximum and minimum point pairs Only Y values are explicitly transmitted Absolute coordinates are given by Xn XZEro XINcr n PT_ Off Ynmax YZEro YMUIt ynmax YOFf Ynmin YZEro YMUIt ynmin YOFf Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is transmitted for each point in the waveform record Only Y values are explicitly transmitted Absolute coordinates are given by Xn XZEro XINcr N PT_ Off Yn YZEro YMUIt Yn YOFf WFMINPRE PT_FMT ENV sets the incoming waveform data point format to enveloped WFMINPRE PT_FMT might return WFMINPRE PT_FMT ENV indicating that the waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum point pairs The set form of this command is ignored The query form always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is on or displayed If the waveform is not displayed the query form generates an error and returns event code 2244 This command is listed for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Waveform Transfer WFMInpre PT_OfFf WFMInpre PT_Off DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre
199. YUNIT dB indicating that the vertical units for the waveform are measured in decibels WFMOutpre YZEro Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples ZOOm Query Only Group This query only command returns the vertical offset in units specified by WFMOutpre YUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YZEro DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre Y UNit WFMOUTPRE YZERO might return WFMOUTPRE YZERO 100 0000E 3 indicating that vertical offset is set to 100 mV This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces or live traces The ZOOm query returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display Zoom First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 343 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Examples zoom ZOOM might return ZOOM MODE 0 GRATICULE SIZE 80 SPLIT EIGHTYTWENTY ZOOM SCROLL DIRECTION STOP LOCK 0 SPEED 1 ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE 1 SCROLLLOCK 1 CH1 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 0000 SCALE 5 ZOOM ZOOM1 CH1 VERTICAL POSTIONO 0000 SCALE 1 0000 Z0OM ZOOM1 CH2 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 0000 SCALE 5 Z0OM ZOOM1 CH2 VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 SCALE 1 0000 Z0OM ZOOM1 CH3 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 0000 SCALE 5 Z0OM ZOOM1 CH3 VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 SCALE 1 0000 ZOOM ZOOM1 CH4 HORIZONTAL
200. _Nr WFMOutpre lt Block gt is the waveform data in binary format The waveform is formatted as lt x gt lt yyy gt lt data gt lt newline gt where lt x gt is the number of y bytes For example if lt yyy gt 500 then lt x gt 3 lt yyy gt is the number of bytes to transfer If width is 1 then all bytes on the bus are single data points If width is 2 then all bytes on the bus are 2 byte pairs If width is 4 then all bytes on the bus are 4 byte pairs Use the WFMInpre BYT_Nr command to set the width lt data gt is the curve data lt newline gt is a single byte new line character at the end of the data lt asc curve gt is the waveform data in ASCII format The format for ASCII data is lt NR1 gt lt NRI1 gt where each lt NRI gt represents a data point CURVE with ASCII encoding start and stop of 1 and 10 respectively and a width set to 1 might return CURVE 61 62 61 60 60 59 59 58 58 59 NOTE Curve data is transferred from the instrument asynchronously and dependent upon the length of the curve record such transfers can require several seconds to complete During this time the instrument will not respond to user controls You can interrupt these asynchronous data transfers by sending a device clear message to the instrument or by interrupting the query with another command or query In order to verify that curve data has been completely transferred it is recommended that you follow such queries
201. a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either inside or outside the limits as specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit and SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit The polarity is selected using the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity command TRANS1i tion triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the channel waveform upper threshold level for a transition search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH 2 246 Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the math waveform upper threshold level for a transition search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies a preset TTL high
202. adecimal values and xx and yy are concatenated to form a single hexadecimal number For example u0413 is the Cyrillic capital letter GHE and 0413 is the Unicode value for that character English and European characters can also be specified using the u Unicode sequence In that case xx is simply 00 and yy is the hexadecimal equivalent of the 8 bit character value To specify Japanese characters use the 16 bit Japanese Interchange Standard JIS X 0208 1983 value JIS values are represented in a quoted string as jxxyy where xx and yy are both hexadecimal values and xx and yy are concatenated to form a single hexadecimal number Supported Unicode and JIS characters are shown in the CHARSETS directory of the disk which accompanies this manual First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 203 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MESSage STATE Group Syntax Related Commands MESSAGE SHOW Hello world displays Hello world in the upper left corner of the box you can define the box size with the MESSAGE BOX command MESSAGE SHOW Hello lt world lt hello displays Hello world hello in the upper left corner of the box and the word world is displayed in inverse video In this example a lt 4 stands for the escape character The escape character may appear differently for you depending on your controller program MESSAGE SHOW x09 x00 xa0 033 Hello world
203. age CLEAR MESSAGE CLEAR removes the message from the message box MESSage SHOW No Query Form 2 200 Group Syntax Arguments Clears the contents of the message window and displays the new message in the window Display MESSage SHOW lt QString gt lt QString gt is the message and can include any of the characters shown in the TDS Character Chart in Appendix A as well as characters from the Cyrillic Korean Japanese and Chinese character sets The maximum length of the message is 1000 characters longer strings are ignored The message area is the height and width you have set using the MESSage BOX command The length of the message that fits in the message area depends on the contents of the message because the width of characters varies If the message exceeds the limits of the message box either horizontally or vertically the portion of the message that exceeds the limits will not be displayed The message string itself is not altered The entire message can be returned as a query response regardless of what is displayed in the message box The message is left justified and is displayed on a single line starting with the top most line in the window A new line character can be embedded in the string to position the message on multiple lines You can also use white space and tab characters to position the message within a line Text which does not fit within the message box is truncated Defining a message box text
204. aging or enveloping the acquisition sequence is restarted and any accumulated data is discarded Also the instrument resets the number of acquisitions If the RUN argument is issued while in continuous mode a reset occurs and acquired data continues to acquire Sending this command is equivalent to pressing the front panel RUN STOP button Acquisition ACQui re STATE OFF ON RUN STOP lt NR1 gt ACQuire STATE ACQuire STOPA fter OFF stops acquisitions STOP stops acquisitions ON starts acquisitions RUN starts acquisitions NR1 0 stops acquisitions any other value starts acquisitions ACQUIRE STATE RUN starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets the count of the number of acquisitions ACQUIRE STATE might return ACQUIRE STATE O indicating that the acquisition is stopped This command sets or returns whether the instrument continually acquires acquisitions or acquires a single sequence This command is equivalent to pressing SINGLE from the front panel Acquisition ACQuire STOPAfter RUNSTop SEQuence ACQuire STOPAfter First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 55 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples ALlas Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ACQuire STATE RUNSTOp specifies that the instrument will continually acquire data if ACQuire STATE is turned on SEQuence specifi
205. al Returns how many marks are used Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and define math waveforms You can define and display up to four math waveforms simultaneously on four channel models and up to two on two channel models Use the available math functions to define your math waveform The math waveform you create depends on sources listed in the math expression If you change these sources the math waveforms you previously defined will be affected Math expressions can be simple containing no mathematical computation such as CH1 which specifies that a waveform shows the signal source of channel 1 Math expressions can also be complex consisting of 100 plus characters and comprising many sources functions and operands The acquisition of a live waveform can stop for several reasons You can turn off the channel stop the waveform via Run Stop from the Horiz Acq menu or stop the trigger via Run Stop from the Trig menu When you turn off the channel math continues and data is acquired but is not displayed When you stop either the waveform or the trigger the math calculation stops and the last math calculation performed is displayed First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups When a live waveform update or reference waveform is altered math waveforms containing those waveforms as sources are also updated to reflect the changes Also sources must
206. all waveforms but affects channel waveforms differently from other waveforms For channel waveforms this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition window as well as the display scale The range and resolution of scale values depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have specified For reference and math waveforms this setting controls the display only graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition hardware Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt SCAle lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt SCAle Related Commands CH lt x gt OFFSet CH lt x gt POSition REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle MATH 1 VERTical SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt is the vertical channel scale in units per division Examples CH4 SCALE 100E 03 sets the channel 4 scale to 100 mV per division CH2 SCALE might return CH2 SCALE 1 0000E 00 indicating that the current scale setting of channel 2 is 1 V per division First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 89 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt TERmination This command sets the connected disconnected status of a 50 Q resistor which may be connected between the specified channel s coupled input and instrument ground The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instruments There is also a corresponding query that request
207. ammer Manual 2 233 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments SEARCH SEARCH lt xX gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut REF lt x gt HIGH LOw x SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut REF lt x gt HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 234 Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the condition for generating a logic pattern search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIcC PATtern WHEn TRUe FALSe LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn TRUe argument sets the instrument to place a mark when the pattern becomes true FALSe argument sets the instrument to place a mark when the pattern becomes false LESSThan argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the specific pattern is true less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit command MOREThan argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the specific pattern is true longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command EQUal argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the specific pattern is true longer than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATte
208. and does not affect IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk these commands never return headers This command does make a corresponding change in the Response Header Enable State of the opposite interface physical or virtual GPIB interface Refer to Introduction for more information Group Miscellaneous Syntax HEADer OFF ON lt NR1 gt HEADer Related Commands HDR VERBose Arguments OFF sets the Response Header Enable State to false This causes the instrument to omit headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned ON sets the Response Header Enable State to true This causes the instrument to include headers on applicable query responses You can then use the query response as a command lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false any other value sets this state to true which causes the instrument to omit headers on query responses Examples HEADER OFF specifies that the instrument omits headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 143 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HEADER might return HEADER 1 indicating that the instrument is including headers on applicable query responses HORizontal Query Only This query only command returns all settings for the horizontal commands Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal Examples HORIZONTAL mig
209. ar to selecting A Event Main Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then selecting the desired Trigger Type Trigger TRIGger A TYPe EDGe LOGic PULSe SERial VIDeo TRIGger A TYPe TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss TRIGger A PULse CLAss EDGe is a normal trigger A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through a specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the TRIGger A EDGE commands LOGic specifies that a trigger occurs when specified conditions are met and is controlled by the TRIGger A LOGIc commands PULSe specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified pulse is found and is controlled by the TRIGger A PULse commands SERial specifies that a trigger occurs when a communications signal is found Supports AMI HDB3 B3ZS B6ZS B8ZS CMI MLT3 Manchester and NRZ encoded communications signals VIDeo specifies that the trigger occurs when a video signal is found First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A TYPE EDGE sets the A trigger type to EDGE TRIGGER A TYPE might return TRIGGER A TYPE PULSE indicating that the A trigger type is a pulse trigger TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets the upper threshold for the channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Used for the following trigger types runt
210. ase measurement This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu choosing the Time tab clicking the Delay button to display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Sourcel From setting NOTE If you do not specify a numerical suffix the source is assumed to be SOURCE 1 Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE 1 CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt REF lt x gt HIStogram MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE Related Commands MEASUrement MMed SOURCE2 Arguments CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models MATH lt y gt is a math waveform The y variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models REF lt X gt is a reference waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models HIStogram indicates histogram as the object to be measured Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE1 MATH1 specifies Math as the immediate measurement source MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE might return MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE1 CH3 indicating that channel 3 is the immediate measurement source MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 This command sets or returns the source to measure to for phase or delay immediate measurements This command is equivalent
211. ass of the Logic Trigger Used in conjunction with the TRIGger A TYPe command this command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern Logic State or Setup Hold Setup from the Trig menu This command is provided for backward compatibility with other Tektronix instruments Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC CLAss PATtern STATE SETHoOld TRIGger A LOGIC CLASS TRIGger A TYPe TRIGger A PULse CLAss First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PATtern sets the instrument to trigger when the specified logical combinations of channels 1 2 3 and 4 are met on four channel instruments On two channel instruments only channel and channel 2 are available STATE sets the instrument to trigger when the specified conditions of channels 1 2 and 3 are met after the channel 4 clock condition is met on four channel instruments On two channel instruments only channel 1 and channel 2 clock are available SETHO 1d sets the instrument to trigger on setup and hold violations between a data source and a clock source Use one channel input as the clock signal and a second channel input as the data input The clocking and data levels are used to determine if a clock or data transition has occurred TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS might return TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS PATTERN TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS PATTERN sets the trigger A logic class to PATtern which causes t
212. at Math is the immediate measurement source MEASUrement IMMed TYPe 2 170 Group Syntax This command sets or returns the immediate measurement type Measurement MEASUrement IMMed TYPe AMP1itude AREa BURSt CARea CMEan CRMs DELay DISTDUty EXTINCTDB EXTINCTPCT EXTINCTRATIO EYEHeight EYEwidth FALL FREQuency HIGH HITS LOW MAXi mum MEAN MEDi an MINImun NCROSS NDUty NOVershoot NWIdth PBASe First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PCROsSS PCTCROSS PDUty PEAKHits PERIod PHASe PK2Pk PKPKJitter PKPKNoise POVershoot PTOT PwIdth QFACtor RISe RMS RMSJitter PMSNoise SIGMA1 SIGMA2 SIGMA3 SIXSi gmajit SNRatio STDdev UNDEFINED WAVEFORMS MEASUrement IMMed TYPe Arguments AMP1itude measures the amplitude of the selected waveform In other words it measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude High Low AREa measures the voltage over time The area is over the entire waveform or gated region and is measured in volt seconds The area measured above the ground is positive while the area below ground is negative BURSt measures the duration of a burst The measurement is made over the entire waveform or gated region CARea cycle area measures the voltage over time In other words it measures in volt seconds the area over t
213. at data WFMINPRE BIT_NR might return WFMINPRE BIT_NR 8 indicating that incoming RI or RP binary format data uses 8 bits per waveform point This command sets or returns the format of binary data for incoming waveforms Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BN_Fmt RI RP WFMInpre BN_Fmt WFMOutpre BN_ Fmt RI specifies signed integer data point representation RP specifies positive integer data point representation WFMINPRE BN_FMT FP specifies that incoming data will be interpreted as single precision binary floating point numbers WFMINPRE BN_FMT might return WFMINPRE BN_FMT RI indicating that the incoming data is currently interpreted as signed integers This command sets or returns the binary field data width for the first ordered waveform as specified by the DATa DESTination command This specification is only meaningful when WFMInpre ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre BN_Fmt is set to either RI or RP Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BYT_Nr lt NR1 gt WFMInpre BYT_Nr First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 325 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre BYT_Or Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre ENCdg Group 2 326 DATa DESTination WFMInpre BN_ Fmt WFMInpre ENCdg WFMInpre BIT_Nr WFMOutpre BYT_Nr lt NR1 gt is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1 2 RI RP or 4 FP
214. at the B trigger time is set to 16 ns First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 319 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger B TYPe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the type of B trigger This command is equivalent to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and choosing Edge Trigger TRIGger B TYPe EDGE TRIGger B TYPe TRIGger A TY Pe EDGE sets the B trigger type to edge TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE sets the B trigger type to edge TRIGGER B TYPE might return TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments This command sets the upper threshold for the channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Used for the following trigger types runt slew rate Trigger TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts TRIGger STATE Query Only 2 320 This query only command returns the current state of the triggering system This command is equivalent to viewing the trigger status LEDs on the instrument front panel First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples
215. ates the oscilloscope is not due for calibration CALIBRATE FACTORY NOTIFY DUE might return 0 indicating that factory calibration is not due CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy HOURs Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns hours when calibration is due Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy HOURS INFInite lt NR1 gt CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy HOURS lt NR1 gt is the number of hours 500 to 10000 before the instrument displays a notifier saying that calibration is due Numbers entered are rounded to the nearest valid number INFInite disables the calibration due notifier display feature CALIBRATE FACTORY NOTLIFY HOURS 1500 sets the calibration notification time to 1500 hours CALIBRATE FACTORY NOTIFY HOURS might return CALIBRATE FACTORY NOTIFY HOURS 2000 indicating that the calibration due notifier will be displayed 2000 hours after the last calibration First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 73 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy YEARs Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the number of years when calibration is due Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy YEARS INFInite lt NR3 gt CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy YEARS lt NR3 gt is the number of years 0 5 to 5 before the instrument displays a notifier saying that calibration is due Numbers entered are rounded to the
216. ath horizontal display scale for FFT or for dual math waveforms that have source waveforms that are reference waveforms The horizontal scale of a dual math waveform with a channel source waveform is set through the HORizontal SCAle command Math MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt is the math horizontal scale in seconds MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE might return MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE 2 0E 4 indicating that the math horizontal scale is 200 m MATH 1 HORizontal UNITs Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the math waveform horizontal measurement unit value Math MATH 1 HORizontal UNITs lt QString gt MATH 1 HORizontal UNITS lt QString gt is a text label to apply to horizontal units when the horizontal unit is unknown unit value First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 159 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MATH HORIZONTAL UNITS might return MATH HORIZONTAL UNITS indicating that the math horizontal unit label for unknown values is the default question mark unit MATH 1 SPECTral MAG Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the units of the SpectralMag function in the math string The Math waveform is specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instruments If you are using the standard math this
217. aticule MATH 1 VERTical SCAle This command sets or returns the vertical scale of the specified math waveform This command is equivalent to selecting Position Scale from the Math menu and then entering a Vert Scale value or adjusting the front panel Vertical SCALE knob Each waveform has its own vertical scale parameter For a signal with constant amplitude increasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger Scale affects all waveforms For reference and math waveforms the scale setting controls the display only graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition hardware Be aware that autoscaling occurs when a math waveform is first defined and enabled or when a math string changes After the math waveform is computed for the first time the instrument determines the min max of that waveform data Then the instrument sets the math position so that min max 2 is in the center of the screen In addition the instrument sets the math scale so that the range of the min and max covers 6 divisions This autoscaling process can take up to 1 2 second to complete and will override any vertical scale or position commands for that math waveform received during this time You should insert an appropriate pause in your program after defining and enabling a math waveform before changing its position or scale Group Math Syntax MATH 1
218. auses the waveform to be displayed smaller Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 211 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REM No Query Form 2 212 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Scale affects all waveforms but affects reference and math waveforms differently from channel waveforms m For reference and math waveforms this setting controls the display only graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition hardware For channel waveforms this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition window as well as the display scale The range and resolution of scale values depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have specified Vertical REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle CH lt x gt SCAle MATH 1 VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt is the gain in user units per division REF4 VERTICAL SCALE 100E 03 sets the Reference 4 scale to 100 mV per division REF4 VERTICAL SCALE might return REF2 VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000e 00 indicating that the current vertical scale setting for Reference 2 is 1 V per division This command no query form embeds a comment within GPIB programs as a means of internally documenting the programs The instrument ignores these
219. aveform and expresses the result in percent This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 171 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 172 Extinction 100 0 x Low High EXTINCTRATIO measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform Extinction Ratio measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic High to the logic Low of an optical waveform and expresses the result without units This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode Extinction ratios greater than 100 or less than 1 generate errors low must be greater than or equal to 1 uW Extinction Ratio High Low EYEHeight measures the vertical opening of an eye diagram in volts EYEWidth measures the width of an eye diagram in seconds FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value default is 90 to a low reference value default is 10 FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Frequency is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second HIGH measures the High reference 100 level sometimes called Topline of a waveform You can also limit the High measurement normally
220. ay IPADDress Group Syntax Arguments Examples ETHERnet HTTPPort Group Syntax Arguments Examples ETHERnet IPADDress Group 2 126 This command sets or returns the remote interface gateway IP address Ethernet ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress lt QString gt ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress lt QString gt is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes ETHERNET GATEWAY IPADDRESS 128 143 16 1 sets the gateway IP address Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP port value Ethernet ETHERnet HTTPPort lt Qstring gt ETHERnet HTTPPort lt QString gt is an integer port number enclosed in quotes ETHERNET HTTPPORT 45 sets the HTTP port value to 45 Sets or returns the IP address assigned to the oscilloscope Ethernet First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples ETHERnet NAME Group Syntax Arguments Examples ETHERnet PASSWord Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ETHERnet IPADDress lt Qstring gt ETHERnet IPADDress lt QString gt is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes ETHERNET IPADDRESS 123 121 13 214 sets the oscilloscope s IP address Sets or returns the network name assigned to the oscilloscope Ethernet ETHERnet NAME lt QString gt ETHERnet NAME lt QString gt is the network name assigned to the os
221. ay measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 returns either RISE or FALL First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the maximum value found for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 8 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum MEASUREMENT MEAS3 MAXIMUM might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 MAXIMUM 4 18E 9 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the mean value accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 8 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt X gt MEAN MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MEAN might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MEAN 514 71E 09 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the minimum value found for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 8 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt X gt MINImum MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MINIMUM might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MINIMUM 1 75E 09 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2
222. bles the time base trigger delay mode HORIZONTAL MAIN DELAY STATE might return HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE 1 indicating that the time base trigger delay mode is currently enabled HORizontal MAlIn DELay TIMe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the time base trigger delay time This command is equivalent to selecting Position Scale from the Horiz Acq menu and choosing a value for Horiz Delay Horizontal HORizontal MAIn DELay TIMe lt NR3 gt HORi zontal MAIn DELay TIMe HORizontal MAIn DELay MODe lt NR3 gt specifies the time base trigger delay time setting typically represented in seconds HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME 5 0E 3 sets the time base trigger delay time to 5 ms HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME might return HORIZONTAL MAIN DELAY 5 0000E 05 indicating that the time delay setting is 5 us HORizontal MAIn POSition Query Only 2 146 This query only command always returns a horizontal position of 50 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Horizontal HOR1 zontal MAIn POSition HORizontal MAIn DELay MODe HORIZONTAL MAIN POSITION returns HORIZONTAL MAIN POSITION 5 0000E 01 indicating that the horizontal position of the waveform on the screen is currently set to 50 percent HORizontal MAIn S
223. ce 2 61 B BELI 2 62 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate 2 62 BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe 2 63 BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint 2 63 BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce 2 64 BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY FORMAt 2 64 BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY TYPe 2 65 BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 2 65 BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce 2 65 BUS B lt x gt POSition 2 66 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity 2 67 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce 2 67 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity 2 68 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce 2 68 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity 2 66 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 2 66 BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARIty 2 68 BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce 2 69 BUS B lt x gt STATE 2 69 BUS B lt x gt TYPE 2 70 BUS THReshold CH lt x gt 2 70 BUS 2 62 BUSY 2 70 C CAL 2 71 CAL 2 72 CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy DUE 2 73 CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy HOURs 2 73 CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy YEARs 2 74 CALibrate FACtory STATus 2 74 CALibrate FACtory STEPSTAtus 2 74 CALibrate FACtory STEPSTIMulus 2 75 CALibrate INTERNal STARt 2 76 CALibrate INTERNal STATus 2 76 CALibrate RESults FACtory Frequency 2 78 CALibrate RESults FACtory Trigger 2 78 CALibrate RESults FACtory Voltage 2 79 CALibrate RESults FACtory 2 78 CALibrate RESults SPC 2 79 CALibrate TEMP
224. character To ensure that this interpretation does not occur you can use double back slashes For example C testfile txt m Some FILESystem commands may fail because a file has read only attributes You will not be able to delete or replace such files until this attribute is removed Table 2 19 File System Commands Command Description FILESystem Returns the file system state FILESystem COPy Copies one or more files to a new file FILESystem CWD Sets or returns the current working directory for FILESystem GPIB commands FILESystem DELEte Deletes a named file or directory FILESystem DIR Returns a list of directory contents FILESystem FREESpace Returns the number of bytes of free space on the current drive FILESystem MKDir Makes a new directory FILESystem REName Assigns a new name to an existing file FILESystem RMDir Deletes the named directory Hard Copy Command Group Hard copy commands enable you to make hard copies First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 19 Command Groups Table 2 20 Hard Copy Commands Command Description HARDCopy Sends a screen copy to the selected port or returns the selected port and file path HARDCopy ACTI Veprinter Sets or returns the currently active printer HARDCopy INKSaver Changes hard copy output to print color traces and graticule on a white background HARDCopy LAYout Sets or returns th
225. cified channel CH lt x gt BANdwidth Sets or returns the bandwidth of the specified channel CH lt x gt COUPling Sets or returns the coupling setting for the specified channel CH lt x gt DESKew Sets or returns the deskew time for the specified channel CH lt x gt INVert Sets or returns the invert function for the specified channel CH lt x gt OFFSet Sets or returns the channel offset CH lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the channel vertical position CH lt x gt PRObe Returns the gain resistance units and ID of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero Executes the probe auto zero operation CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss Executes a probe degauss operation CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE Returns the probe degauss state CH lt x gt PRObe FORCERange CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN Returns the gain of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe ID Returns the type and serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 41 Command Groups 2 42 Table 2 28 Vertical Commands cont Command Description CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber Returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE Returns the type of probe that is attached to the specified chann
226. cified by the TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe command TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition This command sets or queries the trigger condition for SPI triggering Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 263 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition SS MISO MOSI MISOMOST TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition SS specifies the Slave Selection condition MISO specifies the Master In Slave Out condition MOST specifies the Master Out Slave In condition MISOMOST specifies the Master In Slave Out and Master Out Slave In conditions TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the binary data string to be used for SPI trigger if trigger condition is MISO MISOMOSI This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue lt bin gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue lt bin gt is the binary data string with the number of bits specified by the TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe command TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 264 This command sets or queries the binary data string used for the SPI trigger if the tri
227. cifies one input channel as the A edge trigger source EXT specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector located on the rear panel of the instrument LINE specifies AC line voltage TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the pulse width source TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the pulse width source TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn 2 292 This command sets or returns whether to trigger on a pulse width that falls outside or within the specified range of limits First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn TRIGger A PULse WIDth HIGHLimit TRIGger A PULse WIDth LOWLimit LESSthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command MOREthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width more than the time set by the TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command EQUal argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period equal to the time period specified in TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth within a 5 tolerance NOTEQual argume
228. cifies the minimum amount of time to hold the pattern true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the channel threshold level for an edge search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts ECL specifies a 1 3 V trigger level First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 235 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TTL specifies a 1 4 V trigger level SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold MATH Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the math waveform threshold level for edge search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold MATH ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold MATH ECL specifies a 1 3 V trigger level TTL specifies a 1 4 V trigger level SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the reference waveform threshold level for edge search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold REF lt x gt ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A L
229. cilloscope enclosed in quotes ETHERNET NAME labscope1 sets the oscilloscope s network name This command sets or returns the Ethernet access password Ethernet ETHERnet PASSWord lt old gt lt new gt ETHERnet PASSWord lt old gt is the current password enclosed in quotes If there is no current password enter a null character two quotes with no character between lt new gt is a new password enclosed in quotes ETHERNET PASSWORD karma2 ZEN53 replaces the current Ethernet password karma2 with the new password ZENS3 ETHERNET PASSWORD might return ETHERNET PASSWORD ZENS53 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 127 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ETHERnet SUBNETMask Group Syntax Arguments Examples EVENT Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples EVMsg Query Only Group Syntax 2 128 Sets or returns the remote interface subnet mask value Ethernet ETHERnet SUBNETMask lt QString gt ETHERnet SUBNETMask lt QString gt is the subnet mask value enclosed in quotes ETHERNET SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 sets the subnet mask value using standard IP address notation format This query only command returns an event code from the Event Queue that provides information about the results of the last ESR read EVENT also removes the returned value from the Event Queue Status
230. coming data is in ASCII format BIN specifies that the incoming data is in a binary format whose further interpretation requires knowledge of BYT_NR BIT_NR BN_FMT and BYT_OR WFMINPRE ENCDG ASC sets the format of incoming waveform data to ASCII format WFMINPRE ENCDG might return WFMINPRE ENCDG BIN indicating that the incoming waveform data is in binary format This command sets or returns the number of data points that are in the transmitted waveform record Waveform Transfer WFMInpre NR_Pt lt NR1 gt WFMInpre NR_Pt CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAVEform SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat WFMOutpre NR_Pt lt NR1 gt is the number of data points if WFMInpre PT_Fmt is set to Y It is the number of min max pairs if WFMInpre PT_Fmt is set to ENV WFMINPRE NR_PT 5000 specifies that 5000 data points will be transmitted WFMINPRE NR_PT might return WFMINPRE NR_PT 8000 indicating that there are 8000 data points in the transmitted waveform record First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 327 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMiInpre PT_Fmt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre PT_Off 2 328 This command sets or returns the point format of the incoming waveform data Regardless of the argument used the scale offset and so on are interpreted similarly When ENV is used waveform data is interpreted over the min max pair when
231. command is equivalent to selecting Magnitude Spectrum from the Math menu and then selecting the units that you want from the Scale button drop down menu If you are using the Advanced Analysis functions this command is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu choosing the Mag tab and then clicking the desired Scale button Math MATH 1 SPECTral MAG LINEAR DB MATH 1 SPECTral MAG LINEAR sets the SpectralMag units to linear DB sets the SpectralMag units to decibels MATH2 SPECTRAL MAG DB sets the SpectralMag units for Math to decibels MATH2 SPECTRAL MAG might return MATH2 SPECTRAL MAG DB indicating that the SpectralMag units for Math2 are set to decibels MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow 2 160 This command sets or returns the window function used to multiply the spectral analyzer input data for the specified math waveform The Math waveform is specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments A spectral window determines what the filter shape of the spectral analyzer will be in the frequency domain It can be described by a mathematical function that is multiplied point by point times the input data to the spectral analyzer This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu and choosing from the Window Type drop down list Following is a list of arguments that specify the window function used to multiply the spectral analyz
232. cont Command Description WFMInpre PT_Fmt Sets or returns the point format of incoming waveform data WFMInpre PT_Off Sets or returns the trigger point within the incoming waveform data WFMInpre WFld Provided to allow a waveform extracted from the instrument to be more easily sent back WFMInpre XINer Sets or returns the horizontal sampling interval between incoming waveform points WFMInpre XUNit Sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform WFMInpre XZEro Sets or returns the sub sample time between the trigger sample and the occurrence of the actual incoming waveform trigger WFMInpre YMUIt WFMInpre Y OFf Sets or returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the incoming waveform points Sets or returns the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels WFMInpre YUNit Sets or returns the vertical units of the incoming waveform WFMInpre YZEro WFMOutpre Sets or returns the offset of the incoming waveform Returns the waveform formatting data for the waveform specified by the DATA SOURCE command WFMOutpre BIT_Nr Sets or returns the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms contain WFMOutpre BN_Fmt Sets or returns the format of binary data for the waveform WFMOutpre BYT_Nr Sets or returns the data width for the waveform WFMOutpre BYT_Or Sets or returns the byte order
233. cope TYsetting ONEHundred or lt NR1 gt gt 1 sets the vectorscope display mode to 100 SEVENTYFive or lt NR1 gt lt 0 sets the vectorscope display mode to 75 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples DISplay XY MODe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISPLAY VECTORSCOPE TYSETTING might return DISPLAY VECTORSCOPE TY_SETTING 1 indicating that the vectorscope display mode is set to 100 Sets or returns the display mode This command is equivalent to setting XY Display in the DISPLAY menu Display DISplay XY MODe OFF TRIGger GATEDxyz VECtorscope DISplay XY MODe DISplay XY YCHannel DISplay XY YREF DISplay FORMat OFF sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the normal mode TRIGger displays the voltage of one waveform against the voltage of another The sources that make up an XY waveform are predefined and are listed in Table 2 10 Displaying one source causes its corresponding source to be displayed Table 2 33 XY format pairs X Axis source Y Axis source Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 Ref1 Ref2 Ref or Ref4 GATEDxyz displays XY signals only when the Z gating channel is true Gated XYZ is similar to analog oscilloscope modulated XYZ mode except that the displayed XY signal is either on or off there is no intensity modulation Gated XYZ is useful for showing constellat
234. cquired in SAMple or ENVelope mode uses eight bits per waveform data point Data acquired in AVERage mode uses up to 14 bits per point The instrument can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary format You specify the format with the DATa ENCdg command The instrument uses signed 4 byte integers and floating point values it does not support unsigned floating point values ASCII Data ASCII data is represented by signed integer or floating point values An example ASCII waveform data string may look like this CURVE lt space gt 110 109 110 110 109 107 109 107 106 105 103 100 97 90 84 80 Use ASCII to obtain more readable and easier to format output than binary However ASCII may require more bytes to send the same values than it does with binary This may reduce transmission speeds First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 43 Command Groups Waveform Data and Record Lengths Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation 2 44 Binary Data Binary data can be represented by signed integer or floating point values The range of the values depends on the byte width specified When the byte width is one signed integer data ranges from 128 to 127 and positive integer values range from 0 to 255 When the byte width is two the values range from 32768 to 32767 When a MATH or REF that came with a MATH is used 32 bit floating point values are used that are four byt
235. cquisition is complete Rather than remain idle while the operation is in process the instrument will continue processing other commands This means that some operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier operation A first operation must complete before the next one gets processed The instrument status and event reporting system provides ways to do this For example a typical application might involve acquiring a single sequence waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform You could use the following command sequence to do this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS1 VALUE The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time It may not finish before the instrument takes an amplitude measurement see the following figure This can result in an incorrect amplitude value ACQUIRE STATE ON Acquiring Waveform Data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE Processing Time Figure 3 7 Command Processing Without Using Synchronization To ensure the instrument comple
236. cting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu selecting the A B Seq tab choosing Trig on nth event and setting the desired Trig Event value Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B LEVel Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt lt NR1 gt TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TRIGger B EVENTS lt NR1 gt is the number of B trigger events which can range from 1 to 10 000 000 TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 4 specifies that the B trigger will occur four trigger events after the A trigger TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT might return TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 2 indicating that two events must occur after the A trigger before the B trigger can occur This command sets or returns the level for the B trigger This command is equivalent to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu selecting the A B Seq tab and setting the B Trig Level voltage Trigger TRIGger B LEVel ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger B LEVel TRIGger A LEVel TRIGger B TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce ECL specifies a preset ECL level of 1 3 V TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the B trigger level in volts TRIGGER B LEVEL ECL sets the B trigger level to 1 3 V TRIGGER B LEVEL might return TRIGGER B LEVEL 173 0000E 03 indicating that
237. d Commands Examples On four channel instruments this query only command returns the A logic trigger input expected for channel 1 2 and 3 Channel 4 is set or queried with the command TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH4 On two channel instruments this query returns the A logic trigger input expected for channel 1 Channel 2 is set or queried with the command TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern IN Put CH2 This command is equivalent to selecting A Event Main Trigger Setup and viewing or setting the Input Threshold for channel through 3 for four channel instruments or channel 1 for two channel instruments Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH4 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH2 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 HIGH CH2 X CH3 X indicating that a logic high is expected on channel 1 while channel 2 and channel three are don t care TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt 2 272 This command sets or returns the A logical input for the logic trigger channel specified by x The value of x ranges from 1 through 3 for four channel instruments For two channel instruments x can only be 1 Note that CH4 on four channel instruments or CH2 on two channel instruments cannot be set or queried with this command For details about setting this channel see TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH4 or TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH2 This command is equivalent to selecting A Event Main Trigg
238. d specifies an overload frame SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the CAN addressing mode to standard or extended format This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard ExXTended SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard specifies an 11 bit identifier field EXTended specifies a 29 bit identifier field SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN Dentifier ADDRess VALue Conditions 2 222 This command sets or queries the binary address string to be used for CAN search if search condition is ID or IDANDDATA This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt bin gt is the address in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the I2C address mode to 7 or 10 Bit This co
239. d waveform Vertical SELect MATH 1 0N OFF lt NR1 gt SELect MATH 1 ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT MATH ON turns the math waveform display on and selects it SELECT MATH might return SELECT MATH 1 indicating that the math waveform is being displayed First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 249 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SELect REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples SET Query Only 2 250 Group Syntax Related Commands This command turns on the display of a specified reference waveform and also resets the acquisition The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Vertical SELect REF lt x gt ON OFF lt NR1 gt SELect REF lt x gt ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT REF2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on and selects reference waveform 2 SEL
240. dd the following source files provided by National Instruments to the project m decl 32 h gpib 32 0bj 1 Add the appropriate program main source file to the project see Overview for a list of the three source files 2 Build and test the project 3 To build another of the example projects repeat steps 4 through 8 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 4 3 Programming Examples First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 4 4 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix A Character Set B5 rs BITS NUMBERS B4 B3 B2 B1 CONTROL SYMBOLS 40 Lao 60 LA16 SP 0 B7 B6 0 20 0000 NUL DLE 0 o 10 16 20 32 30 48 1 GTL 21 LLO 41 LA1 61 LA17 0001 SOH DCI 1 1 1 4 17 21 33 31 49 2 22 42 LA2 62 LA18 0010 STX DC2 2 2 2 12 18 22 34 32 50 3 23 43 LA3 63 LA19 0011 ETX DC3 3 3 3 13 19 23 35 33 51 4 spc 24 DCL 44 LA4 64 LA20 0100 EOT DC4 4 4 4 14 20 24 36 34 52 5 PPC 25 PPU 45 Las 65 LA21 0101 ENQ NAK 5 5 5 15 a1 25 37 35 53 6 26 46 LA6 66 LA22 0110 ACK SYN amp 6 6 6 16 22 26 38 36 54 7 27 47 LA7 67 LA23 014141 BEL ETB 7 7 7 17 23 27 39 37 55 10 GET 30 SPE 50 Las 70 LA24 1000 BS CAN 8 8 8 18 24 28 40 38 56 11 TCT 31 SPD 51 Lag 71 LA25 1001 HT EM 9 9 9 19 25 29 4 39 57 12 32 52 Lato 72 LA26 1010 LF SUB A 10 1A 26 2A 42 3A 58 13 33 53
241. ds DISplay XY MODe DISplay X Y YCHannel Arguments REF2 REF3 and REF4 specify the reference displayed with REF 1 in Triggered XY Display mode First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 122 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OFF set the Y reference to off which turns off or prevents the REF1 versus REF lt x gt waveform from being displayed in Triggered XY or prevents it from coming on if Triggered XY is turned on later Examples DISPLAY XY YREF REF2 sets REF2 to be displayed with REF1 in Triggered XY mode EGE This command sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register ESER The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register STB For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers see Registers Group Status and Error Syntax ESE lt NR1 gt ESE Related Commands CLS DESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB Arguments lt NR1 gt specifies the binary bits of the ESER according to this value which ranges from 0 through 255 The power on default for the ESER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the ESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle NOTE Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same values allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the DESE command to set the DESER Examples ESE 209 sets the
242. ds Listed in Alphabetical Order DIAg SELect ALL No Query Form Group Syntax Examples This command no query form selects all available diagnostics This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then choosing ALL from the Subsystem Area and Test pull down lists Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg SELect ALL DIAG SELECT ALL selects all available diagnostics DIAg SELect lt function gt No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the oscilloscope to run diagnostics on the specified system function Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg SELect lt function gt lt function gt specifies a single oscilloscope function on which to run diagnostics Valid values are ACQ test the acquisition system APPKey tests the application keys CPU tests the CPU DISp lay tests the display FPAnel tests the front panel controls IO tests the IO ports ROM tests the system read only memory DIAG SELECT CPU sets the oscilloscope to run just CPU tests DIAg STATE No Query Form This command no query form changes the oscilloscope operating state Depending on the argument diagnostics capabilities are either turned on or off First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 111 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DiSplay Query Only 2 112 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Group Syntax Examples Th
243. dule Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess VALue lt NR3 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C ADDRess VALue lt NR3 gt is up to 7 or 10 bits depending on the address mode that specifies the address TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C ADDRESS VALUE 1011 sets the I2C address value to 1011 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition Conditions Group This command sets or returns the trigger condition for I2C trigger This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 261 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I12C CONDition STARt STOP REPEATStart ACKMISS ADDRess DATA ADDRANDDATA TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C CONDition STARt specifies a search based on start condition STOP specifies a search based on stop condition REPEATStart specifies a search based on repeat of start condition ACKMISS specifies a search based on missing acknowledgement condition ADDRess specifies a search based on address DATA specifies a search based on data ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on address and data TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C CONDITION START specifies start as the I2C trigger condition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DiRection Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 262 This command sets or queries the I2C trigger condition valid on a READ WRITE
244. e DELEte DELTa DELTatime DELay DELete DESE DESKew DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual DESTination DHCPbootp DIAg DIR DIREction DIRection DISPLAY DISplay DNS DOMAINname bDOTsonly DUE EDGE ENCdg END ENET ETHERnet EVENT EVENTS EVMsg EVQty FACtor FACtory FASTAcq FIELD FILEFormat FILESystem FLAg FOCUS FORCERange FORMAt FORMat FPANEL FRAMEtype FREE FREESpace FUNCtion Frequency GAIN GATEWay GATing GPIBUsb GRAticule HARDCopy HBArs HDR HDtv HEADer HIGH HIGHLimit HOLDTime HOLDof f HORZ HORizontal HORizontal HOURS HPOS HTTPPort HwVersion I2C ID IDentifier IMAGe IMMed IN INCRement INDICators INKSaver INPut INTENSITy INTERNal INVert TPADDress LANGuage LAYout LESSLimit LEVel LINE LIST LOCk LOG LOGIC LOOP LOW LOWLimit LOWerthreshold MAG MAIn B 1 Appendix B Reserved Words MAIN MARK MARKSINCOLumn MATH MATHVAR MAXSamplerate MAXi mum MEAN MEAS MEASUrement MESSage METHod MID MID2 MINImum MISO MKDir MODE MODe MORELimit MOSI NAME NEWpass NOTIfy NR_Pt NTIMes NUMACq NUMAVg NUMEnv NUMHORZ NUMVERT OFFSet OPTion OUT OWNer PASSWord PATtern PERCent PERSistence PICture POLARity POLarity POSITION POSition B 2 PRESS PREVIEW PREViewstate PRINTer PRObe PT_Fmt PT_ORder PT_Off PULSEWIDth PULSEWidth PULSe QUALifier RECA 1 RECOrdlength REF REFLevel REM REName RESOlution RESUIt RESistance RESults RISEFal 1
245. e Output Queue 3 Notused 2 Notused 1 0 Notused Enable Registers DESER ESER and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a Status Register the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue and can prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it controls In order for an event to be reported to a bit in the Status Register the corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one If the bit in the Enable Register is set to zero the event is not recorded Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers The Enable Registers and the commands used to set them are described below The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER This register controls which types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue The bits in the DESER correspond to those in the SESR Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER Use the DESE query to read the DESER 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Figure 3 3 The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The Event Status Enable Register ESER This register controls which types of events are summarized by the Event Status Bit ESB in the SBR Use the ESE command to set the bits in the E
246. e RMS RMSJitter PMSNOise SIGMA1 SIGMA2 SIGMA3 SIXSigmajit SNRatio STDdev UNDEFINED WAVEFORMS MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Arguments AMP1itude measures the amplitude of the selected waveform In other words it measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude High Low AREa measures the voltage over time The area is over the entire waveform or gated region and is measured in volt seconds The area measured above the ground is positive while the area below ground is negative BURSt measures the duration of a burst The measurement is made over the entire waveform or gated region CARea cycle area measures the voltage over time In other words it measures in volt seconds the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region The area measured above the common reference point is positive while the area below the common reference point is negative CMEan cycle mean measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region CRMs cycle rms measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region DELay measures the time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude point of the source waveform and the destination waveform DISTDUty duty cycle distortion measures the time between the falling edge and the rising edge
247. e in Hertz Query Only This query only command returns the sub sample time between the trigger sample designated by PT OFF and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command This value is in units of WFMOutpre XUNit An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on NOTE During i e ACQuire STATE OFF this is the only preamble that changes on each acquisition If a query is run during steady state operation that is all control changes have settled and triggers are arriving on a regular basis the XZEro value of the last stopped state is returned Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre XZEro DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre XUNit WFMOUTPRE XZERO might return WFMOUTPRE XZERO 5 6300E 9 indicating that the trigger actually occurred 5 63 ns before the trigger sample First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 341 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre YMUIt Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level in units specified by WFMOutpre YUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command For those formats in which WFMOutpre BYT_Nr is important all non floating point formats WFMOutpre YMUIt must take the location of the binary point implied by BYT_NR into consideration An error is generated if the wa
248. e integer data point representation WFMOUTPRE BN_FMT FP specifies that outgoing waveform data will be in single precision binary floating point format WFMOUTPRE BN_FMT might return WFMOUTPRE BN_FMT RI indicating that the outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer format This command sets or returns the binary field data width for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command Note that values will be constrained according to the underlying waveform data This specification is only meaningful when WFMOutpre ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMOutpre BN_Fmt is set to either RI or RP An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre BYT_Nr lt NR1 gt wFMOutpre BYT_Nr DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BN_ Fmt WFMOutpre ENCdg lt NR1 gt is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1 2 4 or 8 A value of 1 or 2 bytes per waveform point indicates channel data 4 bytes per waveform point indicate math data 8 bytes per waveform point indicate pixel map DPO data WFMOUTPRE BYT_NR 1 sets the number of bytes per outgoing waveform data point to 1 which is the default setting WFMOUTPRE BYT_NR might return WFMOUTPRE BYT_NR 2 indicating that there are 2 bytes per outgoing waveform data point This command sets or returns which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first during a waveform data transfer when data points require more than one byte This specificati
249. e number of bytes per data point using WFMOutpre BYT_Nr NOTE MATH waveforms and REF waveforms that came from a MATH are always set to four bytes 4 Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using DATa STARt and DATa STOP 5 Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMOutpre 6 Transfer waveform data from the instrument using CURVe Transferring Waveform Specify waveform reference memory using DATa DESTination Data to the Instrument Set WFMInpre NR_ Pt to equal the number of data points to be sent Specify the waveform data format using WFMInpre ENCdg Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMInpre BYT_Nr Specify first data point in the waveform record using DATa STARt Se Se SS Ss Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMInpre NOTE FastAcq waveforms cannot be returned to the instrument via the CURVe command First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 45 Command Groups 2 46 Table 2 29 Waveform Transfer Commands Command Description CURVe The command format transfers waveform data to the instrument reference memory location specified by DATa DESTination The query format transfers waveform data from instrument specified by the DATa SOUrce command DATa Sets the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe Command Or returns the format and location of the wav
250. e page orientation for hard copy HARDCopy PREVIEW Previews the current screen contents with the InkSaver palette applied HARDCopy PRINTer ADD Adds a network printer to the list of available printers HARDCopy PRINTer DELete Removes a network printer from the list of available printers HARDCopy PRINTer LIST Returns the list of currently attached printers HARDCopy PRINTer REName Renames a network printer on the list of available printers Horizontal Command Group 2 20 Horizontal commands control the time bases of the instrument You can set the time per division or time per point of the main time base You can use the Horizontal commands to do the following Set the scale horizontal position and reference and units of the time base m Get the screen resolution time of first point and time of last point or get all the horizontal settings m Enable or disable the display of the time base You may substitute SECdiv for SCAle in the horizontal commands This provides program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix instruments Table 2 21 Horizontal Commands Command Description HORizontal Returns all learnable settings for the horizontal commands HORizontal ACQLENGTH Returns the record length HORizontal MAIn Returns the time per division of the time base HORizontal MAIn DELay MODe Sets or returns the main time base trigger delay mode HORizontal MAIn DELay STATe
251. e signal period expressed as a percentage It is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Positive Duty Cycle Positive Width Period x 100 PEAKHits measures the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram PERIOd is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated region Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds PHASe measures the phase difference amount of time a waveform leads or lags the reference waveform between two waveforms The measurement is made between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in degrees where 360 represents one waveform cycle PK2Pk peak to peak finds the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement METHod command the PK2Pk measurement measures the histogram peak to peak difference PKPKJitter measures the variance minimum and maximum values in the time locations of the cross point First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 173 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 174 PKPKNoi se measures the peak to peak noise on a waveform at the mid reference level POVershoot The positive overshoot amplitude measurement finds the positive overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region Positive Overshoot Maximum High Amplitude x 100 P
252. e state VERBOSE might return VERBOSE 0 indicating that the Verbose state is disabled The WAI Wait command no query form prevents the instrument from executing further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application program For more information refer to Synchronization Methods Status and Error WAT BUSY OPC WAT prevents the instrument from executing any further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete WAVFrm Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands This query only command returns WFMOutpre and CURVe data for the waveform as specified by the DATA SOUrce command This command is equivalent to sending both WFMOutpre and CURVe with the additional provision that the response to WAVFrm is guaranteed to provide a synchronized preamble and curve Waveform Transfer WAVF rm CURVe DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 323 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples WAVFRM might return the waveform data as WFMOUTPRE BIT_NR 8 BN_FMT RI BYT_NR 1 BYT_OR MSB ENCDG ASC NR_PT 500 PT_FMT Y PT_ORDER LINEAR PT_OFF 0 XINCR 400 0000E 12 XZERO 0 0000 XUNIT S YMULT 4 0000E 3 YOFF 0 0000 YZERO 0 0000 YUNIT V WFID Ch1 DC coupling 100 0m
253. e transmit signal DIFFerential specifies a differential signal BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint Conditions This command sets or returns the sample point in to sample during each bit period This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 63 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint lt NR3 gt BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint Arguments lt NR3 gt is the sample point in percent BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce This command sets or returns the CAN data source Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Group Trigger Syntax BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce Arguments CH lt x gt is the channel to use as the data source BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY FORMAt Sets the display format for the numerical information in the bus waveform Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger Syntax BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY FORMAt BINary HEXadecimal BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY FORMAt Arguments BINary specifies a binary data display HEXadecimal specifies a hexadecimal data display First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 64 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY TYPe Sets the display type for the bus The bus ca
254. e trigger FPANEL PRESS Duplicates the action of pressing a specified front panel button FPANEL TURN Duplicates the action of turning a specified front panel control knob GPIBUsb ADDress Returns the GPIB USB address GPIBUsb HWVersion Sets or returns the GPIB USB hardware version GPIBUsb ID Sets or returns the GPIB USB ID GPIBUsb SETADDress GPIBUsb SETID GPIBUsb STATUS HDR Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State HEADer Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State ID Returns identifying information about the instrument and its firmware IDN Returns the instrument identification code LANGuage Sets or returns the user interface display languag LANGuage INCRement Changes the oscilloscope display language to the next language in the sequence LOCk Sets or returns the front panel lock state LRN Returns a listing of instrument settings NEWpass Changes the password for user protected data REM Specifies a comment which is ignored by the instrument SET Returns a listing of instrument settings STArtuptime Returns the time that the oscilloscope was last powered on TEKSecure Initializes both waveform and setup memories First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 27 Command Groups Table 2 24 Miscellaneous Commands cont Command Description TIME Sets or returns the time displayed by the instrument TOTaluptime
255. easurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions is 100 where 0 is 2 5 divisions and 100 is 2 5 divisions from the center horizontal graticule CURSOR HBARS USE FIVEDIVS sets the H Bar measurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions equals 100 This command sets or returns whether the two cursors move together in unison or separately This command is the equivalent of selecting Cursor Mode from the Cursors menu and then choosing from the drop down list Cursor CURSor MODe TRACk INDependent CURSor MODe TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together For cursor 1 adjustments this ties the movement of the two cursors together however cursor 2 continues to move independently of cursor 1 INDependent allows independent adjustment of the two cursors CURSOR MODE TRACK specifies that the cursor positions move in unison CURSOR MODE might return CURSOR MODE TRACK indicating that the two cursors move in unison CURSor VBArs Query Only Group Syntax This command returns the current settings for the vertical bar cursors Cursor CURSor VBArs First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 95 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Examples DATa STARt DATa STOP CURSOR VBARS might return the following vertical bar settings CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITION1 1 0000E 06 POSITION2 9 0000E 06 CURSor VBArs DEL
256. ece cece een enn E EE ene enn E ene 2 3 Command Enty ossidi eniin araea E OE AE NE ENNA EENET 2 4 Constructed Mnemonies s scccscnisseans ee pensudareeenaiainaeun tea T E E wa lenecmin wiegsinte date Sea inetsigmeten eels 2 6 Argument TypeSiiiacsesiescotstae becetdevianccatbissacecsde bed sansa conta OEE EER E 2 7 Command Groups ssicscdisccasddasciadscannchod pani dius inmawacadub biden EAN EE E E ENEE a 2 11 Acquisition Command Group 0 cece cece cece resres e eee ee eee eee eee nee eee e nee en eee ne eae 2 11 Alias Command Group sv i233 irme ed C dnaes cotegtenen se enes cane duaeees sage cad EEE OE EE 2 12 Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group 0cccccee cece eee e eee eee n eens ene ene een eees 2 13 Cursor Command Group cc ccc Anai E een nnn n enn nnn Ene EEE nen EE EEE Ea 2 14 Display Command Group cc cece eee enn nen n nnn enn a eae EEE Sean EEE ES 2 16 Ethernet Command Group iss cic ecse n cred ededoomansseeuale anddudegersnsae cbeideeibhentsnwees 2 18 File System Command Group eccc cece ence een cence ence nee ne ene ene eee EEE eee EES 2 18 Hard Copy Command Group cc ccc ecc ence eee nee een n ene e ene eee ene eee nee teen ene es 2 19 Horizontal Command Group cc cece cence eee ene ene n nee ene eee EEE Etat EEE ES 2 20 Mark Command Group ccsssedsnceees bvten rte ds sete scanes deena E diese sdaeadrensceebe teesarenene ed 2 21 Math Command Group s iiesicsscnssesen
257. ecifies the TTL high level lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 might return TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 1 3000E 00 indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1 3 V for channel 2 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH3 TTL sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level for channel 3 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 269 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIc Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns all of the A logic trigger parameters This command is provided for backward compatibility with other Tektronix instruments Trigger TRIGger A LOGICc TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss TRIGGER A LOGIC might return TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS PATTERN FUNCTION AND WHEN TRUE THRESHOLD CH1 1 4000 CH2 1 4000 CH3 1 4000 CH4 1 4000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 HIGH CH2 X CH3 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 5 Q000E 9 MORELIMIT 5 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 1 4000 SOURCE CH2 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 1 4000 SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD HOLDTIME2 OOOOE 9 SETTIME 3 Q0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC STATE INPUT CH4 RISE gt TRIGGER A LOGIC STATE WHEN TRUE TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss 2 270 Group Syntax Related Commands This command sets or returns the cl
258. ectory creates the directory named NewDirectory at the root of the C drive These two commands create the directory MyNewSubDirectory within the existing directory MyDirectory at the root of the C drive FILESYSTEM CwD C MyDi rectory FILESYSTEM MKDIR MyNewSubDi rectory This of course assumes that C MyDirectory already existed and was not a read only directory FILESystem REName No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command no query form assigns a new name to an existing file File System FILESystem REName lt old file path gt lt new file path gt FILESystem C WD lt old file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name lt new file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name FILESYSTEM RENAME C TEKOOOOO SET C MYSETTING SET gives the file named TEK00000 SET the new name of MYSETTING SET The file remains in the root directory on the C drive FILESystem RMDir No Query Form Group Syntax This command no query form deletes a named directory The directory cannot contain any files If there are files in the directory they must first be deleted The directory must not be a read only directory File System FILESystem RMDir lt
259. ed from lt NR1 gt to DATa STOP or the record length whichever is less If lt NR1 gt is greater than the record length the last data point in the record is transferred DATa STARt and DATa STOP are order independent When DATa STOP is greater than DATa STARt the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE query Examples DATA START might return DATA START 214 indicating that data point 214 is the first waveform data point that will be transferred DATA START 10 specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10 DATa STOP This command sets or returns the last data point that will be transferred when using the CURVe query This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to the controller Changes to the record length value are not automatically reflected in the data stop value As record length is varied the data stop value must be explicitly changed to ensure the entire record is transmitted In other words curve results will not automatically and correctly reflect increases in record length if the distance from data start to data stop stays smaller than the increased record length NOTE When using the CURVe command DATa STOP is ignored and WFMInpre NR_ Pt is used First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 105 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATE 2 106 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Group Syn
260. ed topics listed below describe the syntax of these commands and queries The topics also describe the conventions that the instrument uses to process them See the Command Groups topic in the table of contents for a listing of the commands by command group or use the index to locate a specific command Backus Naur Form This documentation describes the commands and queries using Backus Naur Notation Form BNF notation Refer to the following table for the symbols that are used Table 2 1 Symbols for Backus Naur Form Symbol Meaning lt gt Defined element l Is defined as Exclusive OR Group one element is required Optional can be omitted Previous element s may be repeated Comment Command and Query Structure Commands consist of set commands and query commands usually called commands and queries Commands modify instrument settings or tell the instrument to perform a specific action Queries cause the instrument to return data and status information Most commands have both a set form and a query form The query form of the command differs from the set form by its question mark on the end For example the set command ACQui re MODe has a query form ACQuire MODe Not all commands have both a set and a query form Some commands have set only and some have query only Messages A command message is a command or query name followed by any information the instrument needs to execute the comma
261. eferred to as the physical GPIB interface your instrument is provided with a ZekVISA GPIB compatible interface referred to as the virtual GPIB interface This is a software Application Programming Interface API which enables you to communicate with the instrument in a variety of ways including via the internet With the following two exceptions these interfaces are completely independent HEADER Command headers enabled or disabled on one interface are correspondingly enabled or disabled on the other interface Refer to the command descriptions for more detailed information VERBOSE Verbosity enabled or disabled on one interface is correspondingly enabled or disabled on the other interface Refer to the command description for more detailed information Refer to Documentation for information on related manuals and documents The programmer guide is divided into the following major topics Getting Started This topic introduces you to the online help and provides basic information about setting up your instrument for remote control Command Syntax This topic provides an overview of the command syntax that you will use to communicate with the instrument and other general information about commands such as how commands and queries are constructed how to enter commands constructed mnemonics and argument types Command Groups This topic contains all the commands listed in functional groups Each group consists of an over
262. eform data that is transferred with the CURVe command DATa DESTination Sets or returns the reference memory location for storing waveform data sent to the instrument DATa ENCdg Sets or returns the format of outgoing waveform data DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the location of waveform data transferred from the instrument DATa STARt Sets or returns the starting point in waveform transfer DATa STOP Sets or returns the ending data point in waveform transfer WAVFrm Returns a branch query containing waveform data in either binary or ASCII format waveform formatting data and the location of the waveform data source WFMInpre Returns the waveform formatting specification to be applied to the next incoming CURVE command data WFMInpre BIT_Nr Sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point WFMInpre BN_Fmt Sets or returns the format of binary data for the incoming waveform WFMInpre BYT_Nr Sets or returns the binary field data width for the first ordered waveform WFMInpre BYT_Or Sets or returns the byte order of waveform points WFMInpre ENCdg Sets or returns the type of encoding for incoming waveform data WFMInpre NR_Pt Sets or returns the number of points in the transmitted waveform record First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 29 Waveform Transfer Commands
263. either positive or negative polarity TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the transition polarity to negative First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY EITHER indicating that the polarity can be either positive or negative TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the source for transition trigger Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1l SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 SoUrce CH lt x gt specifies one of the input channels which range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments and through 2 for two channel instruments TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the transition trigger TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A transition trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns whether to check for a transitioning signal that is faster or slower than the specified delta time Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 wHEn SLOwer FASTer EQual UNEQua TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 wHEn FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is
264. el CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance Returns the resistance of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts Returns the units of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale of the specified channel CH lt x gt TERmination Sets channel input termination CH lt x gt YUNits Sets or returns vertical units Returns digital channel parameters Sets or returns the digital channel vertical position Sets or returns the threshold for the digital channel REF lt x gt DATE Returns the date that a reference waveform was stored REF lt x gt HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the horizontal position of the specified reference waveform in percent of the waveform that is displayed to the right of the center vertical graticule REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal scale for a reference waveform REF lt x gt TIMe Returns the time that a reference waveform was stored REF lt x gt VERTical POSition Sets or returns the vertical position of the specified reference waveform REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle Sets or returns the reference waveform vertical scale in vertical units div SELect Returns information on which waveforms are on or off and which waveform is selected SELect BUS lt x gt Turns on the specified bus wa
265. ent Getting Started with OpenChoice Solutions Manual A book that explores some options for getting data from your instrument into any one of several available analysis tools DP04000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Specifications and Performance Verification Instrument specifications and a performance verification procedure is available as a printable PDF file on the DPO4000 Series Product Software CD ROM TekVISA Programmer Manual This manual is available as a printable PDF file on the DPO4000 Series Product Software CD ROM The manual describes TekVISA the Tektronix implementation of the VISA Application Programming Interface API TekVISA is industry compliant software for writing interoperable instrument drivers in a variety of Application Development Environments ADEs DP0O4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Service Manual A printed service manual is available as an optional accessory The service manual includes procedures to service the instrument to module levels This manual is also available as a printable PDF file on the DPO4000 Series Product Software CD ROM First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 1 3 Getting Started First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 1 4 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax You can control the operations and functions of the instrument through the GPIB interface using commands and queries The relat
266. ent error no statistics available 2241 Waveform request is invalid First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 cont Code Message 2243 2244 This measurement cannot be performed on this type of waveform Source waveform is not active 2248 This ref cannot be activated 2249 Reference deletion error Waveform in use for math 2250 Reference error Waveform reference file is invalid 2251 Reference error Waveform preamble does not match actual 2252 Reference error Source waveform is not valid 2253 Reference error Too many points received 2254 Reference error Too few points received 2259 File too big 2261 Calibration error wait for the warmup interval to expire before invoking SPC 2400 Not enough memory available 2401 This channel cannot be activated 2402 Math Meas Histo have circular definition 2410 Empty math string 2411 Syntax error in math string 2412 Semantic error in math string 2413 Math expression is too complex 2420 Histogram cannot be performed on this type of waveform Device Error The following table lists the device errors that can occur during instrument operation These errors may indicate that the instrument needs repair Table 3 6 Device Error Messages DDE Bit 3
267. ents The gain of a probe is the output divided by the input transfer ratio For example a common 10x probe has a gain of 0 1 Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN Related Commands CH lt x gt SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt is the probe gain Allowed values depend on the specific probe Examples CH2 PROBE GAIN might return CH2 PROBE GAIN 0 1000E 00 indicating that the attached 10x probe delivers 0 1 V to the channel 2 BNC for every 10 V applied to the probe input First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 86 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt PRObe ID Query Only This query only command returns the type and serial of the probe that is attached to the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe ID Examples CH2 PROBE ID might return CH2 PROBE ID TYPE 10X SERNUMBER N A indicating that a passive 10x probe of unknown serial number is attached to channel 2 CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber Query Only This query only command returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments
268. er Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order logical input from the Ch lt x gt drop down list which is located in the Input Threshold group box Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt HIGH LOW X TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH4 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH2 HIGH specifies the logic high LOW specifies the logic low X specifies a don t care state TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH lt x gt might return TRIGGER LOGIC INPUT CH1 X indicating that the setting for the A logic trigger input to channel 1 does not matter TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH lt x gt HIGH sets the A logic trigger input to logic HIGH for channel 2 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Group Syntax Arguments Sets the polarity of the clock channel Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCK EDGE RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns channel to use as the clock source The Clock can be selected as NONE A selection of none implies pattern trigger Any other selection implies state trigger First
269. er input data The windows are listed in the order of their ability to resolve frequencies resolution bandwidth For additional information First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples MATH 1 TYPe Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order about spectral windows see Selecting a Spectral Window in the online help for this instrument Math MATH 1 SPECTral wINdow RECTangular HAMming HANning BLAckmanharris MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow RECTangular window function is equivalent to multiplying all gate data by one HAMming window function is based on a cosine series HANning window function is based on a cosine series BLAckmanharris window function is based on a cosine series MATH2 SPECTRAL WINDOW HANNING applies a Hanning window to the spectral analyzer input data MATH2 SPECTRAL WINDOW might return MATH2 SPECTRAL WINDOW HAMMING indicating that the window function used to multiply the spectral analyzer input data is the Hamming window Sets or returns the math waveform mode type Math MATH 1 TYPe ADVanced DUAL FFT MATH 1 TYPe ADVanced sets the math waveform mode to advanced math TDS3AAM only DUAL sets the math waveform mode to dual waveform math FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT math TDS3AAM TDS3FFT only MATH TYPE FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT Fir
270. er limit for the A pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULse WIDth LEVel Sets or returns the threshold for the pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULse WIDth LOWLimit Sets or returns the lower limit for the A pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULse WIDth POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULse WIDth SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULse WIDth WHEn Sets or returns the criteria for width specification of pulse width trigger events TRIGger A PULse WIDth WIDth Sets or returns the width setting for the pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 27 Trigger Commands cont Command Groups Command Description TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Sets or returns the criteria for width specification of pulse width trigger events TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth Sets or returns the width setting for the pulse width trigger TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn Sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it uncovers a
271. er of waveform acquisitions that have occurred since starting acquisition with the ACQuire STATE RUN command This value is reset to zero when any acquisition horizontal or vertical arguments that affect the waveform are changed The maximum number of acquisitions that can be counted is 230 1 The instrument stops counting when this number is reached This is the same value that displays in the upper center of the screen when the acquisition system is stopped Acquisition ACQui re NUMACq ACQuire STATE ACQUIRE NUMACQ might return ACQUIRE NUMACQ 350 indicating that 350 acquisitions have occurred since executing an ACQuire STATE RUN command This command sets or returns the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform Use the ACQuire MODe command to enable the Average mode Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal Acquisition Setup from the Horiz Acq menu selecting the Acquisition tab and choosing Average from the Acquisition Mode group box Then enter the desired number of waveforms that will be used to make up an averaged waveform in the of Wfms box First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 53 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ACQuire NUMEnv Group Syntax Arguments Examples ACQuire STATE 2 54 Acquisition ACQuire NUMAVg lt NR1 gt ACQui re NUMAVg ACQu
272. erature 2 79 CALibrate FACtory 2 72 CALibrate INTERNal 2 75 Index 1 Index CALibrate RESults 2 77 Calibration and Diagnostic commands CAL 2 71 CAL 2 72 CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy DUE 2 73 CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy HOURs 2 73 CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy YEARs 2 74 CALibrate FACtory STATus 2 74 CALibrate FACtory STEPSTAtus 2 74 CALibrate FACtory STEPSTIMulus 2 75 CALibrate INTERNal STARt 2 76 CALibrate INTERNal STATus 2 76 CALibrate RESults FACtory Frequency 2 78 CALibrate RESults FACtory Trigger 2 78 CALibrate RESults FACtory Voltage 2 79 CALibrate RESults FACtory 2 78 CALibrate RESults SPC 2 79 CALibrate TEMPerature 2 79 CALibrate FACtory 2 72 CALibrate INTERNal 2 75 CALibrate RESults 2 77 DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes 2 109 DIAg SELect lt function gt 2 111 DIAg LOOP OPTion 2 108 DIAg LOOP STOP 2 109 DIAg MODe 2 109 DIAg RESUIt FLAg 2 110 DIAg RESUIt LOG 2 110 DIAg SELect ALL 2 111 DIAg STATE 2 112 CH lt x gt BANdwidth 2 80 CH lt x gt COUPIling 2 81 CH lt x gt DESKew 2 82 CH lt x gt INVert 2 82 CH lt x gt OFFSet 2 83 CH lt x gt POSition 2 84 CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero 2 85 CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss 2 85 CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE 2 86 CH lt x gt PRObe FORCERange 2 86 CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN 2 86 CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber 2 87 CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE 2 87 CH lt x gt PRObe ID 2 87 CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance 2 88 CH lt x
273. ertical line with an X These cursors have no association with any waveform other than they inherit the color of the waveform they are assigned too Table 2 16 Cursor Commands Command Description CURSor Returns all cursor settings CURSor FUNCtion Sets or returns the cursor type CURSor HBArs Returns hbar cursor settings CURSor HBArs DELTa Returns hbars cursors vertical difference CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the hbar cursor lt x gt vertical position CURSor HBArs UNIts Returns hbar cursor units CURSor HBArs USE Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement scale CURSor MODe Sets or returns whether cursors move in unison or separately CURSor VBArs Sets or returns the position of vertical bar cursors CURSor VBArs DELTa Returns the difference between vbar cursors CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt Returns the horizontal value of the specified vertical bar ticks CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the vbar cursor lt x gt horizontal position CURSor VBArs UNIts Sets or returns the units for vbar cursors First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 15 Command Groups Table 2 16 Cursor Commands cont Command Description CURSor VBArs USE Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement scale CURSor VBArs VDELTa Returns the vertical difference between the two vertical bar cursor ticks Display Command Group 2 16 Use
274. es in width The defined binary formats specify the order in which the bytes are transferred The following are the four binary formats RJBinary specifies signed integer data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first m SRIBinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first This format is useful when transferring data to PCs RFBinary specifies floating point data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first m SRFBinary is the same as RFBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first This format is useful when transferring data to PCs You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record You can transfer a portion of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record You can use the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands to specify the first and last data points of the waveform record When transferring data into the instrument you must first specify the record length of the destination waveform record You do this with the WFMInopre NR_Pt command Next specify the first data point within the waveform record For example when you set DATa STARt to 1 data points will be stored starting with the first point in the record The instrument will ignore the value set by DATa STOP when reading in data It will stop reading data when there is no
275. es that the next acquisition will be a single sequence acquisition ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP sets the instrument to continually acquire data ACQUIRE STOPAFTER might return ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE indicating that the next acquisition the instrument makes will be of the single sequence type This command sets or returns the state of alias functionality Alias ALIas OFF ON lt NR1 gt ALIas ALlas STATE OFF turns Alias expansion off If a defined alias is sent when ALIas STATE is off a command error 102 will be generated ON turns Alias expansion on When a defined alias is received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed NR1 0 disables Alias mode any other value enables Alias mode ALIAS ON turns the alias feature on When a defined alias is received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed ALIAS might return ALIAS STATE 1 indicating that the alias feature is on ALlas CATalog Query Only 2 56 This query only command returns a list of the currently defined alias labels separated by commas If no aliases are defined the query returns the string First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Examples ALlas DEFine Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Alias ALIas CATalog ALIAS CATALOG might retu
276. eshold CH lt x gt 2 236 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH 2 237 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt 2 237 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity 2 237 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce 2 238 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn 2 238 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth 2 239 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 2 239 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce 2 240 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 240 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 241 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE 2 241 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 241 SEARCH SEARCHK lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold 2 242 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 242 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 2 243 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime 2 243 SEARCH SEARCHK lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold SETTime 2 243 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TY Pe 2 245 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 246 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH 2 246 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt 2 247 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime 2 244 SEA
277. ets or returns the A logic trigger threshold voltage for the specified channel TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt This command sets or returns the lower threshold for the channel selected TRIGger A MODe Sets or returns the A trigger mode TRIGger A PULse Returns the A pulse trigger parameters TRIGger A PULse CLAss Sets or returns the type of pulse on which to trigger TRIGger A RUNT Returns the current A runt pulse trigger logic TRIGger A PULse RUNT HIGHLimit parameters Sets or returns the upper limit for the A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A PULse RUNT LOWLimit Sets or returns the lower limit for the A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A PULse RUNT POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A PULse RUNT SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGger A PULse RUNT THReshold Returns the upper and lower thresholds for the A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A PULse RUNT THReshold HIGH Sets or returns the upper limit for the A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A PULse RUNT THReshold LOW Sets or returns the lower limit for the A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A PULse RUNT WHEn Sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it uncovers a runt First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 37 Command Groups 2 38 Table 2 27 Trigger Commands cont Command Descriptio
278. etting is 45 DiSplay PiCture STATE Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 118 Sets or returns the video picture mode setting Requires DPO40VID application module Display DISplay PICture STATE lt NR1 gt DISplay PICture STATE DISplay PICture BRIghtness DISplay PICture CONTRAst DISplay PICture AUTOContrast OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 disables video picture mode ON or lt NR1 gt 0 enables video picture mode First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples DISPLAY PICTURE STATE might return DISPLAY PICTURE STATE ON indicating that the video picture mode is enabled DISplay STYle DOTsonly This command sets a dots only display Group Display Syntax DISplay STYle DOTsonly lt NR1 gt OFF ON DISplay STYle DOTsonly Arguments ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns on the dots only display OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the dots only display DiSplay VECtorscope STATE Sets or returns the video vectorscope state setting This is equivalent to turning Vectorscope mode on or off from the front panel Conditions This command requires a DPO4VID application module Group Display Syntax DISplay VECtorscope STATE ON OFF lt NR1 gt DISplay VECtorscope STATE Arguments ON or lt NR1 gt enables the vectorscope display mode OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 disables the vectorscope display mode Examples DISP
279. ewing or setting Position Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down Position adjusts only the display position of a waveform whether it is a channel math or reference waveform The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which input signal values minus the present offset setting for that channel are displayed For example if the position for Channel 3 is set to 2 0 and the offset is set to 3 0 then input signals equal to 3 0 units are displayed 2 0 divisions above the center of the screen Vertical CH lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt POSition CH lt x gt OFFSet REF lt x gt VERTical POSition MATH 1 VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt is the position value in divisions from the center graticule ranging from 8 to 8 divisions First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples CH2 POSition 1 3 00 positions the Channel 2 input signal 1 3 divisions above the center graticule CH1 POSition might return CH1 POSITION 1 3000E 00 indicating that the current position of Channel is 1 3 divisions below the center graticule CH lt x gt PRObe Query Only This query only command returns all information concerning the probe that is attached to the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can ran
280. executed until calibration is complete Calibration and Diagnostic CAL lt NR1 gt indicates that the calibration did not complete successfully lt NR1 gt 0 indicates that the calibration completed without errors CAL starts the internal signal path calibration and might return 0 to indicate that the calibration was successful CALibrate FACtory No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments 2 72 This command provides the controls for starting and stopping the factory calibration process The factory calibration process consists of a series of steps Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate FACtory STARt CONTinue PREVious ABOrt DUmp STARt initializes the factory calibration sequence and starts the first calibration step CONTinue begins the next factory calibration step PREVious tries to run the most recent factory calibration step again ABOrt stops the calibration process First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DUmp stops the calibration process and prints the calibration constants CALIBRATE FACTORY START Starts the calibration process CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy DUE Query Only Group Syntax Returns Examples Queries if calibration is due Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy DUE lt NR1 gt indicates the oscilloscope is due for calibration lt NR1 gt 0 indic
281. faster than the set volts second rate SLOwer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is slower than the set volts second rate EQua sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is equal to the set volts second rate within a 5 tolerance First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 303 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGger A TYPe 2 304 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is not equal to the set volts second rate 5 TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN SLOWERTHAN sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is slower than the set volts second rate TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN FASTERTHAN indicating that the transition triggers when the transitioning signal is faster than the set volts second rate This command sets or returns the type of A trigger The five types of triggers are of Edge Logic Pulse Serial and Video Logic and Pulse triggers contain classes Logic triggers consist of State Pattern and SetHold classes Pulse triggers consist of Runt Width and Transition Once you have set the trigger type you may also need to identify the associated trigger class For details on selecting Logic and Pulse trigger classes see TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss and TRIGger A PULse CLAss respectively This command is simil
282. fier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SiZe This command sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for CAN trigger if trigger condition is DATA or IDANDDATA Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe lt NR3 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe Arguments lt NR3 gt is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue This command sets or returns the binary data string to be used for CAN trigger if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue lt NR3 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALUe Arguments lt NR3 gt is the CAN data value Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA VALUE 1011 sets the CAN data value to 1011 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype This command sets or queries the CAN trigger frame type First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 258 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA REMote ERRor OVERLoad TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA specifies a data frame type REMOTE specifies a remote frame type ERROR spec
283. five units and so on The range of units depends on which front panel knob is specified Examples FPANEL TURN TRIGLEVEL 10 duplicates turning the front panel Trigger LEVEL knob clockwise by 10 units GPIBUsb ADDress Query Only This command returns the GPIB USB address Group Miscellaneous Syntax GPIBUsb ADDress First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 137 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order GPIBUsb HWVersion This command sets or returns the GPIB USB hardware version Group Miscellaneous Syntax GPIBUsb HwVersion GPIBUsb HwVersion GPIBUsb ID Query Only This command sets or returns the GPIB USB ID Group Miscellaneous Syntax GPIBUsb ID GPIBUsb SETADDress No Query Form Group Miscellaneous Syntax GPIBUsb SETADDress GPIBUsb SETID No Query Form Group Miscellaneous Syntax GPIBUsb SETID GPIBUsb STATUS Group Miscellaneous Syntax GPIBUsb STATUS GPIBUSb STATUS First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 138 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HARDCopy No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This command sends a copy of the screen display to the active printer using the current palette and layout settings Hard Copy HARDCopy WAI CLS HARDCOPY initiates a screen copy to the active system printer HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter Group Syntax Arguments HA
284. from 1 to 10 Using an out of range value causes an execution error Any settings that have been stored previously at this location will be overwritten Examples SAVE SETUP 5 saves the current instrument setup in memory location 5 SAVE SETUP TEKOO000 SET saves the current instrument setup in the file TEK00000 SET in the default directory for setups C TekScope setups First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 215 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SAVe WAVEform No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command no query form saves a waveform to one of four reference memory locations or a file This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu and choosing Save Wfm from the drop down list Save and Recall SAVe WAVEform lt wfm gt lt file path gt REF lt x gt RECALL WAVEform lt wfm gt is the waveform that will be saved Valid waveforms include CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt and REF lt x gt REF lt x gt specifies the location in internal reference memory to where the waveform is stored lt file path gt is the location to where the waveform is stored lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form lt drive gt lt dir gt lt filename gt lt drive gt and one or more lt dir gt s are optional If you do not specify them the instrument wil
285. ft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC SETHOId CLOCk SOUrce TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk THReshold Group Syntax This command sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for the setup and hold trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold command Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC SETHOId CLOCk THReshold ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOGIc SETHOId CLOCk THReshold TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold DATa SOUrce Group Syntax This command sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce command Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC SETHOId DATa SOUrce TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold DATa THReshold Group Syntax Related Commands This command sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold command Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC SETHOId DATa THReshold ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOGIc SETHOId DATa THReshold TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold DATa SOUrce First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 279 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
286. g Holdoff Trigger TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe lt NR3 gt TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe lt NR3 gt specifies the holdoff time in seconds The range is from 250 ns through 12 0 s TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME might return TRIGGER A HOLDOFFTIME 1 2000E 06 indicating that the A trigger holdoff time is set to 1 2 ps TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 10 sets the A trigger holdoff time to 10 s First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual TRIGger A LEVel Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command sets or returns the level for the A trigger This command is equivalent to selecting Level from the Trig menu and then viewing or setting the trigger Level Trigger TRIGger A LEVel ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LEVel ECL specifies the ECL high level TTL specifies the TTL high level lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TRIGGER A LEVEL might return TRIGGER A LEVel 1 3000E 00 indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1 3 V TRIGGER A LEVEL TTL sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level which is 1 4 V TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the level for the specified channel Each Channel can have an independent Level Trigger TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt ECL specifies the ECL high level TTL sp
287. g for the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments This command is equivalent to selecting Coupling from the Vertical menu Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt COUPling AC DC GND CH lt x gt COUP1ing Arguments AC sets the specified channel to AC coupling DC sets the specified channel to DC coupling GND sets the specified channel to ground Only a flat ground level waveform will be displayed Examples CH2 COUPLING GND sets channel 2 to ground CH3 COUP1ing might return CH3 COUPling DC indicating that channel 3 is set to DC coupling First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 81 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt DESKew Group Syntax Arguments Examples CH lt x gt INVert 2 82 Group Syntax This command sets or returns the deskew time for the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments This command is equivalent to selecting Deskew from the Vertical Setup menu You can adjust the deskew time to add an independent channel based delay time to the delay set by the horizontal position control and common to all channels from the common trigger point to first sample taken for each channel This lets you compensa
288. ge from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe Examples CH2 PROBE might return CH2 PROBE GAIN 1 0000E 01 RESISTANCE 1 0000E 07 UNITS V ID TYPE 1OX SERNUMBER N A for a 10x probe indicating that among other parameters the attenuation factor for the probe attached to channel 2 is 100 0 mV assuming that probe units are set to volts CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero No Query Form This command executes the probe auto zero operation Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero EXECute CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss No Query Form This command executes a probe degauss operation Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss EXECute First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 85 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE Query Only This query only command returns the probe degauss state Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUSS STATE CH lt x gt PRObe FORCERange This command sets Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe FORCERange lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt PRObe FORCERange CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN This command sets or returns the gain factor of the probe that is attached to the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instrum
289. ger TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies one of the input channels which range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments and through 2 for two channel instruments TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE might return TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it detects a runt Trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual OCCURS TRIGger A RUNT WHEN OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs LESSthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the TRIGger A PULse RUNT WIDth command First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 295 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MOREthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width more than the time set by the TRIGger A PULse RUNT WIDth command EQUal argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period equal to the time period specified in TRIGger A PULse RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance NOTEQual argument sets the instrument to
290. ger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition 2 219 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 220 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier 2 220 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe 2 221 Index 7 Index SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue 2 221 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMETtype 2 222 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe 2 222 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue 2 223 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe 2 223 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TY Pe 2 223 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue 2 224 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C CONDition 2 224 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection 2 225 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe 2 225 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VA Lue 2 226 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition 2 226 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe 2 227 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue 2 227 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI
291. gger condition is set to MISO or MISOMOSI This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOST VALUe lt bin gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALUue lt bin gt is the binary data string with the number of bits specified by the TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe command First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SPI trigger if trigger condition is MISO MOSI or MISOMOSI This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe lt NR3 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe lt NR3 gt is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the bus for a serial search This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 B2 TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 specifies the bus 1 source B2 specifies the bus 2 source TRIGger A EDGE Query Only Group Syntax This query only command returns the trigger source coupling and slope for the A edge trigger This command is equivalent to selecting Edge Setup from the Tr
292. gister DESER The DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to the Standard Event Status Register SESR and entered into the Event Queue For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers see Registers Status and Error First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 107 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DESE lt NR1 gt DESE CLS ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB lt NR1 gt The binary bits of the DESER are set according to this value which ranges from through 255 For example DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value 11010001 that is the most significant bit in the register is set to 1 the next most significant bit to 1 the next bit to 0 etc The power on default for DESER is all bits set if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the DESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle NOTE Setting the DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the ESE command to set the ESER DESE 209 sets the DESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits DESE might return DESE 186 showing that the DESER contains the binary value 10111010 DIAg LOOP OPTion No Query Form 2 108 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Se
293. gt PRObe SIGnal 2 88 CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts 2 88 Index 2 CH lt x gt PRObe 2 85 CH lt x gt SCAle 2 89 CH lt x gt TERmination 2 90 CH lt x gt YUNits 2 90 CH lt x gt 2 80 CLEARMenu 2 90 CLS 2 91 Command Groups 2 11 Cursor commands CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt 2 93 CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt 2 96 CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt 2 97 CURSor VBArs VDELTa 2 99 CURSor 2 91 CURSor FUNCtion 2 92 CURSor HBArs 2 93 CURSor HBArs DELTa 2 93 CURSor HBArs UNIts 2 94 CURSor HBArs USE 2 94 CURSor MODe 2 95 CURSor VBArs 2 95 CURSor VBArs DELTa 2 96 CURSor VBArs UNIts 2 97 CURSor VBArs USE 2 98 CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt 2 93 CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt 2 96 CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt 2 97 CURSor VBArs VDELTa 2 99 CURSor 2 91 CURSor FUNCtion 2 92 CURSor HBArs 2 93 CURSor HBArs DELTa 2 93 CURSor HBArs UNIts 2 94 CURSor HBArs USE 2 94 CURSor MODe 2 95 CURSor VBArs 2 95 CURSor VBArs DELTa 2 96 CURSor VBArs UNIts 2 97 CURSor VBArs USE 2 98 CURVe 2 99 D DATa 2 100 DATa DESTination 2 101 DATa ENCdg 2 102 DATa SOUrce 2 104 DATa STARt 2 105 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual DATa STOP 2 105 DATE 2 106 DDT 2 107 DESE 2 107 DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes 2 109 DIAg SELect lt function gt 2 111 DIAg LOOP OPTion 2 108 DIAg LOOP STOP 2 109 DIAg MODe 2 109 DIAg R
294. gt is either 1 or 2 HPOS lt x gt A cursor selector lt x gt is either 1 or 2 Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header Table 2 6 Math Specifier Mnemonics Symbol Meaning Math lt x gt A math waveform specifier lt x gt is 1 through 4 Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the header Up to eight automated measurements may be displayed Table 2 7 Measurement Specifier Mnemonics Symbol Meaning MEAS lt x gt A measurement specifier lt x gt is 1 through 8 Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Reference Waveform Mnemonics Argument Types Numeric Quoted String Command Syntax Table 2 8 Channel Mnemonics Symbol Meaning CH lt x gt A channel specifier lt x gt is 1 through 4 Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header Table 2 9 Reference Waveform Nmemonics Symbol Meaning REF lt x gt A reference waveform specifier lt x gt is 1 thru 4 Many instrument commands require numeric arguments The syntax shows the format that the instrument returns in response to a query This is also the preferred format when sending the command to the instrument though any of the formats will be accepted This documentation represents these arguments as follows Table 2
295. h search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn LESSThan argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the pulse width is less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MOREThan argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the pulse width is true longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command EQUal argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the pulse width is equal to the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth command within a tolerance of 5 UNEQual argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the pulse width is unequal to the time the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth W1IDth command within a tolerance of 5 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the pulse width setting for a pulse width search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth wIDth lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth wIDth lt NR3 gt is the pulse width SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger
296. hat the A logic pattern will trigger when the pattern becomes true TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger This command is equivalent to selecting A Event Main Trigger Setup from the Trig menu selecting Pattern as the Trigger Type selecting Less Than for the Pattern in the Trigger When settings and entering a maximum value for Time Trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEnN LESSLimit lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit lt NR3 gt specifies the amount of time to hold the pattern true TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 10 0E 00 sets the maximum time that the selected pattern may hold true and generate an A logic pattern trigger to 10 s TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 5 0000E 09 indicating that the selected pattern may hold true for up to 5 ns and still generate an A logic pattern trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 277 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and st
297. he event or with the ALLEV query which returns all the event numbers along with a description of the event Reading an event removes it from the queue Before reading an event from the Event Queue you must use the ESR query to read the summary of the event from the SESR This makes the events summarized by the ESR read available to the EVENT and EVMSG queries and empties the SESR Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous ESR reads but not read from the Event Queue Events that follow an ESR read are put in the Event Queue but are not available until ESR is used again Event Handling Sequence The figure below shows how to use the status and event handling system In the explanation that follows numbers in parentheses refer to numbers in the figure First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 5 Status and Events Device Event Status Enable Register DESER Read using DESE Write using DESE Standard Event Status Register SESR Read using ESR Cannot be written Event Status Enable Register ESER Read using ESE Write using ESE Status Byte Register SBR Read using STB Cannot be written Service Request Enable Register SRER Read using SRE Write using SRE PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC V 7 6 5
298. he first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region The area measured above the common reference point is positive while the area below the common reference point is negative CMEan cycle mean measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region CRMs cycle rms measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region DELay measures the time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude point of the source waveform and the destination waveform DISTDUty duty cycle distortion measures the time between the falling edge and the rising edge of the eye pattern at the mid reference level It is the peak to peak time variation of the first eye crossing measured at the mid reference as a percent of the eye period EXTINCTDB measures the extinction ratio of an optical waveform eye diagram Extinction Ratio dB measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic High to the logic Low of an optical waveform and expresses the result in dB This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode Extinction dB 10 x log 10 High Low EXTINCTPCT measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform Extinction Ratio measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic Low off to the logic High on of an optical w
299. he following commands do not affect the DATa parameters TEKSecure RST RECALL SETUP FACtory These are the initial factory default settings for DATa DATA DESTINATION REF1 ENCDG RIBINARY SOURCE CH1 START 1 STOP 5000 FRAMESTART 1 FRAMESTOP 5000 Acquisition Default Values The following table lists the Acquisition factory default setup values Command Default Values ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE NUMAVG 16 ACQUIRE NUMENV 10 ACQUIRE NUMSAMPLES 16000 ACQUIRE SAMPLINGMODE IT ACQUIRE STATE 1 ON ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP FASTACQ STATE 0 Alias Default Values The following table lists the Alias factory default setup values Command Default Values ALIAS STATE 0 OFF Cursor Default Values The following table lists the Cursor factory default setup values Command Default Values CURSOR FUNCTION VBARS CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 300 0000E 3 CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 300 0000E 3 CURSOR LINESTYLE SOLID CURSOR MODE INDEPENDENT CURSOR PAIRED POSITION1 1 6000E 6 CURSOR PAIRED POSITION2 1 6000E 6 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 1 Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values CURSOR SCREEN STYLE LINES CURSOR SOURCE1 CH1 CURSOR SOURCE2 CH1 CURSOR STATE 0 CURSOR VBARS POSITION1 1 6000E 6 CURSOR VBARS POSITION2 1 6000E 6 CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS CURSOR WAVEFORM POSITION1 1 6000E 6
300. he instrument to trigger when the specified logical combinations of channels 1 2 3 and 4 are met TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments This command sets or returns the logical combination of the input channels for the A pattern and A state logic triggers This command is equivalent to selecting A Event Main Trigger Setup from the Trig menu selecting Pattern or State for the Trigger Type and setting or viewing the Pattern Type This command is provided for backward compatibility with other Tektronix instruments Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion AND NANd NOR OR TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt AND specifies to trigger if all conditions are true NANd specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are false NOR specifies to trigger if all conditions are false OR specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are true First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 271 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION might return TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION NAND which indicates that the instrument will trigger if the AND logic conditions are false TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION AND sets the logical combination of channels to be true when all conditions are true TRIGger A LOGIc INPut Query Only Group Syntax Relate
301. how may events will be returned Status and Error EVQty ALLEv EVENT EVMsg EVQTY might return EVQTY 3 indicating the number of event codes in the Event Queue FACtory No Query Form This command no query form resets the instrument to its factory default settings This command is equivalent to pressing the DEFAULT SETUP button located on the instrument front panel or selecting Recall Default Setup from the File menu First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 129 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command resets the instrument settings to factory defaults Clears the Event Status Enable Register Clears the Service Request Enable Register Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255 Sets the Power On Status Clear Flag to TRUE Purges all defined aliases Enables all Command Headers Sets the macro defined by DDT to a zero length field Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations This command does not reset the following The state of the GPIB IEEE Std 488 1 1987 interface The selected GPIB address Calibration data that affects device specifications Protected user data Stored settings The current password if you set one Group Save and Recall Syntax FACtory Related Commands PSC RCL RECAII SETUp RST SAV SAVe SETUp Arguments None Examples FACTORY resets the instrument to its factory default setti
302. ht return the following horizontal settings HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE 0 POSITION 50 0000 TIME 0 00000000000 HORIZONTAL MAIN INTERPRATIO 1 0000 SCALE 40 0000E 9 POSITION 50 0000 SAMPLERATE 1 2500E 9 UNITS STRING s HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 500 RESOLUTION 500 ROLL AUTO FASTFRAME STATE 1 READOUTS 0 SUMFRAME NONE MULTIPLEFRAMES MODE OVERLAY FRAMESTART CHI1 1 CH2 1 CH3 1 CH4 1 MATHI1 1 MATH2 1 MATH3 1 MATH4 1 REF1 1 REF2 1 REF3 1 REF4 1 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME MULTIPLEFRAMES NUMFRAMES CH1 2 CH2 2 CH3 2 CH4 2 MATH1 2 MATH2 2 MATH3 2 MATH4 2 REF1 2 REF2 2 REF3 2 REF4 2 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME LENGTH 500 COUNT 2 SELECTED CH1 2 CH2 2 CH3 2 CH4 2 MATHI1 2 MATH2 2 MATH3 2 MATH4 2 REF1 2 REF2 2 REF3 2 REF4 2 x HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME REF SOURCE CH4 FRAME 1 HORIZONTAL FASTFRAME TRACK ALL HORizontal ACQLENGTH Query Only Returns the record length Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal ACQLENGTH HORizontal MAIn Query Only This query only command returns the time per division of the time base This command is equivalent to selecting Position Scale from the Horiz Acq menu First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 144 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal MAIn Examples HORIZONTAL MAIN might return HORIZONTAL MAIN INTERPRATIO 1 0000 SCALE 40 0000E 9 POSITION 50 0000 SAMPLERATE 1 2500E 9 UNITS STRING s HORizontal MAIn DELay MODe This command sets or
303. ics are different either remove the second use of COLor or place DISPlay in front of COLor CURSor2 5 Terminating This documentation uses lt EOM gt End of message to represent a message terminator Table 2 4 End of Message Terminator Symbol Meaning lt EOM gt Message terminator First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 5 Command Syntax The end of message terminator must be the END message EOI asserted concurrently with the last data byte The last data byte may be an ASCII linefeed LF character This instrument does not support ASCII LF only message termination The instrument always terminates outgoing messages with LF and EOI Constructed Mnemonics Cursor Position Mnemonics Math Specifier Mnemonics 2 6 Measurement Specifier Mnemonics Channel Mnemonics Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics For example a channel mnemonic can be CH1 CH2 CH3 or CH4 You use these mnemonics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic For example there is a CH1 POSition command and there is also a CH2 POSition command In the command descriptions this list of choices is abbreviated as CH lt x gt When cursors are displayed commands may specify which cursor of the pair to use Table 2 5 Cursor Mnemonics Symbol Meaning CURSOR lt x gt A cursor selector lt x gt is either 1 or 2 POSITION lt x gt A cursor selector lt x
304. ifies an error frame type OVERLOAD specifies an overload frame type TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA sets the CAN trigger frame type to DATA TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the CAN addressing mode to standard or extended format This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard ExTended TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard specifies the standard addressing mode EXTended specifies the extended addressing mode TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue This command sets or queries the binary address string used for the CAN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 259 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt NR3 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt NR3 gt is up to 29 bits specifying the CAN identifier value TRIGGER A BUS B1L CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE 1011 sets the CAN trigger identifier value to 1011 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments
305. ig menu and viewing the current setups Trigger TRIGger A EDGE First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 265 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Examples TRIGger A PULse TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGGER A EDGE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE indicating the trigger source coupling and slope for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE COUPling 2 266 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the type of coupling for the A edge trigger This command is equivalent to selecting A Event Main Trigger Setup from the Trig menu selecting Edge Trigger and choosing from the Coupling drop down list Trigger TRIGger A EDGE COUPling AC DC HFRej LFRej NOTSErej TRIGger A EDGE COUPling TRIGger A EDGE SOUtrce TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe AC selects AC trigger coupling which passes the input signals above 60 Hz to the trigger circuitry DC selects DC trigger coupling which passes all input signals to the trigger circuitry HFRej coupling attenuates signals above 50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry LFRej coupling attenuates signals below 80 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry NOISErej coupling provides stable triggering by increasing the trigger hysteresis Increased hysteresis reduces the trigger sensitivity to noise but may require greater tr
306. igger controls of the instrument to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform To autoset a video waveform the video trigger must be set to video standard not custom This is equivalent to pressing the front panel AUTOSET button For a detailed description of autoset functionality see Autoset in the index of the online help for your instrument Miscellaneous AUTOSet EXECute UNDo VIDeo VLines VFields DISplay GRAticule EXECute autosets the displayed waveform this is equivalent to pressing the front panel AUTOSET button If the display is set to a PAL MV or IRE graticule this argument forces the graticule display to full mode frame grid and cross hair UNDo returns the instrument to the setting prior to executing an autoset VIDeo autosets the displayed waveform VLines autosets the displayed waveform vFields autosets the displayed waveform AUTOSET VFields sets the instrument to trigger on all video fields This query only command returns the auxiliary output setup and is equivalent to selecting External Signals from the Utilities menu and then viewing the current settings for the AUX OUT Configuration Miscellaneous AUXout First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Examples AUXout EDGE Group Syntax AUXout SOUrce Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXout
307. igger signal amplitude TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING DC sets the A edge trigger coupling to DC TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING might return TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING DC indicating that the A edge trigger coupling is set to DC First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the slope for the A edge trigger This command is equivalent to selecting A Event Main Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Slope Trigger TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE COUPIling RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE RISE sets the A edge trigger slope to positive which triggers on the rising edge of the signal TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE FALL indicating that the A edge trigger slope is negative TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments This command sets or returns the source for the A edge trigger This command is equivalent to selecting A Event Main Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing from the Source drop down list Trigger TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH lt X gt EXT LINE
308. ill generate an A logic pattern trigger This command is equivalent to selecting A Event Main Trigger Setup from the Trig menu selecting Pattern as the Trigger Type selecting More Than for the Pattern in the Trigger When settings and entering a minimum value for Time Trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEnN MORELimit lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt specifies the amount of time to hold the pattern true TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 10 0E 00 sets the minimum time that the selected pattern may hold true and generate an A logic pattern trigger to 10 s TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 5 0000E 09 indicating that the selected pattern must hold true for at least 5 ns to generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk EDGE Group Syntax This command sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE command Trigger TRIGger A LOGIc SETHOId CLOCk EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 278 This command sets or returns the clock source for the A logic trigger setup and hold input This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce command First Dra
309. immer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 315 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B EDGE CH lt x gt specifies one of the input channels as the B trigger source Input channels are specified by x which can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instruments EXT specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector located on the rear panel of the instrument as the B trigger source TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the input source for the B trigger TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE might return TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH1 indicating that the current input source for the B trigger is channel 1 TRIGger B EVENTS Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the current B trigger events parameter This command is equivalent to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu selecting the A B Seq tab choosing Trig on nth event and viewing the Trig Event setting Trigger TRIGger B EVENTS TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TRIGGER B EVENTS might return TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 2 indicating that 2 events must occur before the B trigger occurs TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt 2 316 Group This command sets or returns the number of events that must occur before the B trigger when TRIG DELay BY is set to EVENTS This command is equivalent to sele
310. ing Dual Waveform Math GND coupling Vert Scale A string containing the vertical scale factor of 100 0 mV div the unzoomed waveform The numeric portion 20 00 dB div will always be four digits The examples cover 45 00 deg div all known internal units 785 4 mrad div 500 0 uVs div 10 00 kV s div 200 0 mV div 50 00 unk div Horiz Scale A string containing the horizontal scale factor of 100 ms div the unzoomed waveform The numeric portion 10 00 kHz div will always be four digits The examples cover 50 00 c div all known internal units Record Length A string containing the number of waveform 500 points points available in the entire record The 500000 points numeric portion is given as an integer First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 339 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2 39 Waveform Suffixes cont Field Description Examples Acquisition Mode A string describing the mode used to acquire Sample mode the waveform Pk Detect mode Hi Res mode Envelope mode Average mode Primary Reference A string specifying the delta between the 57 2345 ms Offset Primary Reference typically the A trigger and 87 3 Hz the CURVe zero reference identified by a 0 combination of PT Off and XZEro in units of XUNits For example in Trigger After Dela
311. ing your protected data This command generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register SESR when all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete The OPC query places the ASCII character 1 into the output queue when all such OPC commands are complete The OPC response is not available to read until all pending operations finish For a complete discussion of the use of these registers and the output queue see Registers and Queues The OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application program For more information see Synchronization Methods Table 2 36 Commands the Generate an OPC Message Operation Command Single sequence acquisition ACQuire STATE ON or ACQuire STATE RUN or ACQuire STATE 1 when ACQuire STOPAfter is set to SEQuence Hard copy operation HARDCopy START Calibration step Refer to the optional Service Manual Status and Error OPC OPC BUSY WAI OPC generates the operation complete message in the SESR at the completion of all pending OPC operations OPC might return to indicate that all pending OPC operations are finished First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 205 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OPT Query Only Group Syntax Examples PSC Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples PUD 2 206 This quer
312. ing for SECOnds or HERtz depending on the current vertical bar cursor units CURSOR VBARS UNITS HERtzZ sets the units of the VBArs cursors to 1 seconds CURSOR VBARS UNITS might return CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS indicating that the units for the vertical bar cursor are currently set to seconds CURSor VBArs USE No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 98 Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement scale This command only applicable when ratio cursors are on Cursor CURSor VBArs USE CURrent FIVEdivs CURSor VBArs UNIts CURrent sets the V Bar measurement scale so that 0 is the current position of the left most V Bar cursor and 100 is the current position of the right most V Bar cursor Moving the cursors after executing this command does not change the 0 or 100 scale points FIVEdivs sets V Bar measurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions is 100 where 0 is 2 5 divisions and 100 is 2 5 divisions from the center vertical graticule CURSOR VBARS USE CURRENT sets the V Bar measurement scale to use the current cursor positions as 0 and 100 of scale if units are set to First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor VBArs VDELTa Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples CURVe Group Syntax Returns the vertical difference between the two vertica
313. ion diagrams Use the DISplay X Y ZCHannel and DISplay XY ZLEVel commands to specify the Z channel and Z channel threshold level VECtorscope sets the display to a video vectorscope display mode DISPLAY XY MODE OFF selects a voltage versus time format for the display DISPLAY XY MODE might return DISPLAY XY MODE TRIGGER indicating a triggered XY display format First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 121 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DiSplay XY YCHannel Specifies the Y channel to be displayed with channel 1 in Triggered XY display mode Group Display Syntax DISplay xy YCHannel CH2 CH3 CH4 OFF DISplay XY YCHannel Related Commands DISplay XY MODe DISplay XY YREF Arguments CH2 CH3 and CH4 specify the channel displayed with channel 1 in Triggered XY Display mode OFF sets the Y Channel to off or none which turns off or prevents the CH1 versus CH lt x gt waveform from being displayed in Triggered XY or prevents it from coming on if Triggered XY is turned on later Examples DISPLAY XY YCHANNEL CH2 sets channel 2 to be displayed with channel 1 in Triggered XY mode DISPLAY XY YCHANNEL might return DISPLAY XY YCHANNEL CH2 indicating that channel 2 will be the Y channel in Triggered XY mode DiSplay XY YREF Specifies the Y channel to be displayed with reference in Triggered XY display mode Group Display Syntax DISplay XY YREF Related Comman
314. ion error lt QString gt must be an existing alias ALIAS DELETE NAME STARTUP deletes the alias named STARTUP Turns aliases on or off This command is identical to the ALIas command Alias ALIas STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON ALIas STATE lt NR1 gt 0 turns alias expansion off If a defined alias is sent when ALIas STATE is OFF a command error 102 is generated 9 or 9 lt NR1 gt 0 turns alias expansion on When a defined alias is received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed ALIAS STATE OFF turns the command alias feature off ALIAS STATE returns 0 when the alias feature is off This query only command prompts the instrument to return all events and their messages delimited by commas and removes the returned events from the Event Queue Use the ESR query to enable the events to be returned This command is similar to repeatedly sending EVMsg queries to the instrument Status and Error ALLEv ESR EVMsg First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 59 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples ALLEV might return ALLEV 2225 Measurement error No waveform to measure 420 Query UNTERMINATED AUTOSet No Query Form AUXout Query Only 2 60 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Group Syntax This command no query format sets the vertical horizontal and tr
315. ire MODe NR1 is the number of waveform acquisitions to average The range of values is from 2 to 512 in powers of two ACQUIRE NUMAVG 16 specifies that 16 waveform averages will be performed before exponential averaging starts ACQUIRE NUMAVG might return ACQUIRE NUMAVG 64 indicating that there are 64 acquisitions specified for averaging This command sets or returns the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an envelope waveform Sending this command is equivalent to setting the of Wfims in the Acquisition Setup menu when Envelope Acquisition mode is selected Acquisition ACQUire NUMEnv INFInite ACQui re NUMEnv INFInite is the number of waveform acquisitions to be enveloped ACQUIRE NUMENV returns ACQUIRE NUMENV INFInite indicating that acquisitions are acquired infinitely for enveloped waveforms This command starts or stops acquisitions When state is set to ON or RUN a new acquisition will be started If the last acquisition was a single acquisition sequence a new single sequence acquisition will be started If the last acquisition was continuous a new continuous acquisition will be started First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ACQuire STOPAfter Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order If RUN is issued in the middle of completing a single sequence acquisition for example aver
316. is command is equivalent to opening the DIAg STATE dialog ON or closing it OFF Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg STATE ON OFF ON puts the instrument into the state in which diagnostics can be run OFF disables diagnostics capabilities and returns the oscilloscope to a normal operating state DIAG STATE OFF turns off diagnostics capabilities and returns the instrument to a normal operating state This query only command returns the current Display settings This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and then viewing the contents of each tab Display DISplay DISPLAY might return DISPLAY CLOCK 1 COLOR PALETTE IMAGEVIEW MONOGREEN RECORDVIEW TEMPERATURE USER GRATICULE 165 50 15 CH1 180 50 100 CH2 300 50 100 CH3 60 50 100 CH4 240 50 100 REF1 0 90 0 REF2 0 90 100 REF3 60 90 100 REF4 240 90 100 MATH1 160 50 100 MATH2 40 60 100 MATH3 120 60 100 MATH4 195 50 100 HISTOGRAM 320 50 100 CARET 150 50 100 MASK 0 25 75 MASKHIGHLIGHT 140 50 100 DISPLAY COLOR MATHCOLOR DEFAULT REFCOLOR DEFAULT DISPLAY FILTER SINX FORMAT YT GRATICULE IRE INTENSITY WAVEFORM IMAGEVIEW 81 0000 RECORDVIEW 81 0000 DISPLAY INTENSITY AUTOBRIGHT 0 SCREENSAVER 1 SCREENSAVERDELAY 28800 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE OFF STYLE DOTS TRIGBAR OFF TRIGT 1 CURSORTICK LONG VARPERSIST 2 6000 SCREENTEXT STATE 1 LABELI NAME XPOS 100 YPOS 5 DISPLAY SCREENTEXT LABEL2 NAME THIS IS SCREEN TEXT XPOS 100 YPOS 20 DISPLAY SCREENTE
317. is command sets or queries the CAN data qualifier This only applies if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUAL fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALi fier SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue LESSThan specifies to search for bus data is less than the specified value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue MOREThan specifies to search for bus data is more than the specified value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue EQUal specifies to search for bus data is equal to the specified value specified by SEARCH SEARCHK lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order UNEQual specifies to search for bus data is not equal to the specified value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for CAN search if search condition is DATA or IDANDDATA This command requires a DPO4AUTO application m
318. isted in Alphabetical Order HIGHLIMIT 2 0000E 9 WHEN WITHIN POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A PULSE TIMEOUT POLARITY STAYSHIGH TIME 2 0000E 9 TRIGger A PULse CLAss This command sets or returns the type of pulse on which to trigger This command is equivalent to selecting the setup menu for the pulse type that you want from the Trig menu Width Setup Runt Setup or Transition Setup Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSe CLAss RUNt WIDth TRANSi tion TRIGger A PULSe CLASS Related Commands TRIGger A RUNT TRIGger A PULSEWIDth TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall TRIGger A TY Pe Arguments RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first The thresholds are set with the TRIGger A PULse RUNT THReshold LOW and TRIGger A PULse RUNT THReshold HIGH commands WIDth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either inside or outside the limits as specified by TRIGger A PULse WIDth LOWLimit and TRIGger A PULse WIDth HIGHLimit The polarity is selected using the TRIGger A PULse WIDth POLarity command TRANS1tion triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta Examples TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS WIDTH specifies a width pulse for the A trigger TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS
319. iteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Sets or queries whether the clock edge is rise or fall for a logic search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Sets or queries the clock source definition for logic search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH Sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF lt x gt Sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Search Commands cont Command Command Groups Description SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt Sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Sets or returns the condition for generating a logic pattern search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn
320. k Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax This command sets or returns the A logic trigger threshold voltage for the channel specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments See the TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt command Trigger TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the lower threshold for the channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Used in runt and slew rate as the lower threshold Used for all other trigger types as the single level threshold Trigger TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 50E 3 sets the lower limit of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV for channel 2 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 might return TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 1 2000E 01 indicating that the lower limit of the pulse runt trigger is set to 120 mV First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 281 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A
321. l Order ACKMISS enables triggering on a missing acknowledge ERROR enables triggering on an error within a frame Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION EOF indication an end of file condition TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION DATA enables triggering on matching CAN data TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection This command sets or queries the CAN trigger condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either This only applies if the trigger condition is ID Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Arguments READ sets the CAN data direction to READ WRITEsets the CAN data direction to WRITE NOCAREsets the CAN data direction to either Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA DIRECTION WRITE sets the CAN data direction to Write TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIifier This command sets or returns the CAN data qualifier This only applies if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Group Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 257 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALi
322. l bar cursor ticks The units are specified by the CURSor HBArs UNIts query Cursor CURSor VBArs VDELTa CURSor HBArs UNIts lt NR3 gt indicates the horizontal difference between the two vertical bar cursors CURSOR VBARS VDELTA might return CURSOR VBARS VDELTA 1 064E 0 indicating that the vertical difference between the vertical bar cursors ticks is 1 064 units This command transfers waveform data to and from the instrument Each waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform preamble that contains information such as data format and scale The CURVe query transfers data from the instrument The data source is specified by the DATa SOUrce command The first and last data points are specified by the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the instrument The data is stored in the reference memory location specified by DATa DESTination starting with the data point specified by DATa STARt Only one waveform can be transferred at a time The waveform will only be displayed if the reference is displayed Waveform Transfer CURVe lt Block gt lt asc curve gt CURVe First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 99 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATa 2 100 Related Commands Arguments Examples DATa DESTination DATa SOUrce DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAVEform SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat WFMInpre WFMInpre BYT
323. l read the waveform from the default directory lt filename gt stands for a filename of up to 125 characters followed by a period and the three character extension Internal format waveforms use the wfm extension for spreadsheet format files or the dat extension for MathCad format files The instrument will generate an error if you use any other extension for saving a waveform SAVE WAVEFORM MATHZ2 REF2 saves the Math2 waveform in reference memory location2 SAVE WAVEFORM MATH1 TEKOOOO WFM saves the Math1 waveform to the file TEK00000 WFM in the default directory and on the default drive SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat 2 216 This command specifies or returns the file format for saved waveforms Waveform header and timing information is included in the resulting file of non internal formats The instrument saves DPO waveforms as a 500 x 200 matrix with the first row corresponding to the most recently acquired data The values specified by DATa STARt and DATa STOP determine the range of waveform data to output In the event that DATa STOP value is greater than the current record length the current record length determines the last output value First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu clicking the Waveform button and choosing the desired waveform file format from the Save as type d
324. larity voltage threshold and source data voltage threshold and source and setup hold times for violation triggering TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk Returns clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input for setup hold triggering TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk EDGE Sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 27 Trigger Commands cont Command Command Groups Description TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns the clock source for the A logic trigger setup and hold input TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold CLOCk THReshold Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa Returns the voltage threshold and data source for the setup hold trigger TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold DATa SOUrce TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold DATa THReshold Sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold HOLDTime Sets or returns the hold time for the setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A LOGIc SETHold SETTime TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold Sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering Returns the threshold voltage for all channels in A logic trigger TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt S
325. les Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 3 0E 3 sets the hold time for the setup and hold trigger to 3 ms TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDT IME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the current hold time for the setup and hold trigger is 2 ns TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOId SETTime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A SETHOId SETTime lt NR3 gt specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME 3 0E 6 specifies that the current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 3 us TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD SETTIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 2 ns TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns transition time trigger parameters This command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current transition settings Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 2 0000E 9 POLARITY POSITIVE THRESHOLD HIGH 1 2000 LOW 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION WHEN SLOWERTHAN indicating the current transition time trigger settings
326. level of 1 4 V First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments SELect Query Only Group Syntax Examples SELect BUS lt x gt Group Syntax This command sets or returns the reference waveform upper threshold level for a transition search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt ECL TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V This query only command returns the selected waveform that is affected by the front panel controls and the display status on or off of all waveforms This query command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and viewing the Source waveform setting Vertical SELect SELECT might return the waveform and status information as SELECT CH1 1 CH2 0 CH3 0 CH4 0 MATH1 0 MATH2 O MATH3 O MATH4 O REFL O REF2 0 REF3 0 REF4 0 CONTROL CH1 This command turns on the display of the specified Bus waveform and also resets the acquisition The query returns whether the specified Bus waveform is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform The value of lt x gt can be 1 or 2 Vertical SELect B
327. list MEASUrement STATIstics MODE Turns management statistics on or off and sets or returns which pair of statistical accumulations is displayed MEASUrement STATIstics WElghting Sets or returns the time constant for mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations Miscellaneous Command Group 2 26 Miscellaneous commands do not fit into other categories Several commands and queries are common to all 488 2 1987 devices on the GPIB bus The 488 2 1987 standard defines these commands The common commands begin with an asterisk character Table 2 24 Miscellaneous Commands Command Description AUTOSet Sets the vertical horizontal and trigger controls to provide a stable display of the selected waveform AUXout Returns the auxiliary out setup AUXout EDGE Sets or returns the polarity of the auxiliary output AUXout SOUrce Sets or returns the trigger source at the BNC connection First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 24 Miscellaneous Commands cont Command Description BELI In previous models this command sounded the audio indicator Provided for backward compatibility CLEARMenu Clears the current menu from the display DATE Sets or returns the date that the instrument can display DDT Sets or returns the commands that will be executed by the group execut
328. lt x gt 12C ADDRess VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C ADDRess VALue lt bin gt is the address in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt l2C CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 224 This command sets or queries the search condition for I2C search This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition STARt STOP REPEATStart ACKMISS ADDRess DATA ADDRANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition STARt specifies a search based on start condition STOP specifies a search based on stop condition REPEATStart specifies a search based on repeat of start condition ACKMISS specifies a search based on missing acknowledgement condition First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ADDRess specifies a search based on address DATA specifies a search based on data ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on address and data SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt l2C DATa DiRection Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the I2C search condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRectio
329. m data that is transferred into the instrument by the CURVe command Waveform Transfer DATa DESTination REF lt x gt DATa DESTination CURVe REF lt x gt is the reference where the waveform will be stored The reference number is specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 DATA DESTINATION might return DATA DESTINATION REF3 indicating that reference 3 is the currently selected reference memory location for waveform data DATA DESTINATION REF1 indicates that incoming waveform data be stored in reference 1 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 101 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATa ENCdg This command sets or returns the format of outgoing waveform data This command is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BN_ Fmt andWFMOutpre BYT_ Or Setting the DATa ENGdg value causes the corresponding WFMOutpre values to be updated and visa versa NOTE Values are constrained for outbound data to the format of the data specified by DATa SOUrce Group Waveform Transfer Syntax DATa ENCdg ASCIi FAStest RIBinary RPBinary UNLocked SRIbinary SRPbinary DATa ENCdg Related Commands WFMOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BN Fmt WFMOutpre BYT Or First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 102 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments ASCTi specifies the ASCII representation of signed INT FLOAT If ASCII is
330. mand sets or returns one of 8 different numerical values you can use within math expressions These values can range from 9 9e37 to 9 9e37 the default values are 0 0 lt x gt specifies the location through 8 in which you can store values Stored math variables can be reference within math expressions as VARI VAR2 VAR8 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order For example the following command defines MATH as the product of Channel 1 and math variable 1 MATH1 DEFINE CH1 VARI Math MATHVAR VAR lt x gt lt NR3 gt MATHVAR VAR lt xX gt MATHVAR VAR lt x gt MATH 1 DEFIne lt NR3 gt specifies the numerical value to be stored in location x lt 1 through 8 gt MATHVAR VAR3 2 43E 5 stores the value 2 43e 5 in the third math variable location MATHVAR VAR3 might return MATHVAR VAR3 24 3000E 6 for the expression stored in location 3 MEASUrement Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns all measurement parameters in the following order MEAS1 MEAS2 MEAS3 MEAS4 MEASS MEAS6 MEAS7 MEAS8 and IMMED Measurement MEASUrement MEASUREMENT might return MEASUREMENT GATING OFF IMMED TYPE UNDEFINED UNITS V SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH1 SOURCE1 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT IMMED D
331. me setting for an setup hold search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHOId HOLDTime lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHO1d HOLDTime lt NR3 gt specifies the hold time setting in seconds Positive values for hold time occur after the clock edge Negative values occur before the clock edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Group Syntax This command sets or returns the setup time setting for an setup hold search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHOId SETTime lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHO1d SETTime First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 243 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the transition time setting for an transition search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 DELTatime lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 DELTatime lt NR3 gt specifies the transition time in seconds SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or re
332. means that the search starts at the end of the waveform and looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt command to specify the slope of the edge FORWards means that the search starts at the beginning of the waveform and looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt command to specify the slope of the edge MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt DELAY DIRECTION BACKWARDS starts searching from the end of the waveform record MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt DELAY DIRECTION might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating that the current search direction is backwards MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt 2 180 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the slope of the edge that is used for the delay from or to waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement The waveform is specified by MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt FALL RISe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt lt x gt specifies which waveform to use where lt x gt 1 is the from waveform and lt x gt 2 is the to waveform FALL specifies the falling edge RISe specifies the rising edge MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 RISE specifies that the from waveform rising edge be used for the immediate del
333. measurement defined as measurement 2 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE 0 indicating that measurement defined for measurement slot 1 is disabled MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the standard deviation of values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 8 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STDDEV might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STDDEV 21 0E 12 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe 2 184 Group Syntax This command sets or returns the measurement type defined for the specified measurement slot The measurement slot is specified by x which ranges from 1 through 8 This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired measurement type Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe AMP1itude AREa BURSt CARea CMEan CRMs DELay DISTDUty EXTINCTDB EXTINCTPCT EXTINCTRATIO EYEHeight EYEWidth FALL FREQuency HIGH HITs LOwW MAXimum MEAN MEDian MINImum NCROss NDUty NOVershoot NWIdth PBASe PCROss PCTCROss PDUty PEAKHits PERIod PHASe PK2Pk PKPKJitter PKPKNoise POVershoot PTOT PWIdth QFACtor First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RIS
334. ment MEAS lt x gt This query only command returns all measurement parameters MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay Returns the number of values accumulated since the last statistical reset Returns the delay measurement parameters for specified measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIREction Sets or returns the search direction to use for delay measurements MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt Sets or returns the slope of the edge to use for delay from and to waveform measurements MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN Returns the maximum value found since the last statistical reset Returns the mean value accumulated since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 Returns the minimum value found since the last statistical reset Sets or returns the channel from which measurements are taken MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 Sets or returns the channel to which measurements are sent MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev Sets or returns whether the specified measurement slot is computed and displayed Returns the standard deviation of values accumulated since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Sets or returns the measurement lt x gt type MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts MEASU
335. mmand requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 ADDR10 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 specifies 7 bit addresses ADDR10 specifies 10 bit addresses SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt l2C ADDRess TYPe Conditions Group Syntax This command sets or queries the I2C address type to I2C special addresses General Call HS Mode etc or to a user specified address This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe GENeralcall STARtbyte HSmode EEPROM USER SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDReSSs TYPe First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 223 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments GENeralcal1 specifies a general call address STARtbyte specifies a start byte address HSmode specifies a high speed mode address EEPROM specifies an EEPROM address USER specifies a user address SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the binary address string to be used for I2C search if search condition is ADDR or ADDRANDDATA This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt xX gt TRIGger A BUS B
336. mmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NCROss timing measurement measures the time from the trigger point to the first falling edge of the waveform or gated region The distance time is measured at the middle reference amplitude point of the signal NDUty negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Negative Duty Cycle Negative Width Period x 100 NOVershoot negative overshoot finds the negative overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region Negative Overshoot Low Minimum Amplitude x 100 NwIdth negative width measurement is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region PBASe measures the base value used in extinction ratio measurements PCROSs timing measurement measures the time from the trigger point to the first positive edge of the waveform or gated region The distance time is measured at the middle reference amplitude point of the signal PCTCROSs measures the location of the eye crossing point expressed as a percentage of EYEHeight Crossing percent 100 x eye crossing point PBASe PTOP PBASe PDUty positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to th
337. more data to read or when it has reached the specified record length When transferring data from the instrument you must specify the first and last data points in the waveform record Setting DATa STARt to 1 and DATa STOP to the record length will always return the entire waveform The DATa SOUrce command specifies the waveform source when transferring a waveform from the instrument You can only transfer one waveform at a time Waveforms sent to the instrument are always stored in one of the four reference memory locations Use the DATa DESTination command to specify a reference memory location First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Waveform Preamble Each waveform that you transfer has an associated waveform preamble that contains information such as the horizontal scale the vertical scale and other settings in effect when the waveform was created Refer to the individual WFMInpre and WFMOutpre commands for more information Scaling Waveform Data Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller you can convert the data points into voltage values for analysis using information from the waveform preamble Transferring Waveform You can transfer waveforms from the instrument to an external controller using Data from the Instrument the following sequence 1 Select the waveform source s using DATa SOUrce 2 Specify the waveform data format using DATa ENCdg 3 Specify th
338. mplete You achieve synchronization by using this command with either a serial poll or service request handler Serial Poll Method Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER and the Event Status Enable Register ESER using the DESE and ESE commands When the operation is complete the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register SESR will be enabled and the Event Status Bit ESB in the Status Byte Register will be enabled The same command sequence using the OPC command for synchronization with serial polling looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Enable the status registers DESE 1 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 9 Status and Events 3 10 ESE 1 SRE 0 Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC while serial poll 0 keep looping Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY Service Request Method Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER and the Event Status Enable Register ESER using the DESE and
339. mum Amplitude x 100 NwIdth negative width measurement is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region PBASe measures the base value used in extinction ratio measurements PCROSs timing measurement measures the time from the trigger point to the first positive edge of the waveform or gated region The distance time is measured at the middle reference amplitude point of the signal PCTCROSs measures the location of the eye crossing point expressed as a percentage of EYEHeight Crossing percent 100 x eye crossing point PBASe PTOP PBASe PDUty positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage It is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Positive Duty Cycle Positive Width Period x 100 PEAKHits measures the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram PERIOd is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated region Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds PHASe measures the phase difference amount of time a waveform leads or lags the reference waveform between two waveforms The measurement is made between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in degrees where 360 represents one waveform cycle PK2Pk peak to peak
340. n TRIGger A PULse RUNT WIDth Sets or returns the minimum width for A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall Returns the delta time polarity and both upper and lower threshold limits for the transition time trigger TRIGger A PULsef TRANsition SLEWRate DELTatime Sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transition value TRIGger A PULsef TRANsition SLEWRate HIGHLimit Sets or returns the upper transition trigger threshold TRIGger A PULsef TRANsition SLEWRate LOWLimit Sets or returns the lower transition trigger threshold TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse transition trigger TRIGger A PULsef TRANsition SLEWRate SOUrce Sets or returns the source for transition trigger TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold Returns the upper and lower thresholds for the transition trigger TRIGger A PULsef TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold HIGH Sets or returns the upper transition trigger threshold TRIGger A PULsef TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold LOW Sets or returns the lower transition trigger threshold TRIGger A PULsef TRANsition SLEWRate WHEn Sets or returns the relationship of delta time to transitioning signal TRIGger A PULSEWIDth Returns the trigger A pulse width parameters TRIGger A PULse WIDth HIGHLimit Sets or returns the upp
341. n READ WRITE NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection READ specifies a read condition WRITE specifies a write condition NOCARE specifies either a read or write condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for I2C search if search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the data string length in bytes First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 225 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the binary data string to be used for I2C search if search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C DATa VALue lt bin gt is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This c
342. n be set up to display the protocol information the logic waveforms that comprise the bus or both Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger Syntax BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY TYPe BUS WAVEForms BOTh BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY TYPe Arguments BUS specifies to display the bus waveforms only WAVEforms specifies to display the logic waveforms only BOTh specifies to display both the bus and logic waveforms BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce This command sets or returns the I2C SCLK source Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger Syntax BUS B lt x gt 1I12C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt 1I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Arguments CH lt x gt is the channel to use as the I2C SCLK source BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce This command sets or returns the I2C SDATA source Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 65 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments BUS B lt x gt POSition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments BUS B lt x gt 12C DATA SDATA SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt 12C DATA SDATA SOUrce CH lt x gt is the channel to use as the I2C SDATA source This command sets or returns the position of the bus waveforms This is just a
343. n expression error 261 Math error in expression 2200 Measurement error Measurement system error 2201 Measurement error No period found 2203 Measurement error No period second waveform 2204 Measurement error Low signal amplitude 2205 Measurement error Low amplitude second waveform 2206 Measurement error Invalid gate 2207 Measurement error Measurement overflow 2208 Measurement error Waveform does not cross Mid Ref 2209 Measurement error No second Mid Ref crossing 2210 Measurement error No Mid Ref crossing second waveform 2211 Measurement error No backwards Mid Ref Crossing 2212 Measurement error No negative crossing 2213 Measurement error No positive crossing 2214 Measurement error No crossing 2215 Measurement error No crossing second waveform 2216 Measurement error No crossing target waveform 2217 Measurement error Constant waveform 2218 Measurement error Unused 2219 Measurement error No valid edge No arm sample 2220 Measurement error No valid edge No arm cross 2221 Measurement error No valid edge No trigger cross 2222 Measurement error No valid edge No second cross 2223 Measurement error Waveform mismatch 2225 Measurement error No waveform to measure 2226 Measurement error Null Waveform 2227 Measurement error Positive and Negative Clipping 2228 Measurement error Positive Clipping 2229 Measurement error Negative Clipping 2230 Measurement error High Ref lt Low Ref 2231 Measurem
344. n the commands these measurement readouts are named MEAS lt x gt where lt x gt can be 1 through 8 In addition to the eight displayed measurements the measurement commands let you specify an additional measurement I MMed The immediate measurement First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 23 Command Groups 2 24 has no front panel equivalent Immediate measurements are never displayed Because they are computed only when needed immediate measurements slow the waveform update rate less than displayed measurements Whether you use displayed or immediate measurements use the VALue query to obtain measurement results Measurement commands can set and query measurement parameters You can assign some parameters such as waveform sources differently for each measurement Other parameters such as reference levels have only one value which applies to all measurements Table 2 23 Measurement Commands Command Description MEASUrement Returns all measurement parameters MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot Removes the measurement snapshot display MEASUrement GATing Sets or returns the measurement gating MEASUrement IMMed Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters MEASUrement IMMed DELay Returns information about the immediate delay measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIREction Sets or returns the search direction to use for immediate delay measurements
345. n the SRER Subsequent power on cycles will generate a Service Request The PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power on Sending PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows The instrument stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties this queue each time it receives a new command or query message after an lt EOM gt The controller must read a query response before it sends the next command or query or it will lose responses to earlier queries CAUTION When a controller sends a query an lt EOM gt and a second query the instrument normally clears the first response and outputs the second while reporting a Query Error QYE bit in the ESER to indicate the lost response A fast controller however may receive a part or all of the first response as well To avoid this situation the controller should always read the response immediately after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL Device Clear before sending the second query First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Event Queue The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 33 events If more than 32 events stack up in the Event Queue the 32nd event is replaced by event code 350 Queue Overflow Read the Event Queue with the EVENT query which returns only the event number with the EVMSG query which returns the event number and a text description of t
346. nd Description DiSplay Returns current display settings DiSplay CLOCk Sets or returns the display of the date time stamp DiSplay FORMat Sets or returns the display format First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 17 Display Commands cont Command Command Groups Description DiSplay GRAticule Sets or returns the type of graticule that is displayed DiSplay INTENSITy Returns all display intensity settings DiSplay INTENSITy BACKLight Sets or returns the backlight intensity for the display DiSplay INTENSITy GRAticule Sets or returns the graticule intensity for the display DiSplay INTENSITy WAVEform Sets or returns the intensity of the waveforms DiSplay PERSistence Sets or returns display persistence setting DiSplay PICture AUTOContrast Sets or returns the video picture mode autocontrast setting DlSplay PlCture BRightness Sets or returns the video picture mode brightness setting DiSplay PlCture CONTRAst Sets or returns the video picture mode contrast setting DiSplay PlCture STATE Sets or returns the video picture mode setting DiSplay STYle DOTsonly Sets a dots only display DiSplay VECtorscope STATE DiSplay VECtorscope STsetting Sets or returns the video vectorscope state setting DiSplay VECtorscope TYPe Sets or returns the video vectorscope display type setting DiSplay VECtorscope TYse
347. nd or query Command messages may contain five element types defined in the following table First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 1 Command Syntax Commands Table 2 2 Command Message Elements Symbol Meaning lt Header gt This is the basic command name If the header ends with a question mark the command is a query The header may begin with a colon character If the command is concatenated with other commands the beginning colon is required Never use the beginning colon with command headers beginning with a star lt Mnemonic gt This is a header subfunction Some command headers have only one mnemonic If a command header has multiple mnemonics a colon character always separates them from each other lt Argument gt This is a quantity quality restriction or limit associated with the header Some commands have no arguments while others have multiple arguments A lt space gt separates arguments from the header A lt comma gt separates arguments from each other lt Comma gt A single comma is used between arguments of multiple argument commands Optionally there may be white space characters before and after the comma lt Space gt A white space character is used between a command header and the related argument Optionally a white space may consist of multiple white space characters Commands cause the instrument to
348. ne vertical point Note that waveform points are transmitted in the following order top to bottom then left to right An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre PT_ORder DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE PT_ORDER might return WFMOUTPRE PT_ORDER COL specifying that the waveform designated by the DATa SOUrce waveform is a Fast Acquisition waveform WFMOUTPRE PT_ORDER might return WFMOUTPRE PT_ORDER LINEAR specifying that the source waveform is a non Fast Acquisition waveform First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre WFld Query Only This query only command returns a string describing several aspects of the acquisition parameters for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMOutpre wFId Related Commands DATa SOUrce lt QString gt comprises the following comma separated fields documented in the tables below Returns Table 2 39 Waveform Suffixes Field Description Examples Source The source identification string as it appears in CH1 4 the front panel scale factor readouts Math1 3 Ref1 4 Coupling A string describing the vertical coupling of the AC coupling waveform the Source1 waveform in the case of DC coupl
349. nearest valid number INFInite disables the calibration due notifier display feature CALIBRATE FACTORY NOTLFY YEARS 1 5e0 sets the calibration due time to 1 5 years CALIBRATE FACTORY NOTIFY YEARS might return CALIBRATE FACTORY NOTIFY YEARS 1 5 0 indicating that the calibration due notifier will be displayed 1 5 years after the last calibration CALibrate FACtory STATus Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatile memory Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate FACtory STATus CALIBRATE FACTORY STATUS might return CALIBRATE FACTORY STATUS PASS indicating that factory calibration passed CALibrate FACtory STEPSTAtus Query Only Group 2 74 Returns pass during oscilloscope power on without regard to actual calibration status Returns pass or fail for the factory calibration step that most recently executed when factory calibration is in progress Use this query to synchronize programmed factory calibration steps Calibration and Diagnostic First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CALibrate FACtory STEPSTAtus CALIBRATE FACTORY STEPSTATUS might return CALIBRATE FACTORY STEPSTATUS FAIL if the last oscilloscope calibration step did not pass CALibrate FACtory STEPSTIMulus Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns i
350. nerseuadamennasde near Ben hdantaneee E Er A E EEEE 2 22 Measurement Command Group ccc cece eee e ence een nen e eens ene eee ene eee nee teen ene eS 2 23 Miscellaneous Command Group c cece cece ence eee nee eee eee e ene eee ene seen nee ea nent es 2 26 Save and Recall Command Group 0 cece cece cece nee ene nee ene ene eee enn e eee nee e ees 2 28 Search Command Group s i22 cs08cccedsesencs cones seneenceess duuecetnegesanrcavebetanscecedsasensecdedess 2 29 Status and Error Command Group cccee cece cece eee eee ene eee nee eee ee ene eee e nee nea 2 32 Trigger Command Group 06 cece cece nee nnn NEE EEE nee ene EEE EEE EEE EEE Ean EEE ES 2 33 Vertical Command Group vec 3 0ssccsedeesanesietistansesdetevsands dotds daneaueead tenses E 2 41 Waveform Transfer Command Group ccc cece eee e eee n cence en ee eee tenet ene seats n nee ennennees 2 43 Zoom Command Group ce cece cece cee eee ESE E E nen EEE EEE Eee EEE Een E EEE ES 2 48 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 0 cece cece cece e cece e eee ne eee nee ee eee n een eed 2 51 Status and EVENS sacra dias sane veeundvedednen seuss sake rrewdeanieuhvaua seine leh heneudnnesaanaba niles E E 3 1 ROGISUGIS erener toe ceonnae bined hibren renews ndehdiaweserdeiiuldenceoutshouehsvertoaserannenhins 3 1 COUCHES saves EE EE TE TAE E AEE E E E A EEEO 3 4 Event Handling Sequence 0 c ccc ccc ions nan A E iaa aSa A
351. nformation about an input signal required for calibration Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate FACtory STEPSTIMulus CALIBRATE FACTORY STEPSTIMULUS might return 2 volts on channel 1 indicating a 2 V signal should be applied to channel 1 CALibrate INTERNal No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This command no query form starts the internal signal path calibration SPC of the instrument You can use the CALibrate INTERNal STATus query to return the current status of the internal signal path calibration of the instrument Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate INTERNal CALibrate RESults SPC CALIBRATE INTERNAL starts the internal signal path calibration of the instrument First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 75 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CALibrate INTERNal STARt No Query Form This command no query form starts the internal signal path calibration SPC of the instrument This command is the same as the CALibrate INTERNal command You can use the CALibrate INTERNal STATus query to return the current status of the internal signal path calibration of the instrument Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate INTERNal STARt Related Commands CALibrate RESults SPC Examples CALIBRATE INTERNAL START starts the internal signal path calibration of the instrument CALibrate INTERNal STATus Query Only This que
352. ngs FASTAcq Query Only This query only command returns the state of Fast Acquisitions This command is equivalent to pressing the FASTACQ button on the front panel Group Acquisition 2 130 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Examples FASTAcq STATE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FASTAcq FASTACQ might return the following string for the current acquisition parameters FASTACQ STATE 0 This command sets or returns the state of Fast Acquisitions This command is equivalent to the FASTACQ button on the front panel Acquisition FASTACq STATE 0ON OFF lt NR1 gt FASTAcq STATE ON enables Fast Acquisitions mode OFF disables Fast Acquisitions mode lt NR1 gt 0 disables Fast Acquisitions mode any other value enables Fast Acquisitions mode FASTACQ STATE ON enables the Fast Acquisitions mode FASTACQ STATE might return FASTACQ STATE 1 indicating that Fast Acquisitions mode is currently active FILESystem Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands This query only command returns the directory listing of the current working directory This query is the same as the FILESystem DIR query File System FILESystem FILESystem COPy FILESystem CWD FILESystem DELEte FILESystem DIR FILESystem REName First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2
353. ning Examples CALIBRATE RESULTS SPC returns the results of the last SPC operation either PASS or FAIL CALibrate TEMPerature Query Only Returns the temperature during the last signal path compensation operation Group Calibration and Diagnostic First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 79 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt Query Only Syntax Examples Group Syntax Examples CH lt x gt BANdwidth 2 80 Group Syntax CALibrate TEMPerature CALIBRATE TEMPERATURE might return CALIBRATE TEMPERATURE 2 301 indicating that the instrument temperature during the last SPC operation was 23 C This query only command returns the vertical parameters for the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instruments This command is similar to selecting Vertical Setup from the Vertical menu Vertical CH lt x gt CH1 might return the following vertical parameters for channel 1 CH1 BANDWIDTH 1 0000E 09 COUPLING DC DESKEW0 0000E 00 OFFSET 0 0000E 00 POSITION 0 0000E 00 SCALE 5 0000E 01 TERMINATION 1 0000E 06 PROBCAL INIT PROBE GAIN 1 0000E 00 RESISTANCE 1 0000E 06 UNITS V ID TYPE 1X SERNUMBER N A CH1 PROBEFUNC EXTATTEN 1 0000E 00 EXTUNITS None CH1 LABEL NAME XPOS 5 YPOS 5 This command sets or returns the selectable l
354. nt sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period greater than or less than but not equal the time period specified in TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth within a 5 tolerance TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN LESSTHAN specifies that the duration of the A pulse will fall within defined high and low limits TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN MORETHAN indicating the conditions for generating a width trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth Group Syntax Arguments This commands sets or returns the width setting for the pulse width trigger Trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth wIDth lt NR3 gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth wIDth lt NR3 gt specifies the pulse width in seconds First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 293 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 5 0E 6 sets the pulse width to 5 us TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 2 0000E 9 indicating that the pulse width is set to 2 ns TRIGger A RUNT Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the current A runt trigger parameters This command query is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings Trigger TRIGger A RUNT TRIGGER A RUNT might return TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT LOGIC INPUT CH1 HIGH CH2 X CH3 X CH4 LOW TRIGG
355. o fields before rearming the trigger This command sets or returns the video line number on which the instrument triggers This command is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the Trig menu selecting Line in the Trigger on box and setting the line number Use the TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD command to actually trigger the instrument on the line that you specify with this command This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo LINE lt NR1 gt TRIGger A VIDeo LINE TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD lt NR1 gt argument is an integer that sets the video line number on which the instrument triggers The following table lists the valid choices depending on the active video standard Table 2 38 Video Line Numbering Ranges Video Standard Line Number Rabge CUSTOM 4 3000 NTSC 1 263 odd and 264 525 even PAL 1 625 SECAM 1 625 HD480P60 1 520 HD720P60 1 750 HD1080150 1 1125 HD1080160 1 1125 HD1080P24 1 1125 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 309 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples Table 2 38 Video Line Numbering Ranges cont Video Standard Line Number Rabge HD1080P25 1 1125 HD1080SF24 1 1125 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 23 sets the instrument to trigger on the line 23 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE might return TRIGger A VIDeo LINE 10 indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on line 10
356. o place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn LESSthan MOREthan EQual UNEQual OCCURS SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEN OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs LESSthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command MOREthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width more than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command EQUal argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period equal to the time period specified in SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTEQual argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period greater than or less than but not equal the time period specified in SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the width setting for a runt search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth
357. ock rising edge TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the clock source for the A logic trigger setup and hold input Trigger TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 EXT TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk SoUrce CH lt x gt specifies the input channel which ranges from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments EXT specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector located on the rear panel of the instrument TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 specifies channel 1 as the A logic setup and hold input TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH4 indicating that channel 4 is the clock source for the setup and hold input For the A logic trigger TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold Group Syntax Arguments 2 298 This command sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for the setup and hold trigger Trigger TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk THReshold lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk THReshold ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3 V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset TTL value
358. odule Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the data string length in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments This command sets or queries the binary data string to be used for CAN search if search condition is ID or IDANDDATA This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALUue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier lt bin gt is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype This command sets or queries the CAN Frame Type to be used if the search condition is FrameType First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 221 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA REMote ERRor OVERLoad SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA specifies a data frame REMote specifies a remote frame ERRor specifies an error frame OVERLoa
359. of 1 4 V as the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD 1 2000E 00 indicating that the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger is 1 2 V TRIGger A SETHold DATa Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the voltage threshold and data source for the setup and hold trigger This command is equivalent to selecting Setup Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current data setups Trigger TRIGger A SETHOId DATa TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 1 4000 SOURCE CH1 indicating the current trigger data settings TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger Trigger TRIGger A SETHOId DATa SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 EXT TRIGger A SETHOld DATa SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies the input channel which ranges from through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments EXT specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector located on the rear panel of the instrument First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 299 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as
360. of the screen E FPBinary specifies the floating point width 4 data The range is from 3 4 x 1038 to 3 4 x 1038 The center of the screen is 0 The upper limit is one division above the top of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the bottom of the screen The FPBinary argument is only applicable to math waveforms or ref waveforms saved from math waveforms m SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first This format is useful when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first This format is useful when transferring data to PCs SFPbinary specifies floating point data in IBM PC format The SFPbinary argument only works on math waveforms or ref waveforms saved from math waveforms First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 103 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples DATa SOUrce 2 104 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Table 2 32 DATa and WFMOutpre Parameter Settings DATa ENCdg WFMOutpre Settings Setting ENCdg BN_Fmt BYT_Or BYT_NR ASCii ASC N A N A 1 2 4 8 FAStest BIN RI FP MSB 1 2 4 RIBinary BIN RI MSB 1 2 8 RPBinary BIN RP MSB 1 2 8 FPBinary BIN FP MSB 4 SRIbinary BIN RI LSB 1 2 8 SRPbinary BIN RP
361. ogrammer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A PULse RUNT THReshold Query Only Group Syntax This query only command returns the upper and lower thresholds for the runt trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments Trigger TRIGger A PULSe RUNT THReshold TRIGger A PULse RUNT THReshold HIGH Group Syntax This command sets or returns the upper limit for the runt trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe RUNT THReshold HIGH TRIGger A PULse RUNT THReshold LOW Group Syntax This command sets or returns the lower limit for the A pulse runt trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe RUNT THReshold LOwW TRIGger A PULse RUNT WHEn Group This command sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it detects a runt This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A RUNT WHEn command Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 285 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger A PULSe RUNT WHEN TRIGger A PULse RUNT WIDth Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments
362. oller other than board 0 you must edit the source files accordingly The instrument is connected to the GPIB controller see above and is set to address 1 DEV1 If you want to use another address then you must edit the source files accordingly Each program requires adding the following source files to the associated VC project which you will create GPIBERR C GPIBREAD C GPIBWAIT C GPIBWRIT C In addition to the above source files you will also need to add the following files provided by National Instruments decl 32 h gpib 32 0bj To make an executable for any of the example programs in the Source directory perform the following steps 1 Install Microsoft Visual C Version 6 0 2 Install the National Instruments GPIB board and drivers 3 Copy the following source files from your National Instruments GPIB drivers directory to this directory Examples Source E decl 32 h gpib 32 0bj 1 Create a new Win32 Console Application project in Visual C located in this directory Examples Source For example if you want to build the Talker Listener application select this directory for the location and enter a suitable name for the project such as TL 2 Add the following Visual C source files to the project First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Programming Examples E GPIBERR C E GPIBREAD GPIBWAIT C E GPIBWRIT C 1 A
363. olute MID2 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 0 5 sets the mid reference level for the delay waveform to 0 5 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 0 5000E 00 indicating that the absolute mid2 reference level is set to 0 5 V MEASUrement REFLevel METHod 2 194 Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command specifies or queries the reference level units used for measurement calculations This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired reference level from the Units group box NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel METHod ABSolute PERCent MEASUrement REFLevel METHod ABSo lute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute commands This method is useful when precise values are required for example when designing to published interface specifications such as RS 232 C PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement
364. ommand sets or queries the search condition for SPI search This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition SS MISO MOSI MISOMOST SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition SS specifies the Slave Selection condition MISO specifies the Master In Slave Out condition MOST specifies the Master Out Slave In condition MISOMOST specifies the Master In Slave Out and Master Out Slave In conditions SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue Conditions 2 226 This command sets or queries the binary data string to be used for SPI search if search condition is MISO MISOMOSI This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue lt bin gt is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOSI OUT VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the binary data string to be used for SPI search if search condition is MOSI or MISOMOSI This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module
365. ommand sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame The sample rate is automatically adjusted at the same time to maintain a constant time per division The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record length This command is equivalent to adjusting the RESOLUTION knob on the front panel Horizontal HORizontal RESOlution lt NR1 gt HORi zontal RESOlution lt NR1 gt represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths which range from 500 through 400K data points For more information about valid data point ranges select Specifications from the Help menu and choose the Horizontal amp Acquisition tab HORIZONTAL RESOLUTION 50000 specifies that 50000 data points will be acquired for each record HORIZONTAL RESOLUTION might return HORIZONTAL RESOLUTION 5000 indicating that the horizontal record length is equal to 5000 data points HORizontal ROLL Query Only 2 150 Group This command queries the Roll Mode status Use Roll Mode when you want to view data at very slow sweep speeds It is useful for observing data samples on the screen as they occur Horizontal First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Examples ID Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples IDN Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORi zontal ROLL
366. on only has meaning when WFMOutpre ENCdg is set to BIN An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 335 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre ENCdg Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 336 Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre BYT_Or LSB MSB wFMOutpre BYT_Or WFMOutpre ENCdg LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant outgoing byte of waveform data to be transmitted first WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR might return WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR LSB indicating that the least significant data byte will be transmitted first This command sets and queries the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre ENCdg ASC BIN wFMOutpre ENCdg DATa ENCdg WFMOutpre BYT_Nr WFMOutpre BYT_Or WFMOutpre BIT_Nr WFMOutpre BN_ Fmt ASC specifies that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII format Waveforms internally stored as integers will be sent as lt NR1 gt numbers while those stored as floating point will be sent as lt NR3 gt numbers BIN specifies that outgoing data is to be in a binar
367. on ratios greater than 100 or less than 1 generate errors low must be greater than or equal to 1 uW Extinction Ratio High Low EYEHei ght measures the vertical opening of an eye diagram in volts EYEWidth measures the width of an eye diagram in seconds FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value default is 90 to a low reference value default is 10 FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Frequency is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second HIGH measures the High reference 100 level sometimes called Topline of a waveform You can also limit the High measurement normally taken over the entire waveform record to a gated region on the waveform HITs histogram hits measures the number of points in or on the histogram box LOW measures the Low reference 0 level sometimes called Baseline of a waveform MAXimum finds the maximum amplitude This value is the most positive peak voltage found It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement METHod command the maximum measurement measures the voltage of the highest nonzero bin in vertical histograms or the time of the right most bin in horizontal histograms MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated
368. onth First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual DDT Examples Group Syntax Related Commands DESE Arguments Examples Group Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATE 2000 01 24 specifies that the date is set to January 24 2000 DATE might return DATE 2000 01 24 indicating the current date is set to January 24 2000 This command allows you to specify a command or a list of commands that are executed when the instrument receives a TRG command or the GET GPIB interface message Define Device Trigger DDT is a special alias that the TRG command uses Miscellaneous DDT lt Block gt lt QString gt DDT ALlas TRG lt Block gt is a complete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 80 characters The format of this argument is always returned as a query lt QString gt is a complete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 80 characters DDT OACQUIRE STATE RUN specifies that the acquisition system will be started each time a TRG command is sent This command sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Re
369. or all single channel measurements and specifies the reference source to measure to when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 8 This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu selecting a measurement type of either Phase or Delay and then choosing the desired measurement source Tip Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types which require both a target Source and reference Source2 source First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt REF lt x gt MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 Related Commands MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Arguments CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models MATH lt y gt is a math waveform The y variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models REF lt x gt is a reference waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS4 SOURCE2 CH1 specifies CH1 as the delay to source when making delay measurement
370. or either The read or write is indicated by the R W bit in the I2C protocol This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection READ specifies read as the data direction WRITE specifies write as the data direction NOCARE specifies either as the data direction TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA DIRECTION WRITE specifies write as the 12C data direction First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SlZe This command sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for I2C trigger if the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe lt NR3 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C DATa SIZe Arguments lt NR3 gt is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue This command sets or queries the binary data string used for I2C triggering if the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue lt bin gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa VALue Arguments lt bin gt is the binary data string with the number of bits spe
371. ormats itself as a valid set command When header is off the response includes only the values This may make it easier to parse and extract the information from the response The table below shows the difference in responses Table 2 3 Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses Query Header Off Header On TIME 44 30 00 TIME 14 30 00 ACQuire NUMAVg 100 ACQUIRE NUMAVG 100 Command Parts Header Comma S555 SAVe WAVEform CH1 REF3 Mnemonics Space Arguments Clearing the Instrument You can clear the Output Queue and reset the instrument to accept a new command or query by using the selected Device Clear DCL GPIB function Refer to your GPIB library documentation for further details about the selected Device Clear operation First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 3 Command Syntax Command Entry 2 4 Abbreviating Concatenating The following rules apply when entering commands m You can enter commands in upper or lower case You can precede any command with white space characters White space characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through 09 and OB through 20 hexadecimal 0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal The instrument ignores commands consisting of any combination of white space characters and line feeds You can abbreviate many instrument commands Each command in this documentation shows the abbreviations in
372. ory default setup values Command Default Values MATH lt 1 4 gt DEFINE MATH lt 1 4 gt LABEL NAME MATH lt 1 4 gt LABEL XPOS 1 0000 MATH lt 1 4 gt LABEL YPOS lt 1 gt 600 0000E 3 lt 2 gt 200 0000E 3 lt 3 gt 200 0000E 3 lt 4 gt 600 0000E 3 MATH lt 1 4 gt NUMAVG 2 MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL CENTER 312 5000E 6 MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL GATEPOS 0 0000 MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL GATEWIDTH 2 0000E 6 MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL LOCK 0 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Default Setup Values MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL MAG DB MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL PHASE DEGREES MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL REFLEVEL 20 0000 MATHs1 4 gt SPECTRAL REFLEVELOFFSET 223 6000E 3 MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL RESBW 1000 0000E 3 MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL SPAN 625 0000E 6 MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL SUPPRESS 200 0000 MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL UNWRAP 0 MATH lt 1 4 gt SPECTRAL WINDOW GAUSSIAN MATH lt 1 4 gt UNITSTRING y MATH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL POSITION 0 0000 MATH lt 1 4 gt VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 MATHVAR VAR lt 1 8 gt 0 0000 Measurement Default Values The following table lists the Measurement factory default setup values Command Default Values MEASUREMENT GATING OFF MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREM
373. ory to the default directory C TekScope the next time the instrument is powered on or the next time you execute a file system command The current working directory is retained between power cycles First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command supports the permutations of file and directory names that are supported by Microsoft Windows E Relative path names for example Temp Absolute path names for example C Windows System Implied relative path names for example newfile text becomes C TekScope newfile txt if the current working directory is C TekScope File System FILESystem CwD lt new working directory path gt lt new working directory path gt is a quoted string that defines the current working a directory name can be up to 128 characters FILESYSTEM CwD C TekScope images sets the current working directory to images FILESYSTEM CwD might return FILESYSTEM CWD C TekScope Waveforms indicating that the current working directory is set to Waveforms FILESystem DELEte No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command no query form deletes a named file It does not delete directories Use the FILESystem RMDir command to delete a directory File System FILESystem DELEte lt file path gt FILESystem COPy FILE
374. ostic CALibrate RESults FACtory Frequency CALIBRATE RESULTS FACTORY FREQUENCY might return CALIBRATE RESULTS FACTORY FREQUENCY PASS CALibrate RESults FACtory Trigger Query Only Group Syntax Examples 2 78 This query only command returns the status of internal and factory trigger calibration without performing any calibration operations Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate RESults FACtory Trigger CALIBRATE RESULTS FACTORY TRIGGER might return CALIBRATE RESULTS FACTORY TRIGGER PASS First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CALibrate RESults FACtory Voltage Query Only This query only command returns the status of internal and factory voltage calibration without performing any calibration operations Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate RESults FACtory voltage Examples CALIBRATE RESULTS FACTORY VOLTAGE might return CALIBRATE RESULTS FACTORY VOLTAGE PASS CALibrate RESults SPC Query Only This query only command returns the status of the SPC operation However this query does not cause an SPC to be run Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate RESults SPC Related Commands CAL Returns INIT indicates that PASS indicates that the last SPC operation passed FAIL indicates that the last SPC operation failed SEQERROR RUNNING indicates that the SPC operation is run
375. oupling First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOISErej selects DC low sensitivity TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING DC selects DC for the B trigger coupling TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING might return TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING ATRIGGER for the B trigger coupling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the slope for the B trigger This command is equivalent to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the Slope Trigger TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe TRIGger B EDGE RISe argument specifies the trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL argument specifies the trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE FALL sets the B edge trigger to occur on the falling slope TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE might return TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE RISE indicating that the B edge trigger occurs on the rising slope TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax This command sets or returns the source for the B trigger This command is equivalent to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired setting from the Source drop down list Trigger TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce CH lt x gt EXT TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk W
376. ow pass bandwidth limit filter of the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instruments This is equivalent to selecting Bandwidth from the Vertical menu The query form of this command always returns the maximum bandwidth of the channel Vertical CH lt x gt BANdwidth TwEnty Twofi fty FUL lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt BANdwi dth First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Twenty sets the upper bandwidth limit to 20 MHz Twofifty sets the upper bandwidth limit to 250 MHz FUL disables any optional bandwidth limiting The specified channel operates at its maximum attainable bandwidth lt NR3 gt argument is a double precision ASCII string The instrument rounds this value to an available bandwidth using geometric rounding and then uses this value set the upper bandwidth Examples CH1 BANDWIDTH TWENTY sets the bandwidth of channel 1 to 20 MHz CH2 BANDWIDTH for TDS5052B and TDS5054B instruments might return CH2 BANDWIDTH 500 0000E 06 indicating that there is no bandwidth limiting on channel 2 For TDS5104 instruments this query might return CH2 BANDWIDTH 1 0000E 09 indicating that there is no bandwidth limiting on channel 2 CH lt x gt COUPling This command sets or returns the input attenuator coupling settin
377. owest values of the waveform record This selection is best for examining waveforms with no large flat portions of a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves Auto chooses the best method histogram or minmax for each dataset MEASUREMENT METHOD HISTOGRAM specifies that the high and low reference levels are set statistically MEASUREMENT METHOD might return MEASUREMENT METHOD MINMAX indicating that the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel Query Only This query only command returns the current reference level parameters This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then viewing the current Reference Levels settings Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevel Examples MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL might return these reference level settings MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD ABSOLUTE ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000E 00 LOW 0 0000E 00 MID1 0 0000E 00 mMID2 0 0000E 00 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 9 0000E 01 LOW 1 0000 01 MID1 5 0000E 01 MID2 5 0000E 01 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH This command sets or returns the high reference level and is the upper reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Level
378. patibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt command Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate HIGHLimit TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate LOWLimit This command sets or returns the lower most negative transition trigger threshold This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A LO Werthreshold CH lt x gt command Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate LOWLimit TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate POLarity This command sets or returns the polarity for the transition trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity command Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate POLarity POSitive NEGative EITher TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate POLarity TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate SOUrce This command sets or returns the source for transition trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce command Group Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 287 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate SOUrce TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold Query Only Group Syntax E
379. perform a specific function or change one of the settings Commands have the structure lt Header gt lt Space gt lt Argument gt lt Comma gt lt Argument gt A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchical or tree structure The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off the previous one Commands at a higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level The leading colon always returns you to the base of the command tree First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax Queries Queries cause the instrument to return status or setting information Queries have the structure m lt Header gt E lt Header gt lt Space gt lt Argument gt lt Coma gt lt Argument gt You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless otherwise noted These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics below the specified branch or level For example HIStogram STATistics STDdev returns the standard deviation of the histogram while HIStogram STATistics returns all the histogram statistics and HIStogram returns all the histogram parameters Headers You can control whether the instrument returns headers as part of the query response Use the HEADer command to control this feature If header is on the query response returns command headers then f
380. play only and is equivalent to selecting Display Persistence from the Display menu Display DISplay PERSistence CLEAR AUTO MINImum INFInite DISplay PERSistence CLEAR specifies the time in seconds that waveform points are displayed on the screen INFInite displays waveform points until a control change resets the acquisition system AUTO specifies that the waveform persistence is controlled by the front panel WAVEFORM INTENSITY knob MINImum specifies that the waveform persistence is set to the minimum value of 0 0E0 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE VARPersist sets the persistence aspect of the display to fade DISPLAY PERSISTENCE might return DISPLAY PERSISTENCE OFF indicating that the persistence aspect of the display is disabled DiSplay PlCture AUTOContrast 2 116 Sets or returns the video picture mode autocontrast setting First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Requires DPO40VID application module Display DISplay PICture AUTOContrast OFF ON lt NR1 gt DISplay PICture AUTOContrast DISplay PICture BRIghtness DISplay PICture CONTRAst DISplay PICture STATE OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 disables picture autocontrast mode ON or lt NR1 gt 0 enables picture autocontrast mode DISPLAY PICTURE AUTOCONTRAST might return DISPLAY PICTURE AUTOCONTRAST
381. plerate Returns the maximum real time sample rate ACQuire MODe Returns the number of acquisitions that have occurred ACQuire NUMACq Sets or returns number of acquisitions for an averaged waveform ACQuire NUMAVg Sets or returns number of acquisitions for envelope waveform ACQuire NUMEnv Sets or returns the number of samples that make up a WfmDB for single sequence mode and Mask Pass Fail Completion Test ACQuire STATE Sets or returns whether the acquisition is continuous or single sequence ACQuire STOPAfter Returns acquisition parameters First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 11 Command Groups Table 2 13 Acquisition Commands cont Command Description FASTAcq Enables disables or returns state of Fast Acquisition mode FASTAcq STATE Returns the Fast Acquisition state Alias Command Group Alias commands allow you to define new commands as a sequence of standard commands You may find this useful when repeatedly using the same commands to perform certain tasks like setting up measurements Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to substitute parameters into alias bodies The alias mechanism obeys the following rules The alias name must consist of a valid IEEE 488 2 message unit which may not appear in a message preceded by a colon comma or a command or query program header The alias name may not appear in a message followed by prog
382. polarity setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Sets or returns the source setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn sets or returns the condition setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE Sets or returns the width setting for a runt search Sets or returns the clock slope setting for a setup hold search First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Search Commands cont Command Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the clock source setting for SETHold CLOCk SOUrce an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the clock threshold setting for SETHold CLOCk THReshold an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the data source setting for SETHold DATa SOUrce an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Sets or returns the data threshold setting for an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the hold time setting for an SETHold HOLDTime setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the setup time setting for an SETHold SETTime setup hold search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Sets or returns
383. r 2 325 WFMInpre BYT_ Or 2 326 WFMInpre ENCdg 2 326 WFMInpre NR_ Pt 2 327 WFMInpre PT_Fmt 2 328 WFMiInpre PT_Off 2 329 WFMInpre WFId 2 329 WFMInpre XINcr 2 329 WFMInpre XUNit 2 330 WFMInpre XZEro 2 330 WFMiInpre YMUIt 2 331 WFMinpre Y OFF 2 332 WFMiInpre YUNit 2 332 WFMInpre Y ZEro 2 333 WFMOtutpre 2 333 WFMOutpre BIT_Nr 2 334 WFMOutpre BN_Fmt 2 334 WFMOutpre BYT_Nr 2 335 WFMOutpre BYT_Or 2 336 WFMOutpre ENCdg 2 336 WFMOutpre NR_Pt 2 337 WFMOutpre PT_Fmt 2 337 WFMOutpre PT_Off 2 338 WFMOutpre PT_ORder 2 338 WFMOutpre WFId 2 339 WFMOutpre XINcr 2 340 WFMOutpre XUNit 2 341 WFMOutpre XZEro 2 341 WFMOutpre YMUIt 2 342 WFMOutpre YOFf 2 342 WFMOutpre YUNit 2 343 WFMOutpre Y ZEro 2 343 WAVFrm 2 323 Index 15 Index WFMInpre 2 324 WFMInpre BIT_Nr 2 324 WFMInpre BN_Fmt 2 325 WFMInpre BYT_Nr 2 325 WFMInpre BYT_ Or 2 326 WFMInpre ENCdg 2 326 WFMInpre NR_ Pt 2 327 WFMInpre PT_Fmt 2 328 WFMInpre PT_Off 2 328 WFMInpre WFId 2 329 WFMInpre XINcr 2 329 WFMInpre XUNit 2 330 WFMInpre XZEro 2 330 WFMInpre YMUIt 2 331 WFMnpre Y OFF 2 331 WFMInpre YUNit 2 332 WFMInpre YZEro 2 333 WFMOutpre 2 333 WFMOutpre BIT_Nr 2 334 WFMOutpre BN_ Fmt 2 334 WFMOutpre BYT_Nr 2 335 WFMOutpre BYT_Or 2 335 WFMOutpre ENCdg 2 336 WFMOutpre NR_Pt 2 337 WFMOutpre PT_Fmt 2 337 WFMOutpre PT_Off 2 338 WFMOutpre PT_ORder 2 338 WFMOutpre WFId 2 339 WFMOutpre X
384. r defined variable to the expression Refer to the MATH VAR lt x gt command Executes an addition subtraction multiplication or division operation on the following expression and are also unary use to negate the expression that follows Parentheses provide a way to control evaluation order in an expression The comma is used to separate the from and to waveforms in Delay and Phase measurement operations RMS VAR1 VAR2 Fana 1 0 E Specifies a numeric value in optional scientific notation Examples MATH1 DEFINE CH1 CH2 adds the Ch waveform and Ch 2 waveform storing the results in Math 2 MATH DEFINE might return MATHL DEFINE CH2 REF2 as the expression that defines Math 1 MATH 1 HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the math horizontal display position for FFT or math waveforms that only have reference waveform source waveforms Group Math 2 158 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH 1 HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt MATH 1 HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt is the of the math waveform divided by 100 that precedes center screen It can vary from 0 0e0 to 1 0e0 MATH HORIZONTAL POSITION 1 0E 1 sets the horizontal position to 10 pretrigger MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the m
385. ram date a colon comma or question mark An alias name must be distinct from any keyword or keyword short form An alias name cannot be redefined without first being deleted using one of the alias deletion functions Alias names do not appear in response messages The Alias commands are defined in Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats Deviations between that standard and what is specified here will be considered DPO4000 series errors unless specifically noted in the command description in this document Table 2 14 Alias Commands Command Description ALlas Sets or returns the alias state ALlas CATalog Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels ALlas DEFine Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label ALlas DELEte Removes a specified alias ALlas DELEte ALL Deletes all existing aliases 2 12 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 14 Alias Commands cont Command Groups Command Description ALlas DELEte NAMe Removes a specified alias ALlas STATE Sets or returns the alias state Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group The Calibration and Diagnostic commands provide information about the current state of instrument calibration and allow you to initiate internal signal path calibration SPC or execute diagnostic tests Commands that are specific to factory calibration are not described in this manual however the
386. rammer Manual Index MATH 1 HORizontal POSition 2 158 MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle 2 159 MATH 1 HORizontal UNITs 2 159 MATH 1 SPECTral MAG 2 160 MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow 2 160 MATH 1 VERTical POSition 2 162 MATH 1 VERTical SCAle 2 163 MATH 1 VERTical UNITs 2 164 MATH 1 DEFIne 2 157 MATH 1 TYPe 2 161 MATHVAR VAR lt x gt 2 164 MATHVAR 2 164 Measurement commands MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot 2 166 MEASUrement MMed DELay DIREction 2 168 MEASUrement MMed DELay EDGE lt x gt 2 168 MEASUrement IMMed DELay 2 167 MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE 2 169 MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 2 170 MEASUrement IMMed TYPe 2 170 MEASUrement IMMed UNIts 2 175 MEASUrement IMMed VALue 2 175 MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt 2 176 MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ 2 176 MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT 2 177 MEASUrement INDICators STATE 2 177 MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt 2 178 MEASUrement INDICators 2 176 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt 2 179 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIREction 2 179 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt 2 180 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay 2 179 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum 2 181 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN 2 181 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum 2 181 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 2 182 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 2 183 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE 2 183 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev 2 184 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe 2 184 MEASUrement M
387. rch is determined by the state of the other inputs at the clock transition If no clock source is defined then the logic search is determined only by the state of the inputs Group Search First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 231 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments SEARCH SEARCH lt xX gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies a channel input as the clock source where lt x gt 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the clock source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut MATH HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut MATH HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments 2 232 This command sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut REF lt x gt HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut REF lt x gt HI
388. rder WAVEFORMS waveform count measures the number of waveforms used to calculate the histogram Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE FREQUENCY defines measurement 2 as a measurement of the frequency of a waveform MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE RMS indicating that measurement is defined to measure the RMS value of a waveform MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts Query Only This query only command returns the units associated with the specified measurement Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 8 Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts Related Commands MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS1 UNITS might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 UNIts indicating units for measurement 1 are set to percent MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue Query Only This query only command returns the value that has been calculated for the measurement specified by lt x gt which ranges from through 8 This command is equivalent to selecting Display Statistics from the Measure menu and then choosing Value from the drop down list to display all measurement values on screen NOTE This is the displayed value in the on screen display If measurement statistics are enabled a new value is calculated with every waveform In addition this value is updated about every 1 3 second If you are acquiring a long acquisition record the instrument may take longer to update
389. reen direction The channel offset range is either 100 V 10 V or 1 0 V depending on the vertical scale factor Table 2 31 Vertical Scale Adjust Factors From From From 0 001 0 104 1 01 to When internal scale adjust gain is to 0 1 to 1 0 100 Product of Offset range Probe gain and transducer 10V 100V 100 0V gain is NOTE The above table describes instrument behavior only when no probe is attached and when the external attenuation factor is 1 0 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 83 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples CH lt x gt POSition 2 84 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Vertical CH lt x gt OFFSet lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt OFFSet CH lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt is the offset value for the specified channel CH3 OFFSet 2 0E 3 sets the offset for channel 3 to 2 mV CH4 OFFSet might return CH4 OFFSET 1 0000E 03 indicating that the offset for channel 4 is set to 1 mV This command sets or returns the vertical position of the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instruments The position value is applied to the signal before it is digitized This command is equivalent to selecting Position Scale from the Vertical menu and either vi
390. rement MEAS lt x gt VALue Returns measurement lt x gt units Returns the value of measurement lt x gt MEASUrement METHod Sets or returns the method used for calculating reference levels MEASUrement REFLevel Returns the current reference level parameters MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH Sets or returns the top reference level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute _LOW Sets or returns the low reference level for rise time First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 25 Command Groups Table 2 23 Measurement Commands cont Command Description MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID Sets or returns the mid reference level for measurements MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 Sets or returns the mid reference level for delay to measurements MEASUrement REFLevel METHod Sets or returns the method for assigning high and low reference levels MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH Sets or returns the top reference percent level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW Sets or returns the low reference percent level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID Sets or returns the mid reference percent level for waveform measurements MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 Sets or returns the mid reference percent level for second waveform measurements MEASUrement SNAPShot Displays the measurement snapshot
391. rement parameters for the displayed measurement specified by x which can range from through 8 This query command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and viewing the Measurements table then choosing the Time tab clicking the Delay button and viewing the Delay Edge and Search Direction settings Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE O TYPE UNDEFINED UNITS V SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH1 SOURCE1 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE2 SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000 LOW 0 0000 MID1 0 0000 MID2 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 0000 LOW 10 0000 MID1 50 0000 MID2 50 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 METHOD HISTOGRAM NOISE HIGH First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the number of values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Some values may have been ignored because they generated an error Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 8 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt MEASUREMENT MEAS3 COUNT might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 COUNT 3 24700000
392. rence level is set to 65 of HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the percent where 100 is equal to HIGH that is used to calculate the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of delay measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then entering the Percentage Mid2 Ref value NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default mid reference level is 50 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 40 sets the mid2 reference level to 40 of HIGH First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 197 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 45 indicating that the percentage mid2 reference level is set to 45 of HIGH MEASUrement SNAPShot No Query Form Displays the measurement snapshot list on
393. returns the condition for generating an A logic pattern trigger with respect to the defined input pattern This command is equivalent to selecting A Event Main Trigger Setup from the Trig menu selecting Pattern for Trigger Type and choosing a trigger condition from the Pattern drop down list which is located in the Trigger When group box Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEnN TRUe FALSe _LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion TRIGger A LOGIc INPut TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit TRUe argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern becomes true FALSe argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern becomes false First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LESSThan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the specific pattern is true less than the time set by the TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit command MOREThan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the specific pattern is true longer than the specified time set by the TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN FALSE specifies to trigger the A logic pattern when the pattern becomes false TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE indicating t
394. returns the input settings for the specified trigger channel TRIGger A LOGIc Returns all A trigger logic settings TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss Sets or returns the type of A trigger logic TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Sets or returns the logical combination of the input channels for the A logic trigger TRIGger A LOGIc INPut Returns the A logic trigger input for channels 1 3 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Specifies or returns the input settings for the specified logic trigger channel TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Sets the polarity of the clock channel TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns the channel to use as the clock source TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern Returns the conditions for generating an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH2 Sets or returns the A logic trigger input for channel 2 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH4 Sets or returns the A logic trigger input for channel 4 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Sets or returns the condition for generating the A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A SETHold Returns clock edge po
395. returns the time base trigger delay mode This command is equivalent to choosing Delay Mode On from the Horiz Acq menu Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal MAIn DELay MODe ON OFF lt NR1 gt HORi zontal MAIn DELay MODe Related Commands HORizontal MAIn DELay TIMe Arguments ON enables the time base trigger delay mode OFF disables the time base trigger delay mode lt NR1 gt 0 disables the time base trigger delay mode any other value enables the time base trigger delay mode Examples HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE ON enables the time base trigger delay mode HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE might return HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE 1 indicating that the time base trigger delay mode is currently enabled HORizontal MAlIn DELay STATe This command sets or returns the time base trigger delay mode This command is equivalent to choosing Delay Mode On from the Horiz Acq menu Group Horizontal First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 145 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples HORi zontal MAIn DELay STATe ON OFF lt NR1 gt HORi zontal MAIn DELay STATe HORizontal MAIn DELay TIMe ON enables the time base trigger delay mode OFF disables the time base trigger delay mode lt NR1 gt 0 disables the time base trigger delay mode any other value enables the time base trigger delay mode HORIZONTAL MAIN DELAY STATE ON ena
396. rintf fashion Another way to enter characters is xnn where the nn is the hexadecimal value of the character to display An advantage of these methods is that any controller program can be used Another advantage is it s easy to access characters with the high bit set that is those characters with a decimal value greater than 127 An alternate way to enter certain characters is with a backslash followed by a single character following standard Unix as follows E nnewline carriage return and linefeed m backslash is required to get a backslash character m j Japanese character encoding the next two characters make one hexadecimal JIS value as explained later thorizontal tab the next 2 characters specify the pixel column to tab to as explained earlier E u Unicode encoding the next two characters make one hexadecimal Unicode value as explained later If a backslash is followed by an undefined special character the backslash is ignored and the character following it is accepted as is NOTE The use of any escape codes other than those described above may produce unpredictable results To specify Russian Chinese and Korean use the 16 bit Unicode value characters as shown in the example disk files For additional information see The Unicode Standard Version 2 0 Only characters used in the oscilloscope are available Unicode values are represented in a quoted string as uxxyy where xx and yy are both hex
397. rm points This command sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform Waveform Transfer WFMInpre XUNit lt QString gt WFMInpre XUNit WFMOutpre XUNit lt QString gt contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the horizontal unit of measure for the incoming waveform WFMINPRE XUNIT HZ specifies that the horizontal units for the incoming waveform are hertz WFMINPRE XUNIT might return WFMINPRE XUNIT s indicating that the horizontal units for the incoming waveform are seconds This command sets or returns the sub sample time between the trigger sample designated by PT OFF and the occurrence of the actual trigger on the incoming waveform This value is used to compute TTOFF for the incoming waveform and is expressed in terms of WFMInpre XUNit Waveform Transfer First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YMUIt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YOFf Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMInpre XZEro lt NR3 gt WFMInpre XZEro WFMInpre PT_Off WFMInpre XINcr WFMInpre XUNit WFMOutpre XZEro lt NR3 gt argument is a floating point value that ranges from WFMInpre XINcr to 0 WFMINPRE XZERO 5 7E 6 specifies that the trigger actually occurred 5 7 us before the sample designated by WFMInpre PT_ Off WFMINPRE XZERO might return WFM
398. rn WHEn LESSLimit command but less than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command UNEQual argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the specific pattern is true less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit command or longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern search to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt specifies the maximum amount of time to hold the pattern true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern search to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn MORELimit lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn MORELimit lt NR3 gt spe
399. rn the string ALIAS CATALOG SETUPL TESTMENUL DEFAULT showing that there are three aliases named SETUP1 TESTMENU1 and DEFAULT This command assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label These messages are then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command or query provided that ALIas STATE has been turned on The query form of this command returns the definitions of a selected alias NOTE Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an error To give a new alias the name of an existing alias the existing alias must first be deleted Alias ALIas DEFine lt QString gt lt gt lt QString gt lt Block gt ALIas DEFine ALlIas STATE The first lt QString gt is the alias label This label cannot be a command name Labels must start with a letter and can contain only letters numbers and underscores other characters are not allowed The label must be less than or equal to 12 characters The second lt QString gt or lt Block gt is a complete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 256 characters ALIAS DEFINE STL RECALL SETUP 5 AUTOSET EXECUTE SELECT CH1 ON defines an alias named ST1 that sets up the instrument First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
400. rop down list Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat INTERNal MATHCad SPREADSheet SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat Related Commands CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAVEform WFMInpre NR_ Pt WFMOutpre NR_ Pt Arguments INTERNa specifies that waveforms are saved in an internal format using a wfm filename extension These files can be recalled as reference waveforms When this argument is specified the settings specified via the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands have no meaning as the entire waveform is saved MATHCad specifies that waveforms are saved in MathCad format using a dat filename extension When saving in this format waveform values are delimited with new lines MathCad format enables easy import of waveform data into MathCad or MATLAB For FastAcq waveforms data is imported as a matrix For these formats waveform header and timing information is saved in a separate header file MathCad format header files use a_hdr dat extension MATLab specifies that waveforms are saved in Matlab format using a dat filename extension When saving in this format waveform values are delimited with new lines MATLAB format enables easy import of waveform data into MathCad or MATLAB For FastAcq waveforms data is imported as a matrix For these formats waveform header and timing information is saved in a separate header file MATLAB format header files use a _hdr dat extension SPREADSHEETCSv specifies that
401. rst Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 49 Command Groups First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 50 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire Query Only This query only command returns the following current acquisition parameters m Stop after Acquisition state Mode Number of envelopes Number of averages m Repetitive signals Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire Related Commands ACQuire MODe ACQuire NUMACq ACQuire NUMAVsg ACQuire NUMEnv ACQuire STOPA fter Examples ACQUIRE might return the following string for the current acquisition parameters ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP STATE 1 MODE SAMPLE NUMENV 10 NUMAVG 16 NUMSAMPLES 16000 SAMPLINGMODE IT ACQuire MAXSamplerate Query Only Returns the maximum real time sample rate which varies from model to model Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire MAXSamplerate Examples ACQUIRE MAXSAMPLERATE might return 2 5e9 in a DPO4034 indicating the maximum real time sample rate is 2 5GS s First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 51 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire MODe 2 52 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments This command sets or returns the acquisition mode of the instrument This affects all live waveforms This command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal Acquisition from the Horiz Acq menu and then
402. runt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Sets or returns the minimum width for A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE Sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold Sets or returns the clock source for the A logic trigger setup and hold input Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Sets or returns the hold time for the setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A TRANsition RISE Fall DELTatime TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transition value Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse transition trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Sets or returns the source for transition trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Sets or returns the relationship of delta time to transitioning signal TRIGger A TYPe Sets or queries the type of A trigger TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets the upper threshold for the channel selected TRIGger A VIDeo
403. ry Only Group Syntax Returns Returns a boolean value to indicate whether the acquisition system is in the preview state Horizontal HORi zontal PREViewstate lt NR1 gt if the acquisition system is in the preview state lt NR1 gt 0 if the acquisition system is not in the preview state HORizontal RECOrdlength Group Syntax This command sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record length This command is equivalent to selecting Resolution from the Horiz Acq menu and then entering the desired Rec Length Horizontal HORizontal RECOrdlength lt NR1 gt HORi zontal RECOrdlength First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 149 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples lt NR1 gt represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths which range from 500 through 400K data points For more information about valid data point ranges select Specifications from the Help menu and choose the Horizontal amp Acquisition tab HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 50000 specifies that 50000 data points will be acquired for each record HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH might return HORIZONTAL RECOrdlength 5000 indicating that the horizontal record length is equal to 5000 data points HORizontal RESOlution Group Syntax Arguments Examples This c
404. ry only command returns the current status of the instrument internal signal path calibration for the last SPC operation Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate INTERNal STATus Related Commands CAL First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 76 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Returns Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This query will return one of the following INIT indicates the instrument has not had internal signal path calibration run WARMUP indicates the instrument has not warmed up for the required time to perform signal path calibration PASS indicates that the signal path calibration completed successfully m FAIL indicates that the signal path calibration did not complete successfully TEMPDRIFT indicates that the instrument has not reached a state of stable temperature adequate for performing signal path calibration E RUNNING indicates that the signal path calibration is currently running CALIBRATE INTERNAL STATUS might return CALIBRATE INTERNAL STATUS INIT indicating that the current status of the internal signal path calibration is that it has not been run CALibrate RESults Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the status of internal and factory calibrations without performing any calibration operations The results returned do not include the calibration status of attached probes The CALibrate RE
405. s command sets and returns the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms contain as specified by the DATa SOUrce command Note that values will be constrained according to the underlying waveform data This specification is only meaningful when WFMOutpre ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMOutpre BN_ Fmt is set to either RI or RP An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre BIT_Nr lt NR1 gt wFMOutpre BIT_Nr DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BN_ Fmt WFMOutpre ENCdg lt NR1 gt number of bits per data point can be 8 16 32 or 64 WFMOUTPRE BIT_NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for incoming RI and RP binary format data WFMOUTPRE BIT_NR might return WFMOUTPRE BIT_NR 8 indicating that outgoing RI or RP binary format data uses 8 bits per waveform point This command sets or returns the format of binary data for outgoing waveforms specified by the DATa SOUrce command An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre BN_Fmt RI RP WFMOutpre BN_Fmt DATa SOUrce First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples WFMOutpre BYT_Nr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre BYT_Or Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RI specifies signed integer data point representation RP specifies positiv
406. s from the Measure menu and then entering the Absolute High Ref value NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH Related Commands MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TY Pe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe Arguments lt NR3 gt is the high reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 191 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 1 71 sets the high reference level to 1 71 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 1 7100E 00 indicating that the absolute high reference level is set to 1 71 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute _LOW Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the low reference level and is the lower reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then entering the Absolute Low Ref value NOTE this command
407. s the termination parameter and translates this enumeration into one of the two float values This command is equivalent to selecting Termination from the Vertical menu or toggling between termination values from the VERTICAL area of the front panel Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt TERmination lt FIFty MEG NR3 gt CH lt x gt TERmination Arguments FIFty sets the channel input resistance to 50 Q MEG sets the channel input resistance to 1 MQ lt NR3 gt specifies the channel input resistance which can be specified as 50 or 1 000 000 Q Examples CH4 TERMINATION 50 0E 0 establishes 50 Q impedance on channel 1 CH2 TERMINATION might return CH2 TERMINATION 50 0E 0 indicating that channel 2 is set to 50 Q impedance CH lt x gt YUNits This command sets or returns the units for the specified channel to a custom string String arguments are case insensitive and any unsupported units will generate an error Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt YUNits lt QString gt CH lt x gt YUNitS CLEARMenu No Query Form Clears the current menu from the display This command is equivalent to pressing the front panel MENU OFF button First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 90 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Miscellaneous Syntax CLEARMenu CLS No Query Form This command no query form clears the following m Event Queue m Standard Event Status Register Stat
408. set is set to 3 0 then the input signals equal to 3 0 are displayed 2 0 divisions above the center of the screen Be aware that autoscaling occurs when a math waveform is first defined and enabled or when a math string changes After the math waveform is computed for the first time the instrument determines the min max of that waveform data Then the instrument sets the math position so that min max 2 is in the center of the screen In addition the instrument sets the math scale so that the range of the min and max cover 6 divisions This autoscaling process can take up to 1 2 second to complete and will override any vertical scale or position commands for that math waveform received during this time You should insert an appropriate pause in your program after defining and enabling a math waveform before changing its position or scale Math MATH 1 VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt MATH 1 VERTical POSition CH lt x gt POSition REF lt x gt VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt is the desired position in divisions from the center graticule MATH2 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3E 00 positions the Math 2 input signal 1 3 divisions higher than a position of 0 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH1 VERTICAL POSITION might return MATH1 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3000 00 indicating that the current position of Math 1 is 1 3 divisions below the center gr
409. sition for Reference 3 is set to 2 0 the signal represented by that reference will be displayed at 2 0 divisions above the center of the screen NOTE References are static All position and scale changes are applied in a post processing mode Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt VERT1Ccal POSition lt NR3 gt REF lt x gt VERT1Cal POSition Related Commands CH lt x gt POSition MATH 1 VERTical POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt is the desired position in divisions from the center horizontal graticule The range is from 5 to 5 divisions Examples REF2 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3E 00 positions the Reference 2 input signal 1 3 divisions above the center horizontal graticule REF1L VERTICAL POSITION might return REF1 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3000 00 indicating that the current position of Reference 1 is 1 3 divisions below the center horizontal graticule REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle This command sets or returns the vertical scale of a reference waveform The reference waveform is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instruments This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu choosing Reference Setup from the drop down list selecting a reference waveform and then entering the Scale value using the multipurpose knob Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter For a signal with constant amplitude increasing the Scale c
410. st Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 33 Command Groups 2 34 You can set the A or B triggers to edge mode Edge triggering lets you display a waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through a voltage level of your choosing You can also set A triggers to pulse logic or video modes With pulse triggering the instrument triggers whenever it detects a pulse of a certain width or height Logic triggering lets you logically combine the signals on one or more channels The instrument then triggers when it detects a certain combination of signal levels Video triggering enables you to trigger on the most common Standard Definition High Definition and custom video standards You can trigger on all fields all lines or individual video lines Table 2 27 Trigger Commands Command Description BUS Returns the parameters for each bus BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate Sets or returns the bit rate for the CAN bus BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe Sets or returns the probing method used to probe the CAN bus BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint Sets or returns the sample point in to sample during each bit period BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce Sets or returns the CAN data source BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY FORMAt Sets the display format for the numerical information in the bus waveform BUS B lt x gt DISPLAY TYPe Sets the display type for the bus BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce
411. st Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 161 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH 1 VERTical POSition 2 162 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the vertical position of the specified Math waveform The position value is usually applied to the signal before it is digitized The highest three units div scale ranges of a given math are implemented by changing the way the acquired data is displayed When the instrument is operating in any of these highest three scale ranges the position control operates only on the signal after it is digitized Note that if a signal that exceeds the range of the digitizer in one of these three scale ranges is repositioned the displayed waveform will contain clipped values on screen This command is equivalent to selecting Position Scale from the Math menu and then entering a Vert Pos value or adjusting the front panel Vertical POSITION knob Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down Position adjusts only the display position of a waveform whether a channel math or reference waveform The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which input signal values equal to the present offset setting for that reference are displayed For example if the position for Math 3 is set to 2 0 and the off
412. stant time division Or returns the current horizontal record length HORizontal ROLL Returns the horizontal roll mode status The Mark commands provide Mark Commands Command Description MARK Move to the next or previous mark on the waveform MARK CREATE Creates a mark on a particular waveform or all waveforms in a column First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 21 Command Groups Math Command Group 2 22 Mark Commands cont Command Description MARK DELEte Deletes a mark on a particular waveform all waveforms in a column or all marks MARK FREE Returns how many marks are free to be used MARK SELected END Returns the end of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform MARK SELected FOCUS Returns the focus of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn Returns how many marks are in the current zoom pixel column MARK SELected OWNer Returns the owner of the selected mark MARK SELected SOURCE Returns the source waveform of the selected mark MARK SELected STARt Returns the start of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform MARK SELected STATe Returns the on or off state of the selected mark MARK SELected ZOOm POSition Returns the position of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the upper window MARK TOT
413. sted in Alphabetical Order MARK SELected OWNer Query Only Returns the owner of the selected mark for example USER SEARCH 1 Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected OwNer Returns lt QString gt is the owner of the mark MARK SELected SOURCE Query Only Returns the source waveform of the selected mark Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected SOURCE MARK SELected STARt Query Only Returns the start of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected STARt MARK SELected STATe Query Only Returns the on or off state of the selected mark Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected STATe First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 156 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARK SELected ZOOm POSition Query Only Returns the position of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the upper window Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected Z00Om POSition MARK TOTal Query Only Returns how many marks are used Group Mark Syntax MARK TOTal MATH 1 DEFIne This command allows you to define a new waveform using mathematical expressions The mathematical expression can be a string of the form lt wfm gt lt operation gt lt wfm gt where wfm are any combination of live channels or reference waveforms and operation is any of or If the string is in the form FFT lt wfm gt where wfm is any live channel or reference waveform
414. stence 2 116 DISplay XY MODe 2 121 DISplay X Y Y CHannel 2 122 DISplay XY YREF 2 122 E ESE 2 123 ESR 2 124 Ethernet commands ETHERnet DNS IPADDress 2 125 ETHERnet ENET ADDress 2 125 ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress 2 126 ETHERnet DHCPbootp 2 124 ETHERnet DOMAINname 2 125 ETHERnet HTTPPort 2 126 ETHERnet IPADDress 2 126 ETHERnet NAME 2 127 ETHERnet PASS Word 2 127 ETHERnet SUBNETMask 2 128 ETHERnet DNS IPADDress 2 125 ETHERnet ENET ADDress 2 125 ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress 2 126 ETHERnet DHCPbootp 2 124 ETHERnet DOMAINname 2 125 ETHERnet HTTPPort 2 126 ETHERnet IPADDress 2 126 ETHERnet NAME 2 127 ETHERnet PASS Word 2 127 ETHERnet SUBNETMask 2 128 EVENT 2 128 EVMsg 2 128 EVQty 2 129 F FACtory 2 129 FASTAcq 2 130 FASTAcq STATE 2 131 Index 3 Index File System commands FILESystem FREESpace 2 134 FILESystem 2 131 FILESystem COPy 2 132 FILESystem CWD 2 133 FILESystem DELEte 2 133 FILESystem DIR 2 134 FILESystem MKDir 2 134 FILESystem REName 2 135 FILESystem RMDir 2 135 FILESystem FREESpace 2 134 FILESystem 2 131 FILESystem COPy 2 132 FILESystem CWD 2 132 FILESystem DELEte 2 133 FILESystem DIR 2 134 FILESystem MK Dir 2 134 FILESystem REName 2 135 FILESystem RMDir 2 135 FPANEL PRESS 2 136 FPANEL TURN 2 137 G GPIBUsb ADDress 2 137 GPIBUsb HW Version 2 138 GPIBUsb ID 2 138 GPIBUsb SETADDress 2 138 GPIBUsb SETID 2 138
415. strument setup to its factory defaults RECALL SETUP 2 recalls the instrument setup from setup storage location 2 RECALL SETUP TEKOO000 SET recalls the setup from the file TEK00000 SET in the default directory for setups C TekScope setups RECAII WAVEform No Query Form 2 208 Group This command no query form recalls a stored waveform to a reference location This command is equivalent to selecting Recall from the File menu and then pressing the Waveform button Save and Recall First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RECA11 wAVEform lt file path gt REF lt x gt SAVe WAVEform REF lt x gt specifies a location in internal reference memory Reference memory location values range from 1 through 4 lt file path gt specifies a location for a stored waveform file lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form lt drive gt lt dir gt lt filename gt lt drive gt and one or more lt dir gt s are optional If you do not specify them the instrument will read the waveform from the default directory C TekScope Waveforms lt filename gt stands for a filename of up to 128 characters use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but are highly recommended RECALL WAVE
416. sure menu clicking the Statistics button and entering the desired Weight n value Measurement MEASUrement STATIStics WEIghting lt NR1 gt MEASUrement STATIStics WEIghting MEASUrement STATIstics MODE lt NR1 gt is the time constant for the mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 4 sets statistical weighting to 4 MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING might return MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 4 indicating that measurement statistics weighting is currently set to 4 Defines the size and position of the message window This command does not display the window unless MESSage STATE is ON Display MESSage BOX lt X1 gt lt X2 gt lt Y1 gt lt Y2 gt MESSage BOX lt X1 gt and lt X2 gt 0 to 639 and are pixel positions along the horizontal axis lt X1 gt defines the left and lt X2 gt defines the right side of the window lt Y1 gt and lt Y2 gt 0 to 479 and are pixel positions along the vertical axis lt Y1 gt defines the top and lt Y2 gt defines the bottom of the window The reserved height of all characters is 16 pixels so the window must be at least that high to fully display characters First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 199 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MESSage CLEAR No Query Form Group Syntax Examples Removes the message text from the message window Display MESS
417. t provides a status and event reporting system for the GPIB interfaces This system informs you of certain significant events that occur within the instrument The instrument status handling system consists of five 8 bit registers and two queues for each interface The remaining Status subtopics describe these registers and components They also explain how the event handling system operates Registers Overview The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups Status Registers contain information about the status of the instrument They include the Standard Event Status Register SESR m Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue They include the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Service Request Enable Register SRER Status Registers The Standard Event Status Register SESR and the Status Byte Register SBR record certain types of events that may occur while the instrument is in use IEEE Std 488 2 1987 defines these registers Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event such as an execution error or message available When an event of a given type occurs the instrument sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of one You can disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero See Enable Registers Reading the status registers
418. t the operation is complete This bit is set when all pending operations complete following an OPC command The Status Byte Register SBR Records whether output is available in the Output Queue whether the instrument requests service and whether the SESR has recorded any events Use a Serial Poll or the STB query to read the contents of the SBR The bits in the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Output Queue When you use a Serial Poll to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the RQS bit When you use the STB query to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the MSS bit Reading the SBR does not clear the bits 6 7 ROS 5 4 3 l2 l4 Jo l6 ESB Mav MSS Figure 3 2 The Status Byte Register SBR Table 3 2 SBR Bit Functions Bit Function 7 MSB Not used 6 RQS Request Service Obtained from a serial poll Shows that the oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB controller 6 MSS Master Status Summary Obtained from STB query Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 2 SBR Bit Functions cont Bit Function 5 ESB Event Status Bit Shows that status is enabled and present in the SESR 4 MAV Message Available Shows that output is available in th
419. taken over the entire waveform record to a gated region on the waveform HITs histogram hits measures the number of points in or on the histogram box LOW measures the Low reference 0 level sometimes called Baseline of a waveform MAXimum finds the maximum amplitude This value is the most positive peak voltage found It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement METHod command the maximum measurement measures the voltage of the highest nonzero bin in vertical histograms or the time of the right most bin in horizontal histograms MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement METHod command the mean measurement measures the average of all acquired points within or on the histogram MEDian histogram measurement measures the middle point of the histogram box Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box are less than this value and half are greater than this value MINImum finds the minimum amplitude This value is typically the most negative peak voltage It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement METHod command the minimum measurement measures the lowest nonzero bin in vertical histograms or the time of the left most nonzero bin in the horizontal histograms First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wi
420. tax Related Commands Arguments Waveform Transfer DATa STOP lt NR1 gt DATa STOP CURVe DATa DATa STARt SAVe WAVEform SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat WFMInpre NR_ Pt WFMOutpre NR_ Pt lt NR1 gt is the last data point that will be transferred which ranges from to the record length If lt NR1 gt is greater than the record length then data will be transferred up to the record length If both DATa STARt and DATa STOP are greater than the record length the last data point in the record is returned DATa STARt and DATa STOP are order independent When DATa STOP is less than DATa STARt the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE query If you always want to transfer complete waveforms set DATa STARt to 1 and DATa STOP to the maximum record length or larger DATA STOP might return DATA STOP 14900 indicating that 14900 is the last waveform data point that will be transferred DATA STOP 15000 specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point 15000 This command sets or returns the date that the instrument can display This command is equivalent to selecting Set Date amp Time from the Utilities menu and then setting the fields in the Date group box Miscellaneous DATE lt QString gt DATE TIME lt QString gt is a date in the form yyyy mm dd where yyyy refers to a four digit year number mm refers to a two digit month number from 01 to 12 and dd refers to a two digit day number in the m
421. te individual channels for different delays introduced by their individual input hook ups Vertical CH lt x gt DESKew lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt DESKew lt NR3 gt is the deskew time for this channel ranging from 25 ns to 25 ns with a resolution of 1 ps Out of range values are clipped CH4 DESKew 5 0E 9 sets the deskew time for channel 4 to 5 ns CH2 DESKew might return CH2 DESKEW 2 0000E 09 indicating that the deskew time for channel 2 is set to 2 ns This command sets or returns the invert function for the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from through 4 for four channel instruments or through 2 for two channel instruments When on the invert function inverts the waveform for the specified channel This command is equivalent to selecting On or Off for the Invert function in the Vertical Setup control window NOTE This command inverts the waveform for display purposes only The instrument does not use an inverted waveform for triggers or trigger logic inputs Vertical CH lt x gt INVert ON OFF NR1 CH lt x gt INVert First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments OFF argument turns off the invert function for the specified channel ON argument turns on the invert function for the specified channel lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the invert function any other value turns on the invert f
422. tes waveform acquisition before taking the measurement on the acquired data you can synchronize the program First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 7 Status and Events ACQUIRE STATE ON IH Acquiring Waveform Data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE Processing Time Figure 3 8 Processing Sequence With Synchronization Using the WAI Command 3 8 Using the BUSY Query You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application program WAI BUSY OPC and OPC The WAI command forces completion of previous commands that generate an OPC message No commands after the WAI are processed before the OPC message s are generated The same command sequence using the WAI command for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement es WAI Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the instrument but the commands will not be processed by the instrument until all O
423. th 2 286 TRIGger A PULse WIDth HIGHLimit 2 289 TRIGger A PULse WIDth LEVel 2 289 TRIGger A PULse WIDth LOWLimit 2 289 TRIGger A PULse WIDth POLarity 2 290 TRIGger A PULse WIDth SOUrce 2 290 TRIGger A PULse WIDth WHEn 2 291 TRIGger A PULse WIDth WIDth 2 291 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate DELTatime 2 286 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate HIGHLimit 2 287 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate LOWLimit 2 287 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate POLarity 2 287 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate SOUrce 2 287 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold HIGH 2 288 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold LOW 2 288 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold 2 288 TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate WHEn 2 289 TRIGger A PULSE Width POLarity 2 291 TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce 2 292 TRIGger A PULSE Width WHEn 2 292 TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth 2 293 TRIGger A PULSEWIDth 2 291 TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 2 294 TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce 2 295 TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 296 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE 2 297 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 298 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold 2 298 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk 2 297 TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 299 TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 2 300 TRIGger A SETHold DATa 2 299 TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime 2 300 Index 14 TRIGger A SETHold SETTime 2 301 TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 305 TR
424. that is faster or slower than the specified delta time This is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the Trigger When Transition Time setting Trigger TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate WHEn FASTer SLOWer EQUal UNEQual TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate WHEn TRIGger A PULse WIDth HIGHLimit Group Syntax This command sets or returns the upper limit for the width trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe WIDth HIGHLimit TRIGger A PULse WIDth LEVel Group Syntax This command sets or returns the threshold for the pulse width trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe WIDth LEVel TRIGger A PULse WIDth LOWLimit This command sets or returns the lower limit for the width trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth command First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 289 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Trigger TRIGger A PULSe WIDth LOWLimit TRIGger A PULse WIDth POLarity Group Syntax This command sets or returns the polarity for the width trigger This command is provided for compa
425. the commands in the Display command group to change the graticule style the displayed intensities and to set the characteristics of the waveform display You can set the display of date and time cursor histogram mask and measurement readouts measurement annotations and the mode in which waveforms are displayed There are six color palettes from which you can select Normal displays hues and lightness levels for best overall viewing m Temp displays areas of the waveform with the highest sample density in warmer colors red shades while the areas of lowest sample density appear in cooler colors blue shades Spectral displays areas of the waveform with the highest sample density in blue shades while the areas of lowest sample density appear in red shades Green displays waveforms in shades of green Areas of the waveform with the highest sample density appear in lighter green shades while the areas of lowest sample density appear in darker green shades Gray displays waveforms in shades of gray Areas of the waveform with the highest sample density appear in lighter gray shades while the areas of lowest sample density appear in darker gray shades User allows you to create a customized color palette Use the commands to set the style that best displays your waveforms and graticule display properties Note that the mode you choose globally affects all displayed waveforms Table 2 17 Display Commands Comma
426. the oscilloscope screen which is a list of the immediate values of all available measurements for the active signal Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement SNAPShot Examples MEASUrement STATIstics MODE This command controls the operation and display of management statistics This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu clicking the Statistics button and then choosing the desired Measurement Format Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement STATIStics MODE OFF ON MEASUrement STATIStiCs MODE Related Commands MEASUrement STATIstics WElghting Arguments OFF turns all measurements off This is the default value ON turns on statistics and displays all statistics for each measurement Examples MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE OFF turns statistic measurements off MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE might return MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE ON indicating that measurement statistics are turned on and all statistics are being displayed for each measurement First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 198 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement STATIstics WElghting Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples MESSage BOX Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the time constant for mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Mea
427. tibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe WIDth POLarity TRIGger A PULse WIDth SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 290 This command sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe WIDth SoOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 LINE EXT TRIGger A PULSe WIDth SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the A edge trigger source EXT specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector located on the rear panel of the instrument LINE specifies AC line voltage TRIGGER A PULSE WIDTH SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the pulse width source TRIGGER A PULSE WIDTH SOURCE might return TRIGGER A PULSE WIDTH SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the pulse width source First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A PULse WIDth WHEn This command sets or returns whether to trigger on a pulse width that falls outside or within the specified range of limits This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A PULSE Width WHEn command Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULse WIDth WHEn TRIGger A PULse WIDth WIDth This commands sets or ret
428. time period is specified by TRIGger B TIMe First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 313 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER B BY TIME sets the B trigger to occur at a set time after the A trigger event TRIGGER B BY might return TRIGGER B BY EVENTS indicating that the B trigger takes place following a set number of trigger events after the A trigger occurs TRIGger B EDGE Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the source slope and coupling for B trigger This command is equivalent to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the current Source Slope and Coupling settings Trigger TRIGger B EDGE TRIGger B EDGE COUPIling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce TRIGGER B EDGE might return TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH1 SLOPE RISE COUPLING DC TRIGger B EDGE COUPling Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 314 This command sets or returns the type of coupling for the B trigger This command is equivalent to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the setting from the Coupling drop down list Trigger TRIGger B EDGE COUPling DC HFRej LFRej NOISErej TRIGger B EDGE COUPling TRIGger B EDGE DC selects DC trigger coupling HFRej selects high frequency reject coupling LFRej selects low frequency reject c
429. to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 WHEn SLOwer FASTer EQual UNEQua SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1l wHEn FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is faster than the set volts second rate SLOwer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is slower than the set volts second rate EQua sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is equal to the set volts second rate within a 5 tolerance UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is not equal to the set volts second rate 5 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe Group Syntax This command sets or returns the trigger type setting for a search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe EDGe SETHOld PULSEWidth RUNt TRANSi1 tion SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 245 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first The thresholds are set with the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt and SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt commands PULSEWIdth triggers when
430. to selecting Measurement First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 169 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Setup from the Measure menu choosing the Time tab clicking the Delay button to display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Source2 To setting Tip Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types which require both a target Source and reference Source2 source Measurement MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt REF lt x gt HIStogram MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 MEASUrement MMed SOURCE CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models MATH lt y gt is a math waveform The y variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models REF lt X gt is a reference waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4 channel models and 1 to 2 for 2 channel models HIStogram indicates histogram as the object to be measured MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 REFS3 sets the waveform in reference memory location 3 as the delay to source when making delay measurements MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 might return MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 MATHI indicating th
431. togram that are within three standard deviations of the histogram mean SIxXSigmajit histogram measurement is six x RMSJitter SNRatio measures the signal to noise ratio The signal to noise ratio is the amplitude of a noise rejection band centered on the mid level STDdev measures the standard deviation Root Mean Square RMS deviation of all acquired points within or on the histogram box UNDEFINED is the default measurement type which indicates that no measurement type is specified Once a measurement type is chosen it can be cleared using this argument First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WAVEFORMS waveform count measures the number of waveforms used to calculate the histogram MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE FREQUENCY defines the immediate measurement to be a frequency measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE might return MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPe RMS indicating that the immediate measurement is the true Root Mean Square voltage MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Query Only Group Syntax Examples This query only command returns the units of the immediate measurement Measurement MEASUrement IMMed UNItS MEASUREMENT IMMED UNITS might return MEASUREMENT IMMED UNIts s indicating that units for the immediate measurement are in seconds MEASUrement IMMed VALue Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands
432. tons and knobs including the touch screen There is no front panel equivalent Miscellaneous Lock ALL NONe LOCk UNLock ALL disables all front panel controls NONe enables all front panel controls This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL command First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples LRN Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State RWLS the LOCk NONe command has no effect For more information see the ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation section 2 8 3 on RL State Descriptions LOCK ALL locks the front panel controls LOCK might return LOCK NONE indicating that the front panel controls are enabled by this command This query only command returns the commands that list the instrument settings except for configuration information for the calibration values allowing you to record or learn the current instrument settings You can use these commands to return the instrument to the state it was in when you made the LRN query This command is identical to the SET Command Miscellaneous LRN SET LRN might return the following response ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP STATE 13 MODE SAMPLE NUMENV 10 NUMAVG 16 NUMSAMPLES 16000 SAMPLINGMODE IT FASTACQ STATE 0 APPLICATION GPKNOB1 ACTIVE
433. trigger detects the threshold level Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired logical input from the Ch2 drop down list which is located in the Input Threshold group box To set or query the A logic trigger input for a four channel instrument see TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH4 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command applies to two channel instruments Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut CH2 HIGH LOWw xX TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut CH2 TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt HIGH specifies the logic high LOW specifies the logic low X specifies a don t care state TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH2 HIGH sets the A logic trigger input to logic high for channel 2 when the logic class is set to PATtern When the threshold level is detected HIGH places a 1 on the channel 2 input to the selected function TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH2 might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH2 HIGH indicating that the logic input for channel 2 is logic high TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH4 Conditions Group This command sets or returns the A logic trigger input for channel 4 in four channel instruments only
434. ts the diagnostic loop option Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg LOOP OPTion ALWAYS FAIL ONFAIL ONCE ALWAYS continues looping until diagnostics are stopped via the front panel or by an instrument command FAIL causes looping until the first diagnostic failure or until diagnostics are stopped ONFAIL causes looping on a specific test group as long as a FAIL status is returned from the test ONCE executes diagnostics test sequence once DIAG LOOP OPTION FALL stops the diagnostic loop after the first failure First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the diagnostic loop option to run N times Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes lt NR1 gt DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes lt NR1 gt is the number of diagnostic loops DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES 3 sets the diagnostic loop to run three times DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES might return DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES 5 indicating the diagnostic loop is set to run five times DIAg LOOP STOP No Query Form Group Syntax Examples DIAg MODe Group Syntax Stops diagnostic at the end of the current loop Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg LOOP STOP DIAG LOOP STOP stops diagnostic at the end of the current loop Select the test suite of diagnostics that is to be run Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg
435. tting DlSplay XY MODe Sets or returns the display mode DiSplay XY YCHannel Specifies the Y channel to be displayed against a channel waveform DiSplay XY YREF Specifies the Y channel to be displayed against a reference waveform MESSage BOX Defines the size and position of the message window MESSage CLEAR Removes the message text from the message window First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 17 Command Groups Table 2 17 Display Commands cont Command Description MESSage SHOW Clears the contents of the message window and displays the new message in the window MESSage STATE Controls the display of the message window Ethernet Command Group Use the commands in the Ethernet Command group to set up the Ethernet remote interface Table 2 18 Ethernet Commands Command Description ETHERnet DHCPbootp Sets or returns the network initialization search for a DHCP BOOTP server ETHERnet DNS IPADDress Sets or returns the network Domain Name Server DNS IP address ETHERnet DOMAINname Sets or returns the network domain name ETHERnet ENET ADDress Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Sets or returns the remote interface gateway IP address ETHERnet HTTPPort Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP port value ETHERnet IPADDress Sets or returns the IP
436. ttings You can specify up to four zoom areas You can also specify a zoomed waveform as a zoom source which enables you to zoom in on a zoomed waveform Table 2 30 Zoom Commands Command Description ZOOm Returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display ZOOm GRAticule SIZE Sets or returns the size of the zoom graticule ZOOm GRAticule SPLit Sets or returns the sizes of the acquisition and zoom windows when Zoom is selected ZOOm MODe STATE Sets or returns the zoom mode ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt Sets or returns zoom factors for the specified zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor Returns the zoom factor of a particular zoom box ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the horizontal zoom position for the specified waveform in the specified zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal zoom scale of the specified waveform in the specified zoom First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 30 Zoom Commands cont Command Description ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the horizontal zoom position for the specified waveform in the specified zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal zoom scale of the specified waveform in the specified zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt STATE Specifies or returns a trace as zoomed on or off Fi
437. turns the polarity setting for an transition search to determine where to place a mark Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 POLarity POSitive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower most negative to higher most positive level for transition triggering to occur NEGative indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper most positive to lower most negative level for transition triggering to occur EITher indicates either positive or negative polarity SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Group 2 244 This command sets or returns the source setting for an transition search to determine where to place a mark Search First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFall1l SoUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 SoUrce CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where lt x gt 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Group Syntax Arguments This command sets or returns the condition setting for an transition search
438. unction Examples CH4 INVert ON inverts the waveform on channel 4 CH2 INVert might return CH2 INVERT 0 indicating that the invert function for channel 2 is off CH lt x gt OFFSet This command sets or returns the vertical offset for the specified channel The channel is specified by x The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments This command is equivalent to selecting Offset from the Vertical menu This command offsets the vertical acquisition window moves the level at the vertical center of the acquisition window for the selected channel Visualize offset as scrolling the acquisition window towards the top of a large signal for increased offset values and scrolling towards the bottom for decreased offset values The resolution of the vertical window sets the offset increment for this control Offset adjusts only the vertical center of the acquisition window for channel waveforms to help determine what data is acquired The instrument always displays the input signal minus the offset value The channel reference marker will move to the vertical graticule position given by the negative of the offset value divided by the scale factor unless that position is off screen If the computed coordinate for the reference mark is off screen the mark moves to the nearest screen limit and changes from a right pointing arrow to an arrow pointing in the appropriate off sc
439. urns the status of internal and factory calibration First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 13 Command Groups Table 2 15 Calibration and Diagnostic Commands cont Command Description CALibrate RESults FACtory Frequency Returns the status of internal and factory frequency calibration CALibrate RESults FACtory Trigger Returns the status of internal and factory trigger calibration CALibrate RESults FACtory Voltage Returns the status of internal and factory voltage calibration CALibrate TEMPerature Returns the temperature during the last signal path compensation operation DIAg LOOP OPTion Sets the diagnostic loop option DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes Sets the diagnostic loop option to run N times DIAg LOOP STOP Stops diagnostic at the end of the current loop DIAg MODe Select the test suite of diagnostics that is to be run DIAg RESUIt FLAg Returns the pass fail status from the last diagnostic test sequence execution DIAg RESUIt LOG Returns the internal results log from the last diagnostic test sequence execution DIAg SELect ALL Selects all available diagnostics DIAg SELect lt function gt Selects one of the available diagnostic areas DIAg STATE Sets the instrument operating state Cursor Command Group 2 14 Use the commands in the Cursor Command Group to control the cursor display and readout You can use these commands to
440. urns the width setting for the pulse width trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth command Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSe WIDth wIDth TRIGger A PULSEWIDth Query Only This query only command returns the width parameters for the pulse width trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSEWIDth Examples TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH might return TRIGGER A WIDTH LOWLIMIT 2 Q000E 9 HIGHLIMIT 2 0000E 9 WHEN WITHIN POLARITY POSITIVE as the current A width trigger parameters TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity This command sets or returns the polarity for the width trigger Group Trigger First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 291 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity NEGative POSitive TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity NEGative specifies a negative pulse POSitive specifies a positive pulse TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the pulse polarity to negative TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY might return TRIGGER A WIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE indicating a positive pulse TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger Trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth SoUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 LINE EXT TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH lt x gt spe
441. us Byte Register except the MAV bit If the CLS command immediately follows an lt EOI gt the Output Queue and MAV bit Status Byte Register bit 4 are also cleared MAV indicates that information is in the output queue The device clear DCL GPIB control message will clear the output queue and thus MAV CLS does not clear the output queue or MAV CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an OPC This will happen if a single sequence acquisition operation is still being processed when the CLS command is executed Group Status and Error Syntax CLS Related Commands DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB Examples CLS clears the instrument status data structures CURSor This query only command returns all of the current cursor settings Group Cursor Syntax CURSor First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 91 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples CURSor FUNCtion Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 92 CURSOR might return the following as the current cursor settings gt CURSOR STATE 1 FUNCTION VBARS LINESTYLE SOLID MODE INDEPENDENT SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH1 SCREEN STYLE LINES CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITION1 1 6000E 6 POSITION2 1 6000E 6 CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 300 0000E 3 POSITION2 300 0000E 3 UNITS BASE gt CURSOR WAVEFORM POSITION 1 1 6000E 6 POSITION2 1 6000E 6 SOURCE2 CH1 UNITS BASE STYLE LINE_X CURSOR XY
442. v div 200 0ns div 5000 points Sampl mode CURVE51 50 51 48 51 48 50 49 51 49 51 48 51 48 51 49 50 49 50 48 49 4 WFMinpre Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples WFMinpre BIT_Nr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 324 This query only command returns the waveform formatting specification to be applied to the next incoming CURVe command data Waveform Transfer WFMInpre WFMOutpre WFMINPRE might return the waveform formatting as WFMINPRE BIT_NR 8 BN_FMTRI BYT_NR 1 BYT_OR MSB ENCDG BIN NR_PT 500 PT_FMT Y PT_OFF 0 XINCR 2 0000E 6 XZERO 1 7536E 6 XUNIT S 5 YMULT 1 0000E 3 YOFF 0 0000 YZERO 0 0000 YUNIT Vv This command sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the waveform as specified by the DATa DESTination command This specification is only meaningful when WFMInpre ENCdg is set to BIN Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BIT_Nr lt NRI1 gt WFMInpre BIT_Nr DATa DESTination WFMInpre ENCdg WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMOutpre BIT_Nr lt NR1 gt number of bits per data point can be 8 16 RI RP or 32 FP First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples WFMinpre BN_Fmt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre BYT_Nr Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMINPRE BIT_NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for incoming RI and RP binary form
443. value is rounded to a valid scale setting This command is equivalent to selecting Position Scale from the Horiz Acq menu and then choosing a Scale value Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal MAIn SECdiv HORi zontal MAIn SECdiv Arguments lt NR3 gt is the time per division The range is from 200 ps through 40 s Examples HORIZONTAL MAIN SECDIV 2E 6 sets the main scale to 2us per division HORIZONTAL MAIN SECDIV might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2 0000E 06 indicating that the main scale is currently set to 2 us per division HORizontal MAIn UNIts Query Only This query only command returns the units for the horizontal time base It is equivalent to HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal MAIn UNIts Related Commands HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing Examples HORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS might return HORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS STRING Hz First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 148 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This command sets or returns the units string for the horizontal time base trigger delay Horizontal HORi zontal MAInN UNIts STRing HORizontal MAIn UNIts HORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS STRING might return HORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS STRING Hz indicating that the horizontal units string is set to Hertz HORizontal PREViewstate Que
444. veform Or returns whether the specified bus channel is on or off SELect CH lt x gt Turns on the specified waveform Or returns whether the specified channel is on or off First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 28 Vertical Commands cont Command Description Turns on the specified digital waveform Or returns whether the specified digital channel is on or off SELect CONTROI Sets or returns the waveform controlled by the front panel SELect MATH 1 Turns on the math waveform Or returns whether the math waveform is on or off SELect REF lt x gt Turns on the specified reference waveform Or returns whether the specified reference waveform is on or off Waveform Transfer Command Group Data Formats Use the commands in the Waveform Transfer Command Group to transfer waveform data points to and from the instrument Waveform data points are a collection of values that define a waveform One data value usually represents one data point in the waveform record When working with envelope waveforms each data value is either the minimum or maximum of a min max pair Before you transfer waveform data you must specify the data format record length and waveform source Acquired waveform data uses eight or more bits to represent each data point The number of bits used depends on the acquisition mode specified when you acquired the data Data a
445. veform channel OFF button RMENU lt x gt Screen side menu buttons where lt x gt 1 for the top most side menu button and lt x gt 65 for the bottom most side menu button First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2 34 FPAnel PRESS arguments cont Argument Description TRIGger Trigger MENU button VERTical Vertical MENU button Examples FPANEL PRESS AUTOSET executes the oscilloscope Autoset function FPANEL TURN No Query Form Duplicates the action of turning a specified front panel control knob Group Miscellaneous Syntax FPANEL TURN lt knob gt Arguments lt knob gt is the name for a rotating control Most of the argument names associate directly with their front panel knob For example GPKNOB is for the general purpose knob HORZSCALE is for the horizontal scale knob and so on comma separates the control knob argument from the numeric rotation value argument You do not need a white space between the arguments and the comma lt n gt represents the rotation direction and magnitude of rotation Negative values represent a counterclockwise knob rotation and positive values represent a clockwise rotation The magnitude of lt n gt specifies the amount of the turn where lt n gt 1 represents turning the knob one unit lt n gt 2 represents turning the knob two units lt n gt 5 represents turning the knob
446. veform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YMU1t DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE YMULT might return WFMOUTPRE YMULT 4 0000E 3 indicating that the vertical scale for the corresponding waveform is 100 mV div WFMOutpre YOFf Query Only 2 342 Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the vertical offset in digitized levels for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command For those formats in which BYT_NR is important all non floating point formats this command must take the location of the binary point implied by WFMOutpre BYT_Nr into consideration An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YOFf DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BYT_Nr WFMOUTPRE YOFF might return WFMOUTPRE YOFF 50 0000E 0 indicating that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing levels 2 divisions below center screen First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre YUNit Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the vertical units for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YUNit DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE YUNIT might return WFMOUTPRE
447. ver gt The host name of the print LPR server lt address gt The IP address of the print server HARDCopy PRINTer DELete No Query Form Removes a network printer from the list of available printers Either the index from HARDCopy PRINTer LIST or the printer name can be used as an argument The printer name is case sensitive Group Hard Copy Syntax HARDCopy PRINTer DELete lt index gt lt name gt Arguments lt index gt is the index of the printer to be deleted lt name gt is the name of the printer to be deleted HARDCopy PRINTer LIST Query Only Returns the list of currently attached printers Group Hard Copy First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 141 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax HARDCopy PRINTer LIST HARDCopy PRINTer REName No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments HDR Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 142 Renames a network printer on the list of available printers replacing the currently stored settings with the settings specified in the command Either the index from HARDCopy PRINTer LIST or the printer name can be used as the first argument Four arguments must be present but the arguments may be empty strings if the value for a field is to be deleted Hard Copy HARDCopy PRINTer REName lt index gt lt name gt lt new_name gt lt new_server gt lt new_address gt lt index gt is the
448. veraging where the average comes from a single waveform acquisition The number of samples taken during the acquisition interval determines the number of data values that compose the average AVErage specifies averaging mode in which the resulting waveform shows an average of SAMp le data points from several separate waveform acquisitions The instrument processes the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired waveform creating a running exponential average of the input signal The number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire NUMAVg command First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ENVe lope specifies envelope mode where the resulting waveform shows the PEAKdetect range of data points from several separate waveform acquisitions The number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the envelope waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire NUMENv command ACQUIRE MODE ENVELOPE sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that is an envelope of many individual waveform acquisitions ACQUIRE MODE might return ACQUire MODe AVERAGE indicating that the displayed waveform is the average of the specified number of waveform acquisitions ACQuire NUMACq Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples ACQuire NUMAVg This query only command returns the numb
449. view of the commands in that group and a table that lists all the commands and queries for that group You can click a command in the listing to display a detailed description of the command m Status and Events This topic discusses the status and event reporting system for the GPIB interfaces This system informs you of certain significant events that occur within the instrument Topics that are discussed include registers queues event handling sequences synchronization methods and messages that the instrument may return including error messages m Miscellaneous This topic contains miscellaneous information such as a list of reserved words a table of the factory initialization default settings and GPIB interface specifications that may be helpful when using GPIB commands to remotely control the instrument First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 1 1 Getting Started Setting Up Remote Communications Connecting to the Instrument Setting the GPIB Address Before setting up the instrument for remote communications using the electronic physical GPIB interface you should familiarize yourself with the following GPIB requirements m A unique device address must be assigned to each device on the bus No two devices can share the same device address No more than 15 devices can be connected to any one line m One device should be connected for every 6 feet 2 meters of cable used
450. waveform data is saved in a format that contains comma delimited values These waveform data files are named using the csv filename extension Saving waveforms in CSV format enables spreadsheet programs to import the data SPREADSHEETTXt specifies that waveform data is saved in a format that contains tab delimited values These waveform data files are named using the txt filename extension Saving waveforms in this format enables spreadsheet programs to import the data Examples SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL specifies that the internal file format is the format used for saving waveforms SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT might return SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL indicating that waveforms are saved using the internal format First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 217 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments This command copies the search criteria to the trigger or the trigger criteria to the search Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy SEARCHtotrigger TRIGgertosearch UNDo SEARCHtotrigger copies the search criteria to the trigger TRIGgertosearch copies the trigger criteria to the search UNDo undoes the last copy SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE Group Syntax Arguments This command sets the search state to on or off and the query form returns the search state The returned value is either 0 or
451. waveforms in the current zoom pixel column MARK DELEte No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments 2 154 Deletes a mark on a particular waveform all waveforms in a column or all marks Mark MARK DELEte CH lt x gt REF lt x gt MATH COLUMN SELECTED ALL CH lt x gt deletes the marks on a channel waveform where lt x gt is the channel number REF lt x gt deletes the marks on a reference waveform where lt x gt is the reference waveform number MATH deletes the marks on the math waveform COLUMN deletes the marks on all waveforms in the current zoom pixel column First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SELECTED deletes the selected mark ALL deletes all marks MARK FREE Query Only Returns how many marks are free to be used Group Mark Syntax MARK FREE MARK SELected END Query Only Returns the end of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected END MARK SELected FOCUS Query Only Returns the focus of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected FOCUS MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn Query Only Returns how many marks are in the current zoom pixel column Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 155 Commands Li
452. with an ESR query and verify that the error bit returned and if set check the event queue to ascertain the reason for the error If the error was caused by an interrupted query then the asynchronous data transfer had not completed when the ESR query was sent In this case you may need increase your program time out value in order to ensure that all data is transferred and read CURVE lt Block gt sets the format of the waveform data transferred to and from the instrument to binary format This command sets or returns the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe command First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DATa DESTination Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Waveform Transfer DATa INIT SNAp DATa CURVe DATa STARt DATa STOP DATa ENCdg SAVe WAV Eform FILEFormat WFMInpre NR_Pt WFMOutpre NR_ Pt INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults SNAp sets DATa STARt and DATa STOP to match the current V Bar Paired Split cursor positions DATA might return DATA DESTINATION REF1L ENCDG RIBINARY SOURCE CH1 START 1 STOP 500 DATA INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults This command sets or returns the reference memory location for storing wavefor
453. x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 2 65 BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce 2 65 BUS B lt x gt POSition 2 66 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLAR ity 2 67 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce 2 67 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSIT POLARIty 2 68 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce 2 68 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLAR ity 2 66 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 2 67 BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity 2 68 BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce 2 69 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index BUS B lt x gt STATE 2 69 BUS B lt x gt TYPE 2 70 BUS THReshold CH lt x gt 2 70 BUS 2 62 TRIGger 2 254 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition 2 256 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 257 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier 2 257 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe 2 258 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue 2 258 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype 2 259 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe 2 259 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue 2 260 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe 2 260 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TY Pe 2 260 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue 2 261 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition 2 261 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection 2 262 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe
454. xample here is a mark 4 Strings can have upper or lower case characters 5 If you use a GPIB network you cannot terminate a quoted string with the END message before the closing delimiter 6 A carriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does not terminate the string but is treated as just another character in the string 7 The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000 characters Here are some invalid strings Invalid string argument quotes are not of the same type m test lt EOI gt termination character is embedded in the string Several instrument commands use a block argument form see the following table Table 2 12 Block Argument Symbol Meaning lt NZDig gt A nonzero digit character in the range of 1 9 lt Dig gt A digit character in the range of 0 9 lt DChar gt A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00 through FF 0 through 255 decimal lt Block gt A block of data bytes defined as lt Block gt lt NZDig gt lt Dig gt lt Dig gt lt DChar gt 0 lt DChar gt lt terminator gt lt NZDig gt specifies the number of lt Dig gt elements that follow Taken together the lt NZDig gt and lt Dig gt elements form a decimal integer that specifies how many lt DChar gt elements follow First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax Block Argument
455. xamples This query only command returns the upper and lower threshold limits for the transition time trigger This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments Trigger TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate THReshold TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION SLEWRATE THRESHOLD might return TRIGGER A PULSE TRANSITION THRESHOLD HIGH 1 2000 LOW 800 0000E 3 indicating the upper and lower threshold limits for the transition time trigger TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold HIGH Group Syntax This command sets or returns the upper most positive transition trigger threshold This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate THReshold HIGH TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate THReshold LOW Group Syntax 2 288 This command sets or returns the lower most negative transition trigger threshold This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments See the TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt command Trigger TRIGger A PULSe TRANSition SLEWRate THReshold LOw First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A PULse TRANsition SLEWRate WHEn Group Syntax This command sets or returns whether to check for a transitioning signal
456. y this number would be the actual time between the A and B triggers In the event that this number is not meaningful the string will be exactly 0 Examples WFMOUTPRE WFID might return WFMOUTPRE WFID Ch1 DC coupling 100 0mvolts div 500 0us div 500 points Hi Res mode WFMOutpre XINcr Query Only This query only command returns the horizontal point spacing in units of WFMOutpre XUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command This value corresponds to the sampling interval An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMOutpre XINcr Related Commands DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre XUNit Examples WFMOUTPRE XINCR might return WFMOUTPRE XINCR 10 0000E 6 indicating that the horizontal sampling interval is 10 us point 500 us div First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer 2 340 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre XUNit Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples WFMOutpre XZEro Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the horizontal units for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre XUNit DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE XUNIT might return WFMOUTPRE XUNIT HZ indicating that the horizontal units for the waveform ar
457. y are described in the service manual located on your DPO4000 Documentation CD ROM in PDF format You can also order a printed copy Table 2 15 Calibration and Diagnostic Commands Command Description CAL Instructs the instrument to perform self calibration CAL Returns the internal and factory calibration status and the calibration due date CALibrate FACtory Starts and stops the factory calibration process CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy DUE Queries if calibration is due CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy HOURs Sets or returns hours when calibration is due CALibrate FACtory NOTIfy YEARs Sets or returns the number of years when calibration is due CALibrate FACtory STATus Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatile memory CALibrate FACtory STEPSTAtus CALibrate FACtory STEPST Mulus Returns information to synchronize programmed factory calibration steps Returns information about an input signal required for calibration CALibrate INTERNal Starts the internal signal path calibration CALibrate INTERNal STARt Starts the internal signal path calibration CALibrate INTERNal STATus Returns the current status of the internal sigan path calibration CALibrate RESults Returns the status of all calibration subsystems without performing an SPC operation CALibrate RESults SPC Returns the results of the last SPC operation CALibrate RESults FACtory Ret
458. y format whose further specification is determined by WFMOutpre BYT_Nr WFMOutpre BIT_Nr WFMOutpre BN_Fmt and WFMOutpre BYT_Or WFMOUTPRE ENCDG might return WFMOUTPRE ENCDG BIN indicating that outgoing waveform data will be sent in binary format First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOUTPRE ENCDG ASC specifies that the outgoing waveform data will be sent in ASCII format WFMOutpre NR_Pt Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the number of points for the DATa SOUrce waveform that will be transmitted in response to a CURVe query An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre NR_Pt CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAVEform SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat WFMInpre NR_ Pt WFMOUTPRE NR_PT might return WFMOUTPRE NR_PT 5000 indicating that there are 5000 data points to be sent WFMOutpre PT_Fmt Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples This query only command returns the point format for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The format specifies a set of equations describing how the scale factors in the preamble are used to give meaning to the CURVe data points An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre PT_Fmt
459. y only command returns a list of the options installed in your instrument Status and Error OPT OPT might return 3M 16 Meg Max 4M CH This command sets and queries the power on status flag that controls the automatic power on handling of the DESER SRER and ESER registers When PSC is true the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at power on When PSC is false the current values in the DESER SRER and ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off and are restored at power on Status and Error PSC lt NRI1 gt PSC DESE ESE FACtory RST SRE lt NR1 gt 0 sets the power on status clear flag to false disables the power on clear and allows the instrument to possibly assert SRQ after power on any other value sets the power on status clear flag to true enabling the power on status clear and prevents any SRQ assertion after power on PSC O sets the power on status clear flag to false PSC might return to indicate that the power on status clear flag is set to true This command sets or returns a string of Protected User Data This data is protected by the PASSWord command You can modify it only by first entering the correct password This password is not necessary to query the data First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples RCL No Query Form Group S
460. y only command returns information about the immediate delay measurement This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu choosing the Time tab and then clicking the Delay button Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed DELay Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIREction This command sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines the delay to edge when taking an immediate delay measurement Use the MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 command to specify the delay to waveform This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu choosing the Time tab clicking the Delay button to display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Search Direction setting First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 167 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIREction BACKWards FORWards MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIREction MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 BACKwards starts the search at the end of the waveform and looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform FORWwards starts the search at the beginning of the waveform and looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY D
461. yntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Status and Error PUD lt Block gt lt QString gt PUD lt Block gt is a block containing up to 300 characters lt QString gt is a string containing up to 300 characters PUD 229This instrument belongs to me stores the string This instrument belongs to me in the user protected data area PUD might return 221PROPERTY OF COMPANY X This command no query form restores the state of the instrument from a copy of the settings stored in memory The settings are stored using the SAV command If factory is referenced by specifying 0 the factory default values will be restored This command is equivalent to RECAII SETup and performs the same function as selecting Recall from the File menu and then pressing the Setup button Save and Recall RCL lt NR1 gt FACtory LRN RECAII SETUp RST SAV SAVe SETUp lt NR1 gt is a value in the range from 0 to 10 A value of 1 to 10 specifies a saved setup storage location Specifying a value of 0 causes the instrument factory defaults to be restored Using an out of range value causes an error 222 Data out of range RCL 3 restores the instrument from a copy of the settings stored in memory location 3 First Draft October 18 2005 Kirk Wimmer DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 207 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RECAII SETUp No Query Form

SEARCH:SEARCH

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents